JP2018175984A - Enclosed type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To simplify a preparation operation when installing an enclosed type game machine and also to simplify a discharge operation of game media to increase labor efficiency of staff members of a game hall.SOLUTION: In a state where enclosure balls have been completely fed for a prescribed number of pieces (50 pieces), a ball lifting switch (upper) 41a is in a state where balls are being detected. If a ball discharge switch 922 is operated in the state, a ball discharge part 915 is operated to perform a ball discharge. On the other hand, in a case of a Pachinko machine 2 when installed in a game hall, the enclosure balls are not fed and the ball lifting switch (upper) 41a is in a state where balls are not being detected. If the ball discharge switch 922 is operated in the state, balls inputted from an out port 145 are fed upward by a transfer device 190 to feed balls for the prescribed number of pieces.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to an enclosed type game machine for playing a game using a game medium enclosed inside.

  For example, a game medium used in a game is collected and circulated to a position where it can be used by a launcher (a position that can be used for playing), to what is conventionally and generally known as this type of enclosed type game machine. It is possible to provide a circulation path for letting the game medium be pumped up by the transport mechanism before the launcher and take out the game medium before the game medium feed mechanism which sends the game medium to the launch position of the launcher. There was a thing (patent document 1).

JP, 2008-6092, A

  In the case described in this patent document 1, when the enclosed type game machine is carried into the game arcade and installed, the enclosed type game machine is in a state where the game medium is not yet enclosed, so the enclosed type is enclosed. It is necessary to supply a predetermined number of gaming media into the circulation path of the gaming machine, and the gaming media are transported by the transport mechanism to be in a ready state where gaming using the gaming media is possible.

  However, in this conventional enclosed type game machine, the operation of setting the preparation completion state by supplying the game medium at the stage newly installed in the game arcade and the extraction operation of the game medium are complicated, and the game arcade clerk There is a drawback in that the work efficiency of the

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and its object is to simplify the preparation operation at the time of installation of the enclosed game machine and the extraction operation of the game medium, and to improve the work efficiency of the game arcade clerk It is.

(1) The present invention is an enclosed type gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) for enclosing a gaming medium inside and playing a game using the enclosed gaming medium,
A circulation path (out ball flow down path 702, collection ball passing path 901, ball collection path 189) for collecting game media used in the game and circulating it to a position usable for the game again,
A transport mechanism (transport section 45) for transporting the gaming medium in the circulation path to a position where it can be used for gaming;
A removal mechanism (ball removing unit 39) for removing the game media in the circulation path from the inside based on the operation detection for removing the game media;
A preparation completion detection means (ball raising switch (above) is detected to detect that the gaming medium supplied from the outside into the circulation path is transported by the transport mechanism and ready for gaming using the gaming medium. ) 41a, S36),
When the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the detection state, control to operate the extraction mechanism is performed, while the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the non-detection state. Control means for performing control to operate the transport mechanism until the ready state is detected by the ready state detection means (descent ball transfer process in FIG. 109 and dimmed process in FIG. 110). )When,
A mode switching means is provided which can be switched between a business mode for the player to play a game and a non-business mode for confirming the operation.

  According to such a configuration, at the stage where the enclosed type game machine is installed in the game arcade, the preparation completion detection means does not detect the preparation completion detection state because the game medium is not supplied in the circulation path. In such a case, when the operation for supplying game media from the outside into the circulation path and removing the game medium is detected at such time, the preparation completion state is set by the preparation completion detection means. The transport mechanism is operated to transport the game medium by the transport mechanism until it is detected, while when the preparation completion detection means is already in the detection state, the extraction mechanism is operated by operation detection for extracting the game medium. Media can be removed. That is, the extraction operation of the game medium and the preparation operation at the time of installation of the enclosed type game machine can be performed by the same operation, the operation by the game arcade clerk is simplified, and the work efficiency is improved.

  (2) In the enclosed game machine according to the above (1), the control means causes the preparation completion state by the preparation completion detection means even when a predetermined time has elapsed after operating the conveyance mechanism (the conveyance section 45). If it is not detected, control is performed to stop the operation of the transport mechanism (S32 to S40).

  According to such a configuration, the conveyance mechanism continues to operate in the case of an abnormal state in which the preparation completion detection unit does not detect that the preparation completion state has been reached even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the conveyance mechanism operated. It is possible to prevent such inconvenience.

(3) In the enclosed game machine according to the above (1) or (2), of the circulation paths (out ball flow down path 702, recovery ball passage path 901, ball recovery path 189), the number is enclosed more than a specified number. Number detection means (fired ball detection switch 903) for detecting game media collected in the circulation route after being used for playing, provided in a stopping route portion where the game media is in a stopping state;
The apparatus further comprises excess determination means (S103) for determining the excess state of the enclosed game medium when the number detection means continuously detects the game medium for a predetermined time or more and is in the continuous detection state.

  According to such a configuration, when the number detection means continuously detects the game medium continuously for a prescribed time or more, it can be determined that the enclosed game medium is in the excess state, and the enclosed game medium is in excess. It is possible to determine an abnormality that becomes a state.

(4) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), a firing unit (launching unit 38) for firing game media in a position where it can be used for playing and using it for playing;
It has a number-of-fired-number counting means (ball-raising switch (upper) 41a, payout control unit 17) for counting the number of gaming media fired by the launching means;
The game medium moves from the detection position of the preparation completion detection means (ball raising switch (upper) 41a, S36) to a position usable for gaming every time it is fired by the launching means (launching unit 38) (FIG. 2) ),
The shot number counting means counts the shot number based on the detection output of the preparation completion detecting means (FIG. 106; when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off, the number of shot balls discharged by the dispensing unit 17 +1).

  According to such a configuration, the detection output of the preparation completion detection means is also used to count the number of game media ejected by the ejection means, and the reduction in the number of parts by dual use of the function of the preparation completion means is achieved. be able to.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control unit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side and transmission and reception thereof. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing control circuits of a main control unit and a CU communication control unit and contents of stored authentication information. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of commands and responses performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of commands and responses performed between a main control unit and a CU communication control unit. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of commands and responses performed between a main control unit and a CU communication control unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a recovery response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a recovery response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication start demand. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of operation directions. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of operation response. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning and decision point of various ball numbers. It is a figure which shows the meaning and decision point of various ball numbers. (A) is a diagram showing details of each bit of gaming machine state 1, and (b) is a diagram showing details of each bit of gaming machine state 2. (C) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of a game console error state 1. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of a communication state response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a device information response. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an aspect of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the card unit and the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting communication disconnection by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29, (a) is an authentication sequence at CU power on, (b) is game machine power on. Authentication sequence. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of a CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of a chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. 31. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of normal, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of abnormality. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of processing when the card unit and the pachinko machine are reconnected. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing in a standby state in which the card unit and the pachinko machine are not being operated. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when a card is inserted into the card unit. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of an insertion process shown in FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of consuming the balance of a prepaid card. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of replay. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of performing subtraction of the number of game balls according to an instruction of the card unit side. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine during a big hit. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the number of gaming balls in the pachinko machine is exhausted during the game. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when interrupting the game. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the glass door in the pachinko machine is unlocked and opened. FIG. 18 is a view showing a modified example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the lock of the glass door in the pachinko machine is released and opened. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the cell (front frame) of the pachinko machine is unlocked and opened. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the pachinko machine is not connected when the power is turned on while the card unit is holding the card. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation instruction (without the required operation) from the card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation response (response to no request operation) from the pachinko machine does not reach the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation instruction (a response to the addition request) from the card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation response from the pachinko machine (the response to the addition request) does not reach the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the operation response (the response to the subtraction request) from the pachinko machine does not reach the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the pachinko machine responds to the addition request of the card unit with an addition refusal response. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the pachinko machine responds to the subtraction request for the card unit with a subtraction refusal response. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine returns a clear rejection response to the card unit clear instruction request. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine responds to the gaming machine of the card unit in response to a permission denial response. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine responds to the gaming prohibition request of the card unit in response to the prohibition refusal. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the pachinko machine responds to the glass door opening request of the card unit in response to the glass door open rejection response. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of cell (front frame) open refusal with respect to the cell (front frame) open request | requirement of a card unit. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where power failure occurs in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the operation instruction. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response regarding addition / subtraction data. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the operation response to the addition request. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to a subtraction request. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where a power failure occurs in the card unit before the clear request is reached. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of recovery processing between the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the operation response to the clear request. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 81. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of control processing in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when a CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. 82. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed interlockingly with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in a case where ball sharing processing for dividing and transferring game balls (sharing balls) is performed during a game in which a card is inserted. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in a case where ball sharing processing for performing divided transfer of ball (sharing balls) during the game in which the visitor card is inserted is executed. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing another example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where ball sharing processing for dividing and transferring gaming balls (sharing balls) is performed during a game in which a member card is inserted. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display in case ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display in case ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display in case ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display in case ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display during insertion of a member card. It is a screen figure of a display during insertion of a member card. It is a screen figure of a display during card return. It is a screen figure of a display during card return. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining an error monitoring function based on detection signals of various detection switches involved in circulation of the sealing ball. It is explanatory drawing explaining the counting function of the number of game balls by a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows control of ball transportation processing at the time of the ball removal performed by a delivery control part. 5 is a flowchart showing control of ball removal processing executed by the payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows control of the discharge | release error process performed by the delivery control part. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing control of game end detection error 1 processing executed by the payout control unit. FIG. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure which shows various error and the state of incorrectness. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and a payment control part. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit and the effect control substrate for a display. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit and the effect control substrate for a display. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit and the effect control substrate for a display. It is a figure which shows the transition (transition) relationship of an operation mode in a table form. FIG. 7 is a view showing a representative example of a communication sequence between a card unit and a payout control unit. FIG. 7 is a view showing a representative example of a communication sequence between a card unit and a payout control unit. FIG. 7 is a view showing a representative example of a communication sequence between a payout control unit and a main control board. FIG. 7 is a view showing a representative example of a communication sequence between a payout control unit and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine which shows another example. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine which shows another example. (A) is a flowchart showing a control command output process of firing and lifting, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error process. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key for securing security and a unique ID (also referred to as SID). It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front door of the slot machine. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a control circuit used for the card unit and the slot machine. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for describing various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and a transmission / reception mode thereof. It is a figure showing storage control of game history data in S unit and CU. It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine in another example. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side in a modification. It is a figure showing storage control of game history data in S unit and CU in a modification. FIG. 33 is a flow chart diagram showing a subroutine program in a variation of the insertion process shown in FIG. 32.

  Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, as a concept of the term used in the present embodiment, "game machine" is a game machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.), card unit, Z counter, card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange It is a concept including all devices installed in a game arcade such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept in which only the game machine is excluded from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, a plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko machines (abbreviated as pachinko machines or P units hereinafter) 2 as an example of a game machine are juxtaposed to each game island (not shown) arranged in plurality in the game arcade The card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3 of one example of the gaming apparatus is installed at a side position on the predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 There is. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade. A pachinko machine that accepts a membership card, which is a game storage medium to be played, and uses the gaming value (eg, card balance, number of balls held, number of balls stored, etc.) owned by the player specified by the recorded information on those cards It has a function to make the enclosed ball in 2 be bombarded and to be able to play a game. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium enclosed therein, and the player operates the bat operating handle 25 to drive the bat firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2) to drive the enclosed ball. It is configured to be able to play a game by hitting the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 one shot at a time.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-class pachinko machine, which is not shown, but a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can be won with a starting opening (1) and a starting hole A variable display device is provided which is provided with a mouth (2) and is variably displayed based on a detection signal of a start winning ball in each of the starting holes, and a display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball device (also referred to as a big winning opening) or the like which is opened by being a combination of specific identification information (for example, every second) is provided. The starting opening (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, the open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, the closed state) disadvantageous to the player.

  It becomes big hit state by the variable winning a prize ball device opening. In addition, the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of odd variation symbols such as 777) of the combination (all eyes) of the big hit symbol, the probability variation big hit state is A probability fluctuation state (probability state) occurs with an increase in the probability of occurrence of the jackpot following the end of the jackpot state. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big hit occurs based on the winning opening in the starting opening (1), the big winning opening (1) is in the first state, and when a big hitting occurs based on the winning in the starting opening (2), the big winning opening (2) is in the first state. Furthermore, in the game area 2, four normal winning openings (1) to (4) are provided.

  The pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 are collected in one of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls that have won the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out port 145 are reduced again to the hitting position through the recovery path in the pachinko machine 2 again. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a projecting portion 305 which is formed to project forward from the device front, and a card insertion / ejection slot for inserting a membership card or visitor card 309 and the like are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 1), and the information recorded in the card is read. In the above-mentioned projecting portion 305, the display card and the number of balls specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card are accepted on the side facing the player when the member card is received. An IR light receiving unit 315 (shown in FIG. 1) which receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for carrying out a replay game and a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a staff at the game arcade and converts it into an electronic signal. Not shown) is provided.

  Furthermore, a loan button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it for gaming. The return button 322 is a button operated when the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is returned. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling an attendant at the game arcade.

  The display unit 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but the number of game balls to be described later and various other information While being displayable, the surface is configured of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, it is possible to withdraw from the number of balls and play a game with a pachinko machine, When the played card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the pachinko machine 2 can play a game by withdrawing from the balls.

  The "reserved balls" are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game arcade. On the other hand, the "number of balls held" is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card and has not been deposited in the game arcade yet It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between "balls" and "balls" is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not

  In this embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but is stored in the higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding ball can be searched based on the member card number. It is done. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by the money discriminator 344 to identify the authenticity and the bill type.

  At the lower position of the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2, a display 54, a chance button 56 and a jog dial 57 are provided. The display 54 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as described later with FIG. 85 or FIG. 89 to FIG. 106 to the player. The jog dial 57 is used to select and designate various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display 54 when the player rotates. When the player turns the jog dial 57, the various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is turned. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item which the player desires to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is decided.

  2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining a circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining a circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIGS. 2-4, the circulation path of the pachinko ball of the enclosed circulation type is mainly demonstrated.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a turning lever 100 for attaching a game board, and by turning the turning lever 100, the game board 26 can be detached. On the other hand, all winning balls winning from the winning opening and the variable winning ball device provided in the game area 27 are detected by a winning ball detection switch (not shown) and collected by the winning ball collection cover member 144 for collection. It is guided to the ball passage route 901. On the other hand, the out ball entering the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flowing path 702. An out ball detection switch 701 is provided in the out ball flow down path 702, and a ball flowing down the out ball down path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul ball flows down the far ball return path 151 and flows down the recovery ball passage path 901 from the far ball return port 150 through the far ball return path 902. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151 is provided a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flowing path 702 enters the recovery ball passing path 901, and flows down together with the winning balls and the foul balls to enter the ball recovery path 189. A launch ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all the balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the far ball merge are detected.

  Further, a supply 50-piece detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at a midway point on the downstream side of the launch ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether the number of pachinko balls incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 is one in which all the pachinko balls shot into the game area 27 are collected and detected, and the number of shot balls shot into the game area 27 and the shot balls When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all pachinko balls driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The launch ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used to detect that the number of the enclosed balls incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when the number of pachinko balls sealed in the pachinko machine 2 is a predetermined number (50 pieces), the last 50th pachinko ball of the sealed balls suspended in the non-operating state where the game is not performed The position is configured to be located just between the refill 50 detection switch 904 and the launch ball detection switch 903. As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the gaming machine 2, the pachinko balls parked in the non-played state exceed the detection position of the launch ball detection switch 903. The firing ball detection switch 903 always detects the ball, whereby it is possible to detect that the number of filled balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of the enclosed balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls parked in the non-gaming state become downstream of the detection position of the 50 supply detection switch 904 and supply 50 The individual detection switch 904 is in the non-detection state in which the ball is not detected. As a result, it can be detected that the number of sealing balls is less than a predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko ball which has flowed down the ball recovery path 189 enters a conveying device 190 for conveying the pachinko ball upward. The conveying device 190 incorporates a conveying screw 190 b that is rotated by the conveying motor 40, and when the conveying screw 190 b rotates, pachinko balls are conveyed upward. The transport device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of transportation, and the pachinko balls are polished upward while being transported upward. Ru. The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41 b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball inlet of the conveyance device 190, and pachinko balls entering the conveyance device 190 are detected. On the other hand, the pachinko ball which is conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying one pachinko ball to the ball firing position. The player operates the striking operation handle 25 to drive the striking launch motor 18 so that the striking hammer 920 is intermittently rocked. One pachinko ball supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is sprung by the ball hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  In order to supply the pachinko balls one by one to the firing position of the ball by the hitting hammer 920, the rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 196a and a ball feed member 196b which is pivoted up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 196a. There is. The ball feed member 196b is U-shaped as shown in FIG. 2 and receives one pachinko ball which has flowed down, and the rectifier solenoid 196a is excited in that state to drive the ball feed by its driving force. The member 196 b swings downward. Then, only one pachinko ball received is supplied to the hitting position. The ball hammer 920 strikes one supplied pachinko ball into the game area 27.

  The striking hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the striking direction of the striking ball, and by the action of a cam rotated by the driving force of the striking launch motor 18, the striking hammer 920 is in the direction opposite to the striking direction (back swing direction). It is rocked by When the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the action of the cam is released, and the ball striking hammer 920 is rocked in the striking direction by the biasing force of the spring, and the pachinko ball is resiliently fired. The above-mentioned spring for biasing in the hitting direction can adjust the biasing force by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting launch force can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a described above. The ball removing portion 915 is provided with a ball removing motor 195 a. By operating the ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay substrate 921 by the staff in the game arcade, the ball removal motor 195a is rotated by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be pulled out of the path. The control of the ball removal will be described in detail later.

  The detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is used to control the transport motor 40 on and off. In a state in which the striking operation by the striking operation handle 25 is not performed and the striking operation is not performed, the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the rectifier 916 because the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation. Are arrested and stopped. At the stage when the pachinko ball staying there reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a always outputs a detection signal of the ball. When the continuous output state of the detection signal of such a ball continues for a predetermined time (for example, several msec), the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is stopped, and the upward conveyance of the ball is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to make the ball hit and launch, the rectifier 916 executes the ball feeding operation, and as a result, the ball which is stopped at the location of the rectifier 916 is stopped. It is sent and it will be in the state where the detection signal of a ball is not output from ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the balls are lifted. Since the number of balls transported per unit time by the drive of the transport motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls fired per unit time by the drive of the launch motor 18, the drive of the transport motor 40 is started After a while, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a constantly outputs a detection signal of the ball again, and the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hit shot continues, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again does not output a ball detection signal. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the balls are lifted. In the operating state in which the player performs the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor 37 (see FIG. 6). The firing motor origin sensor 37 is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 is stopped when the player releases his hand from the touch ring 35 provided on the hitting operation handle 25. When the shooting motor origin sensor 37 detects the firing motor origin point at the time of stopping, the shooting motor Control to stop 18 When the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, the firing motor 18 is deviated from the home position, and when the output of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the firing motor 18 is rotated forward according to the current position of the firing motor 18 Alternatively, control is performed to move the stopping position of the firing motor to the origin without causing the pachinko ball to be reversed. Note that the stop position of the firing motor at the present time and the position of the origin are compared with each other to determine whether to rotate the firing motor 18 forward or reverse direction is the rotation direction closer to the origin position. The stop position may be moved to the origin by controlling the rotation.

  Similarly, a deburring motor origin sensor 195b (see FIG. 6) is provided in the deburring motor 195a, and the deburring motor 195a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The prize ball detection switch, the game ball shortage detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701 have a capacitance by passing balls. It consists of a proximity switch that detects changes in. On the other hand, only the launch ball detection switch 903 is constituted by a light emitting and receiving type photo sensor. In a game arcade, there may be a case where a fraudulent act using a radio wave is made to transmit a fraudulent radio wave and cause a ball detection switch to be falsely detected incorrectly. When such an unauthorized radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may erroneously detect, but the photosensor does not have the possibility of erroneous detection. As a result, it is assumed that the prize ball detection switch, the far ball detection switch 33 and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by the proximity switch, output a detection signal associated with an erroneous detection when a fraudulent act of transmitting an illegal radio wave occurs. Also, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the launch ball detection switch 903 configured with a photosensor, the total number of detection balls and the launch balls of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701 and the winning ball detection switch A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection of the detection switch 903 and the number of balls detected. As a result, it is possible to monitor fraudulent activity by radio waves. The above-mentioned winning ball detection switch, game ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, far ball detection switch 33, out ball detection switch 701, firing ball detection switch 903 , All may be configured with the same type of switch.

  Referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 2, a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 are provided on the frame-like outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable with the left edge thereof as a swing center. It is done.

  Near the end edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the swinging center, a pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are provided. The engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions opposed to the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. By pressing the open front frame 5 against the outer frame 4, the engagement projections 6a, 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a, 7b, and in a state of getting over the engagement reception pieces 7a, 7b Move and lock.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 5, and the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to resist the biasing force of the spring, thereby engaging the pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6a and 6b. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6a and 6b with the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b is released and the lock is released, and the front frame 5 is opened.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the portion of the glass door 6 facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement projection 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pressing the open glass door 6 against the front frame 5, the engagement projection 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 By riding over, the engaging projection 8 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging projection 8 and the engaging hole 9 are engaged and become in a locked state. In this state, by exciting the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement projection 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement projection 8 and the engagement hole 9 And the lock is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 13 is provided at a position in the upper portion of the outer frame 4 in contact with the front frame 5, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the outer frame 4 to be in a locked state. Moreover, the glass door closure detector 12 is provided in the contact part with the glass door 6 in the upper part of the front frame 5, and the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 and becomes a locked state. It is detected by the closure detector 12.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, an outline of control circuits of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 configured of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 or the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection portion 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection portion 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised, for example by the connector etc. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and the connection wiring. When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 9) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display. The control unit causes control unit 312 to display an error message and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Furthermore, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and an error to the display 312 At the same time, control is performed to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier 344 and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a staff at a game arcade, a light reception signal is inputted to the main control section 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323, and is written from the main control unit 323 to the inserted card into the card reader / writer 327. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card. The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327, and when it is determined that the card is an incorrect card (forged card etc.), an error display command to the display control unit 797 Control to cause the display unit 312 to display an error, turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp (not shown), and transmit a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall management computer 1 .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 outputs display data such as the balance or the number of game balls to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Also, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a main control board 16 for controlling the progression of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39 and a presentation section 50. Is equipped.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and a P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 330 and the connector 20. It is electrically connected. Also, the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by an LSI 799 of one chip. Then, as will be described later, various commands of an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P unit communication control unit 81, the number of gaming balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the starting hole winning information, the number of determined symbols, the big hit information, various types of error information A response is sent.

  The main control board 16 is mounted with a game control microcomputer. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. The gaming control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  In addition, the out ball detection switch 701, the far ball detection switch 33, the glass door opening solenoid 10, the front frame opening solenoid 11, the glass door closing detector 12, and the front frame closing detector 13 It is provided in the state of being connected.

  A connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determinations, big hit information, manufacturer specific big hit information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of pachinko balls that have won a winning opening other than the starting opening. The payout control unit 17 receiving this detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be provided for one winning ball to the number of gaming balls and the number of additional balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The starting opening winning combination information is information indicating that a pachinko ball is won in either of the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 that an error has occurred while the main control board 16 is performing game control. As a specific example of the error, for example, a time sensor error which causes a magnet to approach the game area 27 to guide the game ball to the winning opening, a radio wave sensor error which causes an illegal radio wave to be emitted to turn on the winning ball detection switch, variable winning There is an incorrect winning error or the like in which a detection signal is output from a 10 count switch that detects winning balls of the variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed (see FIG. 19). When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects a disconnection due to such an error or a connection confirmation signal, the CPU turns on or blinks a call lamp provided on the curtain board and an I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from (not shown).

  The symbol determination frequency is information of a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning on the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The information on the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning on the starting opening 1 is called symbol determination frequency 1. The information on the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning on the starting opening 2 is called symbol determination frequency 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each maker and maker unique jackpot information indicating a jackpot unique to a maker. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as, for example, 15 round jackpots, and includes probability change information when a definite change occurs in association with the large hit, and in conjunction with the large hit When a short time state (a control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the short time information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is, for example, a jackpot state adopted only by a certain gaming machine maker, such as a sudden change.

  A health check command and a winning ball count acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The winning ball number reception command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been received.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17, to which the out-of-ball detection signal is input, subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as described later. As described later, the payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of gaming balls, and subtracts and updates the number of playing balls.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the glass door opening solenoid 10 by excitation, as described based on FIG. 5, the glass door 6 is unlocked and can be opened. When the payout control unit 17 controls the front frame opening solenoid 11 by excitation, as described in FIG. 5, the front frame 5 is unlocked and can be opened.

  As described with reference to FIG. 5, the glass door closure detector 12 outputs a glass door closure detection signal from the glass door closure detector 12 by pressing the glass door 6 against the front frame 5 to close the same, and is input to the payout control unit 17. By pressing the front frame 5 against the outer frame 4 and closing it as described based on FIG. 5, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P-unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the CU communication control unit 80 adds to the payout control unit 17 via the P-unit control unit 81. Various commands of request, subtraction request, game permission / prohibition request, number of requested addition balls, and number of requested subtraction balls are transmitted.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when the gaming balls are borrowed from the prepaid balance or the replay lending is performed as described later, and the payout control unit 17 receives the number and adds the number of gaming balls. Update. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when divided transfer of balls (ball sharing processing) or wagon service is performed as described later, and the payout control unit 17 receives the number of gaming balls. Subtract and update.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command for requesting the prohibition of the game. The required number of balls to be added is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the number of gaming balls by the above-described addition request command. The required number of balls to be subtracted is a command for specifying the number of balls to be subtracted from the number of gaming balls by the above-described subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 through the P control unit 81, various responses of the number of gaming balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the starting hole winning information, the number of determined symbols, the big hit information, the error information Will be sent. The number of gaming balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. Total number of game balls at the current time. The number of additional balls is the number of additional balls to be added to the number of gaming balls based on the winning detection signal, starting opening winning information and far ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The subtractive ball number is the subtractive ball number to be subtracted from the number of game balls based on the firing detection signal transmitted from the game ball control unit 34 described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the starting opening winning combination information, the number of symbol determinations, the big hit information, and the error information is a response specifying the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launcher 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single shot launch switch 36 and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting a signal (touch ring input signal). The emission control board 31 generates an emission motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the emission motor 18. The single-shot firing switch 36 is for performing an operation (single-shot firing operation) for the player to hit the pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one, and when the single-shot firing operation is performed, the single-shot firing switch 36 is used. A single firing switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs the detection signal, and the origin is detected each time the firing motor 18 makes one rotation, and a signal is output.

  The signal of the touch ring and the detection signal of the single shot switch are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control substrate 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 having received the firing detection signal updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of playing balls by 1 and updates the number of gaming balls by 1 with respect to the detection of the number of fired balls.

  A launch control signal and a launch permission signal are output from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 having received the signal outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. As a result, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bombarded to the game area 27.

  The ball removal portion 39 is provided with the ball removal motor 195a, the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b, and the ball removal switch 922 described based on FIG. 2 and FIG. 3. When the attendant of the game arcade operates the ball removal switch 922, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. Further, an origin detection signal of the ball removal motor origin sensor 195 b is input to the payout control unit 17. On the other hand, the deburring motor drive control signal is output from the payout control unit 17 to the deburring motor 195a.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the transport unit 45 provided in the game ball control unit 34 includes the transport motor 40, the game ball shortage detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, and the ball raising. A switch (upper) 41 a and a launch ball detection switch 903 are provided. A delivery motor excitation output signal for exciting the delivery motor 40 is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the delivery unit 45. On the other hand, 50 replenishment signals as detection signals of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 are input from the transport unit 45 to the payout control unit 17, and detection of the ball raising switch (lower) 41b and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a A signal of transport detection (pass / full) as a signal is input. Furthermore, a detection signal of the firing ball (merged ball) is input as a detection signal of the firing ball detection switch 903. Based on the detection signal, the payout control unit 17 subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of balls floating in the game area 27).

  The counting unit 46 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a foul ball detection switch 33 and an out ball detection switch 701 in addition to the above-described ball raising switch (upper) 41 a and the fired ball detection switch 903. ing. A detection signal of the far ball detection switch 33 is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls) based on the far ball detection signal.

  A polishing motor excitation signal is output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the above-described polishing motor 193 a provided in the polishing unit 47.

  The effect unit 50 includes an effect control substrate 53 for an indicator, a power source substrate 51 for an indicator, a power source relay substrate 52 for an indicator, an indicator 54, a ROM substrate 55 for an indicator, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. It is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Then, by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM substrate 55, the image data is read, the display data is transmitted to the display 54, and the display 54 is displayed on the display 54. Do. In addition, the button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the effect control board 53 for display, and the effect control board 53 for display sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input to the display 54 Then, the display 54 displays a display screen on which the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 are reflected.

  Power for a predetermined voltage from the display power source substrate 51 is supplied to the display effect control substrate 53 via the display power source relay substrate 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. The display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of times of occurrence of big hit and the number of definite variations, and the card unit operation command is a command by the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50. The details of this indicator control command will be described later based on FIGS. 125 to 127.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection when the next command is not received despite the elapse of a predetermined time exceeding 300 ms after the reception of the command, and performs a time over detection process (error process). Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted despite the fact that it has exceeded 300 ms since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and when the error count is counted ten times in a row, The effect control board 53 detects a time-out to initialize the communication state, and performs control to display the lighting of the call lamp and the error animation on the display 54.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current number of game balls by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P-unit side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls. However, when the number of game balls on the P side becomes 0, the P ball controls to stop the firing of ball by itself quickly. It is a secondary thing used only to Since the main control of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the side of P, and the cost of P can be minimized.

  In particular, compared with CU, the P unit has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function regarding the number of game balls on P side to CU side and suppressing the cost of P side, it is possible to reduce the running cost of the game arcade introducing the enclosed type game machine It has the advantage of

  FIG. 7 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 17 on the P side. First, when the power is turned on in a state where the P unit (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is sent from the main control board 16, and the main chip ID is sent to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored by the payout control unit 17 itself is sent to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the P side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P side, and the P side stores the transmitted connection time .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the P side to the CU side.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same P unit as the previous time is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between the CU side and P unit side is started every time the power is raised is transmitted from the CU side to the P unit side, and the new connection time data Is stored on the P platform side.

  Also, each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and P side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each, and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P side. Ru. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and P units. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and P in this embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the P units, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to P units, and the transmitted SQN is backed up and stored. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU is backed up by the operation instruction, and next, when the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 addition and transmitted Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the P unit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 67 to FIG. 82 described later, when communication disconnection occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up until communication reconnection, but on P side, communication disconnection occurs. Since the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of the SQN (see Fig. 60, Fig. 67 to 82), the SQN that is backed up and stored until communication reconnection is always sent last It has become. On the other hand, the CU side transmits the operation instruction or receives the operation instruction according to the time of occurrence of the communication disconnection (see FIG. 60, FIG. 67 to FIG. 82). The SQN which has been stored for an interval is either the one transmitted last or the one received last.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the P side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the P side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the P base side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to the P base.

  Next, the ball related information (ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. The current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball thrown into the game area 27 wins and the added ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the added ball number counter is counted by the added ball number counter. The counting is performed, and the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) is transmitted from the P-unit side to the CU side. Further, if a pachinko ball is shot into the game area 27 and the shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the detection signal, and subtraction thereof The value of the ball number counter (subtracted ball number) is transmitted from the P base side to the CU side.

  Furthermore, pachinko balls are won in the starting opening (1) or starting opening (2) and the starting opening (1) winning signal or starting opening (2) winning signal is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 In such a case, the payout control unit 17 counts those winning numbers on the P-unit side with the starting opening 1 winning number counter or the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P side to the CU side. Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of gaming balls at the current time with the number of gaming balls counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and the count value of the gaming ball number counter is from P to CU side Send to

  On the P side, the values of the additional ball counter, the subtract ball counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter, the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and the gaming ball number counter are sent to the CU every time they are transmitted to the CU side After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the ball related information storage area last time, the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter and the starting opening 2 winning number counter as current ball related information are 0 clear. In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the storage area of the last ball related information (the current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting opening 1 wins, which are the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before And, data of the starting opening 2 winning number is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each previous counter which was not transmitted when the ball related information is not currently transmitted from the P base to the CU. It is for enabling transmission.

  On the CU side, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls (total number of reduced balls), starting opening (1) total winning number (starting opening (1) Accumulated number of times), starting opening (2) total number of winnings (starting opening (2) accumulated number of times), the number of game balls is stored.

  The total additional balls number and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the additional ball number counter (number of additional balls) transmitted from the P-unit side. In addition, the total number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the number-of-subtracted ball counter (number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the P-base side. Furthermore, based on the value of the starting opening 1 winning number counter transmitted from P units, the starting opening (1) total winning number is updated and the value of the starting opening 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side Based on the starting opening (2) to update the total number of winning. As described above, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P-unit. Similarly, the CU updates the total additional number of balls, the total number of subtractive balls, the starting opening (1), (2) the total number of winnings according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from P units. It becomes possible to manage information.

  In addition, although it mentions later based on FIG. 14, FIG. 18, the breakdown of "the number of addition balls" is a game ball acquisition number information and back ball addition information. A back ball is a foul ball. In addition, "subtractive ball number" is also referred to as gaming ball firing number information.

  In addition to the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, the CU receives the count value of the gaming ball number counter (also referred to as the number of gaming balls or the total number of gaming balls) in addition to the values of the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball number counter sent from the P base is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P-unit side does not match the number of game balls managed by the CU side, the game in which the number of game balls on the CU side has been sent from the P-unit side It will not be updated with the number of balls.

  Furthermore, the CU collates the value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P-unit side with the current gaming ball number updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU sends normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with P units on condition that determination (match confirmation) is made to match (match). Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, the CU performs recovery processing and transmits a command of communication start request to P units, and the number of game balls of P units is calculated according to data of bit 1 of data correction request included in the command The game ball total number information is corrected to the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) on the CU side. In addition, although it correct | amends to the number of game balls managed by CU side as a process to correct | amend, it replaces with it and the number of game balls managed by CU side and the game memorized by P stand side It may be corrected to an average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management The error notification may be performed by the computer 1), and a predetermined notification may be performed to urge an artificial response by a person in charge.

  As described above, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the P-unit side, and calculates and manages the number of gaming balls at the current time based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter. It has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the P unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the side of P for the purpose of prohibiting the game immediately when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, the game ball number counter for storing the number of game balls may not be provided on the P platform side.

  The CU performs a game ball number match determination process of checking whether the calculated game ball number at the current point in time and the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P base side match or not. And a function to perform control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the number of gaming balls is stored also on the P side, it is determined whether the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side. It is possible to do it (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side due to improper behavior or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Although the determination function is provided on the CU side here, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the CU further includes a storage area for storing balls (balls) and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 6) of the CU receives an input (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 6) provided on the CU). In response, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area storing balls. In addition, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 6) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by debiting the value from the gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored) owned by the player, The number of requested addition balls for adding the number to the gaming ball number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side. In response to that, on the P side, the game ball counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation to order a so-called wagon service or the like is performed to withdraw the gaming value owned by the player and replace it with a drink etc., the number of balls required for subtraction of gaming value owned by the player is CU side Transmitted to the P platform side. On the P side, in response to that, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view for explaining a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. The game history data is data indicating the history of the gaming state generated by the player playing a game with the P platform 2. For example, the number of times of start which is the number of times of variable display of the variable display device (variable The number of start of fluctuation of the display device), the number of occurrences of the big hit, the number of starts from the previous big hit to the present big hit, the value of the base, and the like. The game history data includes game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units. Then, although the details will be described later, the former game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit provided on both the P side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P side and the CU side Are stored in the current player game history data storage section provided on both sides or the backup storage section provided only on the P-unit side. That is, game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units are stored in both the CU 3 and the P unit 2.

  Referring to FIG. 8, various types of game data such as a big hit and start (variation start of variable display device) are generated by the player playing a game with P platform 2 and the game data is input to game history data management portion 291 Be done. For example, normal game data generated as a result of the player playing a game on P units is counted by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 and the collected game history The data is input to a display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 53, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The current P game history data storage unit can store 10 days of game history data including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to select and operate the game history data of the day to be displayed, the game history data of the selected day is displayed by the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the aforementioned game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to, for example, the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323 via the CU communication control unit 80 of CU3. The game data is summarized by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The counted game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. The unit P game history data storage unit on the CU 3 side is configured to be able to store only the game history data of the day. Then, when the player performs touch operation on the display 312 configured by the touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is recorded. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 312.

  On the other hand, CU3 is configured to be able to display game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game arcade by means of the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches the operation button icon of the other P unit information display displayed on the display unit 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P unit information is displayed. Due to the operation of the processing unit, the other game history data request request is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P's 2 via the other CU 3 and returns the received other P's game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the other P unit game history data sent back by the other P unit information processing unit and the processed other P unit game history data is processed by the data storage unit 392 other P unit game It is stored in the history data storage unit. Then, the stored other P game history data is displayed by the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to totalize the game history data for each player who has played a game in the P-unit 2 and to display the game history data for each player by the display 54, 312. In order to count the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the player who is playing a game on the P platform 2. As player identification information for identifying the player, C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card owned by a player who is a member is used. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in the card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to the player who has become a member in the game arcade, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also the member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU3 to the P platform 2. In the P platform 2, the received C-ID is transmitted from the game history data management section 291 to the effect control section 292 for display, and the effect for display The current player gaming history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit by the player playing a game with the P platform 2 is the current player of the effect control unit 292 for display It is accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit. Then, when the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to display his / her game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as an indicator. 54 is displayed. Also in the game history data management unit 391, the normal mode processing unit tabulates the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P-base 2, and the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 is The gaming history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage when A is stored as the ID is accumulated and stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit. Then, when the player performs an operation to display his / her game history data by touching the display 312 which is a touch panel, the operation detection signal is inputted to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391 Controls the display 312 to display the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day in the P units and the game history data collected for each player in the P units are displayed and switched on both the P unit side and the CU side. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  By pressing the return button 322 in order to return the membership card inserted by the player playing a game by the P-table 2, the membership card is discharged from the CU3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is performed by operating the display 312, the gaming history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is ejected from the CU3, the CU sends a card return notification to the P platform 2 and the gaming history data management unit 291 that has received the card return notification returns the card to the effect controller for display unit 292 Send a notification Receiving that, the indicator effect control unit 292 stores the A as the C-ID stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit and the gaming history data a in the backup data storage unit, and the current player game The C-ID of the history data storage unit and the game history data are erased. As a result, even if an operation to display the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when ending the game by the P unit 2, but the player temporarily interrupts the game and completes the small use, and returns to the P unit 2 where the game is being played again, and the game is performed. May resume. In such a case, the player usually discharges the card after carrying out the game interruption operation described later, brings the card, and the player completes the small use, and returns to the same P-unit 2 again and transfers the card to CU3. Although the player inserts the card, the player may press the return button 322 to remove the card and leave the P platform 2 without performing the game interruption operation.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the seat without playing a game in the P platform 2 returns to the P platform 2 and inserts the member card into the CU 3 again, the player leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the game history data of the previous player and add, update and accumulate the game history data after game restart to the game history data. In order to realize that, the C-ID and the game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. Then, when the player returned to P platform 2 inserts the membership card into CU3, the card information of the membership card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the membership card is transferred from CU3 to P platform 2 Will be sent. In the P platform 2, the C-ID contained in the inserted card information is received by the gaming history data management unit 291, and the received C-ID is transmitted to the effect controller for display unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 collates the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit, and determines whether or not they match. If the two match, it is determined that the same player as the player who left the seat has resumed the game again, and A as the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and a as the game history data are currently played It is returned to the player game history data storage unit and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the storage data of the backup data storage unit is deleted. A game history data generated thereafter by the player playing a game with P platform 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over. Are added to and updated and stored with respect to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result of the C-ID contained in the inserted card information sent from CU3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID stored in the storage unit and a as gaming history data are erased.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the effect control unit for display unit 292 is bi-directional communication.

  As a result of comparing the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 with the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, it is determined whether the two match or not the display control unit 292, transmitted to the gaming history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the gaming history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, in the case of the determination result indicating that the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the C-ID determined to match the current player gaming history of the data storage unit 392 It is stored in the data storage unit. Further, in the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination result matches, the game history data a is also included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. After that, if the player plays a game with the P platform 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is counted by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data collected. Are added to and updated and stored in the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit. In this state, if the player performs an operation to touch the display 312 to display his game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the display 312.

  The backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 may control to delete the stored backup data when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a test hitting mode (test mode) processing function is provided. This test mode is a mode for carrying out shipping inspection at the time of manufacture of a gaming machine at a gaming machine manufacturer, operation check at the time of installation of the gaming machine in the game arcade, ball number display such as safe / out, base confirmation at nail adjustment, etc. . When a staff member of the game arcade inserts a test card for the trial run mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read, and the trial run mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the trial run mode. . Specifically, the game mode data management unit 291 transmits the trial run mode notification to the P-unit 2 and receives the trial run mode notification, and transmits the trial run mode notification to the effect controller for display unit 292 by the function of the trial run mode processing unit. . In the display effect control unit 292 that has received it, game history data based on the game data generated thereafter is stored in the trial game history data storage unit. The trial game history data storage unit is constituted by a storage area different from the above-mentioned player table game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit, and this trial game history data storage unit The game history data in the trial hitting mode is stored in the unit.

  Then, the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  Also in CU3, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from P unit 2 is aggregated by the function of the trial run mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the aggregated game history data is in the trial operation mode The display 312 displays the game history data of

  The display 312 also displays an operation button icon such as a retabulation button, and the nailer who has seen the game history data in the trial display mode displayed on the tabulation adjusts the nail based on it, and then the game in the trial mode is performed again. You may want to aggregate historical data and view it to see the results of nail adjustments. In such a case, the icon of the retabulation button is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data management unit 391 transmits a recount notification to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2. Having received it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recounting instruction to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 receives it, temporarily erases the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit, and stores the game data based on the game data generated thereafter from the trial game history data storage again Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit, which has been tabulated again, is displayed by the display 54. On the other hand, also on the CU 3 side, based on the game data transmitted from the P-unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the icon of the recount button is input to the game data management unit 391, the trial hitting mode processing unit Is accumulated and recounted again by the display unit 312.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card received in the CU 3 is discharged, the card return notification is transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 391 to the P base 2 and the card return notification is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notice to the effect control unit for display unit 292, and the effect control unit for display unit 292 receiving the notification deletes the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit.

  When the game ball runs out in the trial hitting mode, the game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P-unit to perform the addition of the game ball to enable the game. It should be noted that, when the game ball runs out in the trial hitting mode, the game ball side may automatically add the game ball without sending the game ball addition command from the CU side to the P base to enable the game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding the game balls on the side of the gaming machine, control may be performed so that the game can be continued even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of the slot machine 2S described later, when the number of points is lost in the trial hitting mode, the CU side sends a holding point addition command to the S-unit to perform addition of the number of points, thereby enabling the game.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided in the P-unit 2. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated to perform a switch operation to output a signal of RAM clear to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above to clear stored data of the RAM. When the RAM clear output signal is input to the gaming history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is While being erased, the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit is erased, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted to the storage area of the older day one by one. It is memorized. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day). In addition, according to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data (game history data before shifting to the old day) of the latest day of the P game history data storage unit is the indicator effect control unit 292, the game history The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391, and the hall management computer 1 may control such data to be backed up.

  The game history data management unit 291 receives the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293, transmits a clear notification to the CU3, and the game history data management unit 391 receives the clear notification. Control to erase the game history data stored in the base game history data storage unit is performed. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared).

  It should be noted that, while holding the card inserted in the CU3, even if the RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data clear process is not performed.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing control circuits of the main control unit and the CU communication control unit and contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 9, the main control unit 323 functions as a work area of a central processing unit (CPU) 805 as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) 804 storing control programs and data, and the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 storing control programs and data, a RAM 811 functioning as a work area of the CPU 810, an I / O port 812 and an EEPROM 813 .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 9, the I / O port 807 is communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801 as well. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the P-unit communication control unit 81.

  Then, at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of the CU communication control unit is also referred to as an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, authentication using SID stores each other's SID and the other's SID and determines whether each other stores the correct SID or not by the challenge response method described later. It is a thing. The authentication using this SID includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication as described later, and these are collectively called serial ID authentication. As will be described later, authentication using an authentication key is to mutually store an authentication key consisting of a common key, and to authenticate whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. It is called authentication.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  Then, at the manufacturing stage of CU 3, the SID of the main control unit and the authentication key (common key) are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808. The SID of the main control unit is also referred to as a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to mutually store their own SID and their own SID, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, mutually store an authentication key common to each other. You need to However, at the stage when the CU is manufactured, the main control unit 323 does not store the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key. The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key are sent from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored by the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing notification processing when an abnormality as a result of mutual authentication is detected.

  Referring to FIG. 10, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality referred to here is to replace the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 with another improperly manufactured one or noise etc. This includes the case of malfunction or failure, or an off-line state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 illustrated in FIG. 10 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above, the main control unit 323 has an abnormality. Detect In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 30) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect, and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. In addition to causing the display control unit 797 to perform control to display the occurrence of an abnormality on the display unit 312, the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinks to perform abnormality notification. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of an abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, the fact is notified to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal to light or blink the abnormality notification lamp provided on the membrane plate or the like, and a signal to the effect that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 Send

  When an abnormality occurs by the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of an abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that is detected by the P communication control unit. Notify 81 In response to that, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and sends a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 notifies that effect to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 notifies that to the upper server 801.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323 and notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that there is an abnormality in the P unit communication control unit 81. Is notified to the main control unit 323, and notification destinations of occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 are different from each other. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed at all, and no countermeasure against the abnormality is taken. Moreover, although the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function, it does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, it is always notified that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P communication control unit 81 notified of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for reporting an abnormality as described above.

  If an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 is notified that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 reports the abnormality described above. It performs control and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the payout control unit 17 detects that the abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality is mainly generated. The control board 16 is notified. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs control for notifying the abnormality occurrence described above. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality occurs in the P communication control unit 81, the P communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality, and CU communication indicates that the abnormality has occurred. The control unit 80 is notified. In response to the notification, CU communication control unit 80 notifies main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. Upon receiving the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both of the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that the abnormality has occurred, and upon receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. . In response to that, the main control unit 323 performs control of the above-mentioned abnormality occurrence notification, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, the LSI 799 detects it and notifies it to the main control board 16, while it detects it when the abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As with the above-described CU communication control unit 80, even when the LSI 799 detects that an abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed even if a notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the control unit or control board on the opposite side to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred is notified. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSIs 799, 999 do not have an abnormality notification unit such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator connected, and have a function to perform abnormality notification control by itself even if an abnormality is detected. Not.

  Although the pachinko 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine in the control of FIGS. 8 to 10 described above, a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described.

  FIG. 11 shows the transmission direction and the names of transmission information and their outlines. Data in the transmission direction from CU to P is a command, and data in the transmission direction from P to CU is a response.

  The main control unit transmits a recovery request command to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to P units.

  A response of a recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is sent from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is for requesting the P units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is sent from the P units to the CU. This communication start response is to notify the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is sent from the CU to the P unit. This operation instruction instructs the P units to perform a game operation, and also requests transmission of gaming machine information such as game balls.

  An operation response is sent from the P units to the CU. This operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and to notify the game machine information such as the game ball and the like.

  A communication disconnection request is sent from the CU to the P units. The communication disconnection request is for requesting the P units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is sent from the P units to the CU. The communication disconnection response is to notify the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A continuity test request is sent from the CU to the P units. This communication test request is to notify the communication data to P units.

  A communication test response is sent from the P unit to the CU. This continuity test response is to respond the continuity data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 12 and 13 show the transmission direction and the names of transmission information and their outlines. The transmission direction is from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is the response.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  The BB serial ID authentication response 1 notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (device authentication request 1) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting a second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying a second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The device authentication requests 1 and 2 and the device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described based on FIG. 35 described later.

  A counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, a counter information notification response for notifying a counter information notification result.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described based on FIG. 31 described later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response for notifying writer management information is sent from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described based on FIG. 31 described later. The data included in the writer management information response is a command code, a writer ID (ID of the ROM writer), a version of an authentication key, or the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but the authentication key update request is transmitted.

  As data included in the authentication key update request, command code, command size, shipping maker code, writer ID (ID of ROM writer), version of authentication key, authentication key, MAC key that is a key for H-MAC, MAC include.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, an authentication key update response for notifying an authentication key update result.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  The CU communication control unit transmits, to the main control unit, a response (time response) indicating that the command of time notification has been received.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit makes a request for the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying the authentication result with the P unit communication control unit to the main control unit. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception. The CU communication control unit 80 sends the authentication result to the main control unit 323 after acquiring information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response for notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying a communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response that the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and sends the determination result back to the main control unit. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (P unit communication control unit reauthentication request) for requesting re-authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit makes a request for the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit transmits a response (P unit communication control unit reauthentication response) for notifying a response to the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit executes the authentication between the P-unit communication control units again, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P-unit communication control unit re-authentication response. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B, and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later based on FIG. The device authentication requests A and B and the device authentication responses A and B will be described later based on FIG.

  A command (device authentication request A) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request B) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 of FIG. 10) written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) ) Is sent from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes command code, command size, shipping maker code, writer ID (ID of ROM writer), version of authentication key, authentication key, MAC key as H-MAC key, for encryption Padding character (random number), MAC. These code information is transmitted by using the block encryption mode of ECB except for the command code, using BB serial ID as an encryption key and encrypting.

  An authentication key setting response for notifying an authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. The information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as the encryption key using the block encryption mode of ECB.

  Next, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response among the commands / responses illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 13 will be described in detail based on FIGS. 12 to 19.

  Referring to FIG. 14, the response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held in P units to the CU. The "recovery information" is the data stored in the backup storage for the P unit to transmit as a recovery response when the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P unit as the recovery process is executed. It is. The recovery information transmitted from the P unit to the CU is, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the connection time, the final sequence number, the C-ID, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information.

  The column of “encryption” shown in FIG. 14 and the subsequent figures is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted, and the x marks indicate that the data is not encrypted and the 印 marks indicate that the data is encrypted. A key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a message key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is the connection time backed up on P units (data of the connection time received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is the sequence number backed up by P units. C-ID is C-ID which was backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the game ball acquisition number information notified last time, back ball addition information notified last time, game ball launch number information notified last time, symbol decision number 1 notified last time, symbol decision frequency 2 notified last time, notified last time The number of starting openings 1 number, the number 2 of starting openings notified last time, the number 1 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 2 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 1 to 4 times of winning openings notified last time. Thus, although the symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 are divided by Bit, they may be divided by bytes and transmitted.

  The “playing ball acquisition number information” is information on the number of added balls added to the playing balls by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information in which the foul balls detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 (see FIG. 2) are added to the game balls. The "playing ball shot number information" is the number information of the pachinko balls shot by the shooting unit 38 (see FIG. 6). The “out ball passing information” is information indicating that the out ball has been detected by the out ball detection switch 701.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 7 and FIG. 26 to FIG. 88, "playing ball obtained number information" and "back ball added information" are collectively expressed as "number of added balls". In addition, "the game ball firing number information" is expressed as "subtract ball number".

  “The number of times of symbol determination 1” is the number of times of symbol determination performed by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination frequency 2” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 2.

  The “starting opening number of times 1” is the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1. The “starting opening number of times 2” refers to the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 2.

The “one big winning opening” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning opening 1.
The “big winning opening 2 times” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning hole 2.

  The "number of winning openings 1 to 4" is the number of winnings of pachinko balls for each winning opening of the winning openings 1 to 4.

  Furthermore, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P unit to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. The current ball related information is, specifically, the game ball total number information (also referred to as the number of game balls) currently held in P, the game ball acquired number information currently held in P, currently P Back ball addition information held, gaming ball firing number information currently held in P units, symbol decision number 1 currently held in P units, symbol decision number 2 currently held in P units, present One start opening held by P units, 2 start openings currently held by P units, 1 number of large winning openings currently held by P units, Large winning opening currently held by P units Two times, it is a winning opening 1 to 4 times currently held in P units.

  The information marked with * in FIG. 14 is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set when shipped from the factory and when the backup data is indeterminate.

  The meaning of each number of balls in (Note 1) shown in FIG. 14 and the determination point are shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. The meanings of the numbers of balls and the contents of the determination points are as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. In addition, the CU checks whether the number of gaming balls in P units matches the number of gaming balls after correction in CU, and in the case of incoincidence, the CU transmits a command of communication disconnection request to the P units. While the communication is disconnected, the game of P units is stopped (see FIG. 60, etc.). Then, the CU executes recovery processing and transmits a communication start request to P units (see FIG. 39), thereby making the game ball correction request to P units according to the data correction request included in the command of the communication start request. A process of transmitting and correcting P game balls to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side is performed.

  The symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 refer to the symbol determination information for the winning of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, respectively. Use

  The number of times of starting opening 1 and the number of starting openings 2 are the number of winning of pachinko balls to starting openings 1 and 2 of P units, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console.

  The number of large winning a prize opening and the number of large winning a prize opening 2 times are the number (number) of winning of pachinko balls to P large winning opening 1 and large winning opening 2, CU is the operation of the game stand (P) Use this data to check the status.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of winnings (numbers) of pachinko balls to regular winning openings 1 to 4 of P, and CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console Do.

  Referring to FIG. 16, the command of the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P unit requests the P unit to correct the game ball and the sequence number and back up the new communication ID (communication start time). .

  As specific data of the communication start request, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 16, there are connection time, data correction request, sequence number and data of the game ball. The connection time is a time when communication between the CU and the P units is started, which is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P units. And this connection time is used as a connection ID of communication.

  In the data correction request, the CU requests the P units to correct the data, and is configured by 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of a clear request. When the bit is "0", no clear request is specified, and when "1", the clear request is specified. When there is a clear request, a request to clear the backup data held by the P-unit such as "game ball", "sequence number", "number of added balls", "number of subtracted balls" etc. to 0 is made to the P-unit.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a request for correction of the sequence number. In the case of "0", no request for correction of the sequence number is specified, and in the case of "1", the request for correction for the sequence number is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball correction request. When "0", the game ball correction request is present, and when it is "1", no game ball correction request is specified.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 26 and thereafter, when a Bit specifying the presence or absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when it is “1”, it is expressed as “request exists”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when it is “0”, it is expressed as “clear request no”. In addition, as shown in parenthesis in the data correction request column, "Clear request" is "Recovery clear", "Sequence number correction request" is "SQN correction", "Game ball correction request" is "Game ball correction" It is expressed as ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is the sequence number stored in the CU. The game ball is the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the command for the communication start request.

When P receives this communication start request, it performs the following processing.
In the case of the clear request ON, the backup data held on the P-unit side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of reduced balls” etc. is cleared to 0.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the sequence number held by the P unit is overwritten on the notified sequence number.

  In the case of the game ball correction request ON, the game ball held in P is overwritten on the notified game ball.

Backup connection time.
In addition, each process performed by said P base is performed in an order from the top.

  The command of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 17 is “add game ball”, “subtract game ball”, “play permission / prohibition”, “game ball and sequence number” for P unit Commanding the "clear" operation and requesting transmission of various game table information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As the operation request, 8-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 7 are transmitted from the CU to the P units. For Bit 0, when "1", the game ball count addition request is instructed, and when "0", the game ball count addition request no is instructed. For Bit 1, when “1”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed, and when “0”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed. With regard to Bit 2, when “1” is set, a game permission request is instructed, and when “0”, a game permission request is instructed.

  For Bit 3, when “1” is set, a game prohibition request is instructed, and when “0”, no game prohibition request is instructed. For Bit 4, when “1” is set, a request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given, and when “0”, no request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door open request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) open request. Bit 7 is a spare.

  Note that, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 17, “request for game ball count addition” is simply referred to as “addition”, “game ball count subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, and “game ban request” It is also simply referred to as "prohibition request", "playing ball count and sequence number clear request" is simply referred to as "clear request", and "glass door open request" is simply referred to as "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits among Bit0 to Bit7 are "1", P units are sequentially executed from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is in progress when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1” Sometimes, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and trial run mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  The CU state is configured by 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but may be configured by 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15, and the following information may be transmitted by each bit.

Bit 0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit 1: 1: Cash insertion processing Bit 2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit 3: 1 = Membership card holding Bit 4: 1 = Test card holding Bits 7 to 5: Reserved Bit 8 : 1 = Prepaid loan being displayed Bit 9: 1 = Replay loan being displayed Bit 10: 1 = Ball divided display (while holding balls shared)
Bit11: 1 = Wagon service displayed Bit12: 1 = Clear displayed Bit13: 1 = Break time Bit15 to 14: Reserved In addition, data on the number of requested addition balls is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is "1". Sent from CU to P units. The data of the number of requested addition balls is a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  The data of the subtraction request ball number that is valid only when the operation request Bit 1 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. The data of the subtraction required ball number indicates a value to be subtracted from the gaming ball number.

  Also, data of card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. In addition, C-ID transmitted from the CU to the P units has the following data set according to the state. When no card is inserted, "ALL 00h" is set. While holding the card, the C-ID of the card is set. "ALLFFh" is set during the trial run mode.

  It should be noted that the holding of this card may be data in which both can be distinguished depending on whether the card inserted in the CU is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, "holding card" is configured by 2 bits, 1 bit is held while holding a membership card, and 2 bits are held "1" while holding a visitor card. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, basically, the card is always held in the CU, and in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when the visitor card has a remaining amount. It may be controlled to transmit C-ID as (with Bit set to 1). Also, the C-ID may be stored only in the membership card without storing the C-ID in the visitor card.

  In addition, an error code currently displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. Note that "ALL00h" is transmitted as data of a CU error code in which an error has not occurred.

  Referring to FIG. 18, the response of the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and gaming machine information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, data is transmitted from the P unit to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 6. For Bit 0, when "1", the execution result of the game ball count addition rejection is shown, and when it is "0," the execution result of not rejecting the addition of the game ball count is shown. For Bit 1, the execution result of the game ball number subtraction refusal is shown when “1”, and the execution result of not rejecting the subtraction of the game ball number is shown when “0”. For Bit 2, the execution result of gaming permission denial is indicated when “1”, and the execution result indicating that the gaming permission is not rejected is indicated when “0”.

  With regard to Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition refusal is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result of the effect that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, "1" indicates that the number of game balls and the execution result of sequence number clear rejection are shown, and if "0", the result that the number of game balls and sequence number clear have not been rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1” is shown, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is refused is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 6, "1" indicates that the execution result of refusing the release of the cell is displayed, and "0" indicates that the execution result of not rejecting the cell release.

  In addition, as shown in parenthesis in FIG. 18, "rejecting addition to the number of gaming balls" is also simply referred to as "rejecting addition rejection", "rejecting the number subtraction of gaming balls" is simply referred to as "subtraction rejection", and "gaming denial rejection" Is simply referred to as "permission refusal", "game prohibition refusal" is simply referred to as "prohibition refusal", "playing ball number and sequence number clear refusal" is simply referred to as "clear refusal", and "glass door open refusal" Is simply referred to as "open glass refusal".

  The “playing ball total number information” is the current number of playing balls (the number of playing balls as a result of calculation of addition and subtraction). The “playing ball obtained number information” is the number of obtained game balls, and when there is a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission, it is the number information added up. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball obtained number information to the currently held number of game balls, but does not add the number of game balls when the main data is received without holding the card.

  The “back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (fall balls) when fired by the launch unit 38 (see FIG. 6), and when there are multiple back balls at the time of transmission, the number It is information. The CU 3 adds data of back ball addition information to the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not add the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. The "playing ball shot number information" is the number of balls fired by the shooting unit 38 (see FIG. 6), and when there are a plurality of fired balls at the time of transmission, it is information of the total number. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the number-of-played-balls-playing number information from the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not subtract the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. In addition, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by itself is zero. The “out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701, and is the total number when there are a plurality of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number 1” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 1, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number 2” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 2, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball gain number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball launch number information”. Specifically, the game ball number + the game ball obtained number information + the back ball addition information−the game ball fired number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new game ball number (game ball total number). Then, it is checked whether the game ball total number information transmitted from P units and the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) match or not, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A command for communication start request is transmitted to P units, and the data correction request data (Bit 2 is “1” data) included in the command and the data for the number of game balls stored in the CU are for P units. A process of correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side (game ball total number information) is performed.

  Each bit of Bit0 to Bit3 is prepared as error state 2 of the game table, but this is provided as a spare, to cope with error information specific to a maker which is not used for specifying an actual error state. It is a thing.

  The details of each bit of the game state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. 19 are shown in FIG. A supplementary explanation is given below.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P units which have received an instruction by the command from the CU are instructed Transition to the When a communication error occurs, the P unit itself shifts to the game prohibited state.

  While waiting / playing in Bit 1, it is data indicating whether the fan (player) is playing (is firing a ball) and the fan (player) is not firing a ball while waiting The game is in progress with the fan (player) firing a ball. The game completion of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the balls have stopped firing at P, and then all the pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 have been collected and the destinations of all the fired balls have been determined. It is. The state in which all balls are undecided is game incompletion (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which all balls are undecided is game completion (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if it is not possible to confirm 15 seconds or more after stopping the firing of the ball, the game is timed out and the game is completed.

  If you can not confirm completion of the game for more than 15 seconds, you will time out and complete the game, and if the ball clogged up in the game area is eliminated and the ball wins, etc. A display for prompting reinsertion may be displayed by the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so as not to receive another card until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, manual correction (manual correction) of the number of game balls by a game clerk or the like is performed.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P units), and sets “1” for 30 seconds after activation of the P units. With game machine history information in Bit5, it is data indicating whether or not the game machine history information such as the number of starts and the number of big hits is held at P, and when it is "0", no game machine history information is available. In the case of "1", the presence of gaming machine history information is indicated. When the game machine history information is cleared by RAM clear, the P unit turns off this data. Also, after clearing the RAM, this data is turned ON at the timing of adding data such as "number of start" and "number of big hit". It should be noted that, in order to match the gaming machine history data with P units, the CU 3 clears the gaming machine history data held by the CU 3 upon detection of this data OFF.

  The detail of each bit of the game state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. 19 is shown in FIG. A supplementary explanation is given below.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” in the big hit middle and the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” in the big hit medium, small hit medium and high base. The big hit 3 of Bit 2 is set to "1" at the big hit middle (only the high hit big hit).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to '1' in the big hit (big hit only on high base) and high base. The high base of Bit 4 is set to "1" in the high base.

  The gaming machine error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit 0 to Bit 7 and the details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 23 (c). Bit 0 is a bit indicating whether the frame main body (front frame 5), that is, the cell is open or not, and is set to "1" when the cell is open. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door 6, is in the open state, and "1" is set when the glass plate (the glass door) is in the open state. In the bit 2, “1” is set at the time of a magnetic sensor error when the magnetic sensor detects the occurrence of the fraud that brings the magnet closer to the game area or the like. After “1” is set, power is turned on / off by P units to restore Bit 2 to “0”.

  Bit 3 is set to “1” when an incorrect winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, power is restored by turning on / off the P units, and Bit 4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 make the gaming machine error 1 occur, the gaming machine error 2 occurring, the gaming machine error 3 occurring, the gaming machine error 4) It is indicated that an outbreak is occurring.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal number sequence, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In the case other than this, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x10, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 24, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, it is abnormal. Moreover, MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted and transmitted is abnormal as it is not correct data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not a normal length. The disconnection detection means that it is an abnormality that has detected the occurrence of a disconnection between the P unit and the CU.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a response of the device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a maker code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a maker code, a format code, and a MAC. It is.

  Referring to FIG. 25, a response of the device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information of the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the code of the command. The code size specifies the data size of the command. Depending on the acquisition result, any one of OK (with collected information), NG (with no collected information), or not collected is specified. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is a P payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, an aspect of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the P units will be described. A command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to the command and sends a response back to the CU. After the CU receives the response, the CU transmits the next command to P, and P responds to the command and sends a response back to the CU. As shown in FIG. 26, the period from the transmission of the first command from CU to P to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, or 0.2 seconds. In addition, the period from the transmission of the response from the P unit to the CU to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU and the P at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P-unit, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, 100 pachinko balls are hit into the game area 27 in 1 minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one shot of the ball.

  Therefore, from P to CU, the response of the operation response for notifying the change amount of the number of game balls is transmitted one after another at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the balls. As a result, the P unit can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, CU enables point management that closely reflects the change in point on P side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this, for example, the transmission interval may be P units of firing time interval. It is also conceivable to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If a response can not be received by one second after the CU transmits a command to P, the same command is transmitted to P again. Furthermore, if a response can not be received within one second after that, a second retransmission of transmitting the same command to P units is performed. If a response can not be received from P units by one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that communication is abnormal at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 6 is disconnected, the connection wiring is broken, or the P unit is powered off.

  After 5 seconds after determining that the communication is abnormal, the CU transmits a device information request command to the P-unit to start the connection sequence again. The specific content of the process of transmitting the command of the device information request to the P units and starting the connection sequence will be described later based on FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the P side will be described. A command is sent from the CU to the P, and the P sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P unit continues for 4 seconds, the P unit determines that the communication is disconnected, and stops the driving of the bat firing motor 18 to prohibit the game. And transition to the unconnected state. The cause of occurrence of the communication disconnection may be disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power disconnection of the CU, as in the case described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the process of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence of FIG. 29 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P units is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU is turned off in the standby mode (see FIG. 40) in which the card is not inserted. A typical example is the case where the business day of the game arcade is ended and the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, when the power is turned on, the ball hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped on the P unit to stop the game and then the communication is started. In the CU, first, processing of an authentication sequence is performed. The specific control content of the process of the authentication sequence is shown in the flowchart of the subroutine program shown in FIGS. By the processing of this authentication sequence, a command of device information request is transmitted from the CU to P units. In response to that, the P unit returns a response of the device information response. The response of the device information response includes the main chip ID and the payout chip ID.

  The CU, which has received the device information response, stores the information included in the device information response, and makes an authentication request to P devices that have received a response (P devices specified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID) Send the data of to P units.

The P that has received the authentication request sends an authentication response back to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the process of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29 will be described based on FIG. 30 to FIG.

  (A) and (b) of FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. The authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29 has two types, an authentication sequence when the power of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power of the P (game machine) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power of the CU is turned on is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 30A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 141). The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. After that, communication is started. Then, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then the chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  The authentication sequence when the power of P units (game machines) is activated is shown in FIG. 30 (b). Referring to FIG. 30 (b), after communication disconnection with P unit is detected in main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, after CU communication control unit 80 recovers communication with P unit, P Perform authentication with the platform. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. After that, communication with P units becomes possible.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Authentication of the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 is performed by this BB serial ID authentication sequence. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information on the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROM 813 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the maker code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer.

  The main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, Check if it is not. Even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide with each other as a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, a certain degree of security is ensured and the security is improved.

  Next, a device authentication sequence with the authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a command of counter information notification for requesting transmission of counter information from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted. In response to this, the CU communication control unit transmits a response to the counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 in order to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block encryption mode of use, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, some parts of the plaintext to be encrypted become another because the same ciphertext is obtained. There is a disadvantage that it can be judged by comparison of ciphertexts whether or not it is the same as the part, and the CU 323 is notified of the initial vector of the CTR mode in order to eliminate it. The mode setting of encryption is performed by notification of this counter information. Since the mode setting of this encryption is reset at each daily power on in the game arcade, security is improved. The ciphertext of the communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scrambling process is not performed, the same encrypted data will be exchanged every day even if it is encrypted, and the encryption is likely to be broken. Such an inconvenience can be eliminated by scrambling.

  Next, an authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 acquires update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (message key) from the authentication key stored in EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and transmits it as a time response to main control unit 323 Do. The session key (message key) may be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are combined according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The generated or received time information may be encrypted with the authentication key and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off, and is generated again when the next power is turned on.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, thereafter, encrypted communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed by encrypting and decrypting using the session key.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b). The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing the authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a command of payout control authentication result request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The command of the payout control authentication result request requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result of the payout control chip (LSI) with the P communication control unit 81.

  Next, the device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. The main control unit 323 that has received it inquires the host server 801 to collate the device information (chip ID), and stops the subsequent communication when it is NG (incorrect). If it is not NG, then it becomes possible to transmit business telegrams to P units. Then, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, transmission and reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and a command response of the operation response are executed.

  FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31, in which challenge response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication generally refers to an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping on an ID or the like during communication by performing special processing on a character string or the like. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random numeric string (called a "challenge code") is sent to the party that wants to receive it, and the party that received the challenge code combines the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. Whether the response code has been received, the response code is similarly generated from the transmitted challenge code and the ID stored in advance, and the received response code is compared with the generated response code to match Perform authentication to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it transmits a response requesting a challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10, and the challenge code is used as a CU serial ID authentication request. It transmits to the communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10, and the response code corresponds to BB serial ID authentication response 2 To the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 having received it checks the response code to determine whether or not it is appropriate. It controls so that subsequent communication is not performed at the time of improperness (NG).

  The algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be any algorithm, an example of which will be described below. As the challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) of the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. It calculates and transmits the calculation result to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as the generation of the response code in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 and the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 match, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number, The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as the response code, and determines that it is appropriate if it matches, but it is determined to be incorrect (NG) if it does not match. judge.

  FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in ROM 809 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 having received it generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. It transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 as the communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2. The communication control unit 80 that has received it checks the response code A and determines whether or not it is appropriate. Then, a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the request for the challenge code B is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it controls so that the subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is improper (NG).

  The algorithm of the generation of the challenge code and the generation of the response code shown in FIG. 34 may be any algorithm, but for example, the algorithm using the exclusive OR described in FIG. 33 can be used. .

  The challenge response type authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number R1, and encrypts the random number R1 using the SID (called SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key to generate a challenge code A. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is sent to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with SIDM stored. In the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is sent back to the communication control unit 80, and the communication control unit 80 collates whether the random number R1 generated earlier and the response code A (= R1) sent back match or not, and the condition is met. To be successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). The communication control unit 80 transmits this to the communication control unit 80 and decodes it with the SIDT stored therein to generate a response code B. In the equation, response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is sent back to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 checks whether the random number R2 generated earlier and the response code B (= R2) sent back match or not, and matches the condition To be successful.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. The device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and uses ECB mode as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits the device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Also create a MAC. This MAC is the Message Authentication Code. For example, let MAC be a value obtained by computing the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A is MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and the MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 to generate the original plaintext random number A, and the predetermined random number A is Calculate MAC using hash function of. Then, it is checked whether the calculated MAC and the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 match. If the two match, it is determined that it is appropriate. If the two do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B, and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, a random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and the MAC are transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as the device authentication request 2 as well as the authentication result based on the device authentication response 1. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Then, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to calculate MAC. It is checked whether the calculated MAC and the received MAC match or not, and if they match, it is determined that they are appropriate, and if they are not, they are determined to be incorrect (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as the device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. If the determination result is improper (NG), control is performed so that the subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 transmits an authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80 when there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801. The update request from the upper server 801 also includes data of a new authentication key. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 with the new authentication key transmitted from the upper server 801, and the authentication key update request transmitted from the upper server 801. Transmit to CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 having received it performs processing of updating the authentication key stored in EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10 to the new authentication key transmitted, and the result is used as an authentication key update response to the main control unit. Send to H.323.

  The main control unit that has received it executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication key to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 37, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence when manufacturing a card unit (CU). First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of the authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on the condition that the authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the authentication request A of the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting the challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. The communication control unit 80 having received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10, and sets the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. It transmits to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Transmit to CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it determines whether the response code is correct, and transmits authentication key information to be described later only when the response code is correct (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 37 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS. 33 and 34.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key information stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. The information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. The main control unit 323 that has received the request stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10, and transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 an authentication key setting response indicating that it has been stored.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 performs device authentication thereafter using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. When it is determined that the result of the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a state of waiting for reset is made.

  Next, returning to FIG. 29, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to P units. In the P unit that has received it, the recovery data backed up in the P unit (specifically, the payout control unit 17) is returned to the CU as a response. The recovery data includes connection time, final SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, the various data shown in FIG. 14 are, and speaking of “recovery data” in the subsequent flowcharts, it is exactly the various data shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is, as described above, the SQN transmitted last by P units.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process to recover the integrity of each other's data between CU and P, and it is not only executed at the time of power supply start, but also trouble occurred and recovered as described later Sometimes it is also done.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time it transmits an "operation instruction". However, it does not count up when resending the operation instruction. The CU backs up the SQN and its request content upon transmission of the “operation request”. The P unit stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU by the “operation response”. When the P unit receives the operation instruction of the same SQN as the SQN received last time, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU re-sends the operation instruction as the re-transmission statement.

  After the recovery processing is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from P, and updates the SQN to "0", and the communication start request (recovery clear ON) As a command, a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, and game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up in the P unit are matched with the information of the CU in response to that (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). It also backs up the notified "connection time". Then, the P unit returns a communication start response to the CU. After this, between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are performed.

  As described above, the CU increments the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00 h, pre-additional ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number Back up the data of = 0. Further, the P unit clears the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), and the number of starting openings (2), which are current ball related information. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, starting openings ( 2) Send the response of the number of times = 0, and the game prohibition (game stop state) to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and calculates the current number of gaming balls 0 + the number of received additional balls 0-the number of received subtraction balls 0. While backing up 0, it backs up addition ball number accumulation = 0, subtraction ball number accumulation = 0, starting opening (1) frequency accumulation 0 =, and starting opening (2) frequency accumulation 0 = 0.

  Next, at the end of the activation process on the CU side, the CU transmits an operation instruction of game permission request present, SQN = n, C-ID = 00 h to the P unit, and the P unit having received it responds the operation As game permission rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of game balls = 0, the number of addition balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and the response of the game permission is sent back to the CU.

  When an appropriate authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 31, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 is executed. FIG. 38 (a) shows the case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 38 (a), after a command for operation instruction is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirmation of the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request) Is sent to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status (MAC error, CRC error, decoding error, data length error, disconnection detection) of the operation instruction message as a communication status response (see FIG. 24).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal if it is normal.

  On the other hand, CU communication control unit 80 transmits a command of the operation instruction to P units (specifically, P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the command of the above-mentioned operation instruction. In the unit P that has received it, the operation response is sent back to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits the response of the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 38 (b) shows the case where the task message sequence is abnormal. The main difference from FIG. 38 (a) is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response, and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal if the response of the transmitted communication status response is numeric data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes retry of confirmation of the communication state. Specifically, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction to the CU communication control unit 80 again, the communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response sent back from the CU communication control unit 80. It is determined whether an abnormality in the communication state has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication status is abnormal as a result of execution of the retry, the notification of the communication status abnormality is controlled. As the abnormality notification control of the communication state, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 and the display 312 gives notification of the abnormality of the communication state, or turns on or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Alternatively, it is conceivable to transmit a signal to the effect that an abnormality in the communication state has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Although the number of times of execution of this retry is shown once in FIG. 38 (b), it may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the process of the connection sequence when the CU and P are reconnected will be described. Here, "at the time of reconnection" is at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit abnormally ends. This “abnormal end” is described later, when the power is turned on while holding the card in FIG. 53, and when the CU itself disconnects communication when the P unit in FIG. 60 refuses addition, the CU side in FIGS. When the power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is a. Resume the connection sequence in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 40), b. It is judged whether the connection sequence restarts later (see FIG. 60) or c.SQN being backed up and SQN sent from P are inconsistent or not, a. When it is determined that any of c is determined, it is determined that normal communication is not terminated (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 39 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described in FIG. 29, and here, mainly the differences will be described.

  First, the time to start communication after the game machine P is prohibited is immediately after the device information request command from the CU is received. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has received the device information request from the CU and is reconnected for the first time.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 29 is at power on, the CU transmits a communication start request command of recovery clear ON to P units, and it is received by P units to clear the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all previous ball related information and current ball related information etc. are cleared to "0".

  However, in the case of the connection sequence shown in FIG. 39, recovery information backed up in the P unit may not match the information stored on the CU side because it is at the time of reconnection. Therefore, after starting the recovery processing, the CU corrects the game ball, etc., in accordance with the contents of the P-unit-side recovery data (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. Execute the process Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, and the game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from P units, the number of game balls + the number of game ball acquisition number + back Ball addition information-A game ball number-of-plays information is calculated, the stored game ball number is corrected to the calculated new number of game balls, and the corrected number of game balls and recovery data from P are calculated. The game ball total number information sent as is compared with, and it is judged whether it corresponds or not. In the case of non-coincidence, a command in which the game ball correction ON, that is, the bit 2 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the P-unit as the communication start request. Also, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from P units and the final SQN stored in the CU are compared to determine whether they match, and if they do not match, a communication start request is issued. SQN correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit 1 of the data correction request is set to “1” is transmitted to P units. Also, the correct number of gaming balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P-unit.

  The P unit receives the communication start request command, and performs correction processing to match the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up by the P unit with the information of the CU. Specifically, SQN = 3 and gaming ball = 300 are corrected, and processing for backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P-units at the stage when the recovery processing is completed, and backs up the connection time which is the time of reconnection. Then, as for the sequence number, if the final SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after starting the recovery processing in the CU, if it is determined that the P units that are the communication partners do not match, or if it is determined that the SQN is abnormal, the recovery response sent from the P units The current number of game balls included in is converted into a ball at one end. The number of balls is the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by a player. Then, after balls are recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the balls of the recording medium, and the balls are converted into game balls, and then re-playing becomes possible. At that time, as in the connection sequence at power on shown in FIG. 29, as the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P unit, the recovery clear ON is transmitted, and the P unit receives it and recovers data clear. Further, in the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P unit in the first operation instruction, and in the P unit, the SQN = 1 is backed up. In addition, in P unit, the number of pre-additional ball = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 is backed up Clear each counter value of number, start opening (1) times, start opening (2) times to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, processing in the standby mode will be described. The standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P unit and no card is inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, a command of operation instruction of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0 as the response of the operation response , Start opening (2) number of times = 0, and transmit game-enabled data. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up each time a command of operation instruction is transmitted. In the command of the next operation instruction from CU to P, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h are transmitted. In the P unit that received this, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00 h, pre-additional ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, and pre-start opening (2) number of times While backing up = 0, each counter value of the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2), and the number of gaming balls is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, starting openings ( 2) Send the number of times = 0, and a game-ready response to the CU. In the CU, every time a response of operation response from P units is received, SQN, C-ID = 00 h, number of gaming balls = 0, total number of added balls = 0, total number of subtracted balls = 0, starting opening (1) Back up total = 0, and start opening (2) total = 0.

Referring to FIG. 41, processing of the CU and P when the card is inserted will be described.
In the CU, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer 327 outputs a command signal for taking in the card, and the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the taken-in card and receives the read information The card insertion process such as the following is performed.

  In the insertion process, a command for a card insertion request is sent to the P unit, in which the CU reads the C-ID recorded on the inserted card and transmits the C-ID to the P unit. In the unit P that has received it, a response of a card insertion response notifying that the reception of the C-ID is completed is sent back to the CU. Further, as this insertion process, control as shown in FIG. 42 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is to verify whether the inserted card is appropriate or not, whether it is a member card registered in the game arcade, or inquires of a higher level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that the process of displaying on the display unit 312 and displaying on the display 54 on the side of P is being performed is being performed. As described later with reference to FIG. 85 and the like, the CU indicates that an inquiry about the card inserted in the display 312 is in progress, and also indicates an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to P units. In the P unit, by receiving the command of the operation instruction, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and effect for display Control is performed to display that the control board 53 is in the process of inquiring a card inserted in the display 54 (see FIG. 85).

  After that, P units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of reduced balls = 0, number of starting openings 1 = 0, starting openings 2 times = 0, game Send a response including a prohibition, a special award, and a definite change to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the definite variation are OFF when Bit 0 to Bit 4 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG.

  In the CU, the balance and balls are confirmed when the balance and balls of the inserted card are confirmed as a result of the card balance inquiry. The CU performs control to display the prepaid balance of the determined card on the display unit 312, and adds the determined ball being sent (5000) to the gaming machine (P units) as a game ball. The display of the inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 85).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, game ball = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of required addition balls) = 5000 and ball = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of balls is decided.

  Next, as the operation instruction, the command including the addition Yes, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, number of requested addition balls = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is P Send to the table. Note that the operation instructions during card holding and card insertion processing are divided by the membership card and the visitor card as described in FIG. The operation display may be performed separately for each type of card. In the P unit, the payout control section 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000, thereby performing display control including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (in the addition display) to the effect that 5000 balls are being added as a game ball to the display 54 (see FIG. 85).

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the insertion process shown in FIG. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 42, the CU executes steps S1 to S7. In addition, P units execute S8 to S10 and S12 to S15. More specifically, the display effect control board 53 provided in the P-unit executes the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13 and S15, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is a display effect control board 53 transmits to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 transmits to the CU.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not interruption is in progress. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined based on whether or not the interruption operation shown in FIG. 49 described later has been performed and the game interruption sequence has been executed. If interruption is in progress, it is determined whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the interrupted card in S2, and if it is not in agreement, the insertion is performed in S5. Eject the card and shift to standby (see FIG. 40).

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the interrupted card, it is determined that the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine again to start the game. For this purpose, the control proceeds to step S4 to cancel the suspended state and a process to restart the game is executed in step S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that the interruption is not in progress, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the P unit is performed in S3. The P units receive the C-ID and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 8) (S8). Then, it is determined in S9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if not, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program of this insertion process is ended. .

  Thus, the player identification information storage unit (current player gaming history data storage unit) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination unit (S8, S9) for performing the same determination process are the gaming machines. And a gaming machine having display control means, provided that the same determination processing function is not provided on the communication means side (payout control unit 17 side). A common communication means can be used with a gaming machine that does not have a display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  The processes of S15 and S7 may be performed as control contents of the modification. After the game history data and C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU by S15, they are deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The upper server 801 backs up and stores the received game history data and C-ID.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S9 that the two match, the process proceeds to S12, and the gaming history data of the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player gaming history data storage unit shown in FIG. 8). Start adding and updating the game history data anew.

  In addition, you may process S10, S13, S14 as control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was discharged, and a predetermined time has elapsed according to S10 which has not elapsed. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, processing is performed in S13. Also, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. As the control content of the modification, control may be performed so that all of the processes of S10, S13, and S14 and the processes of S15 and S7 are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a process of consuming the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the process of FIG. 43, the prepaid balance is "1000", and the gaming ball at the present time is "50". First, a command of no addition, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, C-ID, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction requested balls = 0 is transmitted from the CU to the P unit as an operation instruction. In P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 50, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, starting opening as operation response 2) Responses of the number of times = 0, game available, prize OFF, and definite variation OFF are sent back.

  On the other hand, in the CU, the lending of 500 yen, ie, 125 balls is performed by one lending operation (ball lending operation). SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 50 (number of gaming balls before update) +125 (number of required requested balls) = 175 and balance = 500, when the lending button (loose button) 321 is pressed in the CU. Back up. In this way, the balance consumption is decided by the CU alone when the lending operation is performed. Next, CU is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 312 that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the balance and adding to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits a command of presence of addition, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of requested addition balls = 125, and required number of subtraction request balls = 0 to P as an operation instruction. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits the indicator control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested addition balls 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control substrate 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P unit has SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-addition ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, and pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 After making a backup and creating a response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0 and The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175, which is the sum of the required number of balls 125 added.

  Then, as an operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, starting A response of mouth (2) times = 0, game available, prize OFF, and definite variation OFF is sent back.

  In the CU that received it, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 175 (number of gaming balls before update) + 0 (number of required addition balls)-0 (number of subtraction balls) = 175 , Addition ball number cumulative total 0, subtraction ball number total cumulative number 0, starting opening (1) cumulative total = 0, and starting opening (2) cumulative total 0 back up.

  As described above, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is made to wait for the response of the operation response from the P's.

  In addition, in the P unit, when the command of the operation instruction including the addition presence and the number of requested addition balls is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing the consumption of balls (replay of balls) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. Execute the subsequent processing in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the process at the time of the replay which consumes a ball will be described. In FIG. 44, the stored ball identified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) is "1000", and the initial game ball is in the "0" state. The process of replaying in FIG. 44 is similar to the process of consuming the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, SQN = n + 2 when the replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a game recording medium (member's card etc.) owned by the player is inserted and there is a ball identified by the card. , C-ID, the number of game balls = 0 (the number of game balls before update) + 125 (the number of required addition balls) = 125, and the balls = 875 are backed up. Reservoir ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125, because the initial ball storage ball = 1000 to 125 (number of required addition balls) is withdrawn. This is because while the balance in the case of FIG. 43 is data of money amount unit, since the balls of FIG. 44 are data of ball number unit, it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000 to 125.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “with addition”, “in addition display ON”, “SQN = n + 2”, “C-ID”, “number of requested addition balls” = 125, “reserved balls = 875”, “required number of subtraction balls” = 0 to P as operation instruction Do. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits the indicator control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested addition balls 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control substrate 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  The other processes are similar to the process of FIG. As described above, the consumption of balls is determined on the CU side alone when the re-play button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit, and the number of balls (also the number of balls) The same) waits for the response of the operation response from P units to determine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the process of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction on the CU side will be described. In the game arcade, a wagon service of consuming game balls owned by a player and providing drinks and the like to the player is performed. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 96 to 100), and the order content ordered by the player is a card unit by placing a wagon order. The IR photosensitive unit 320 of No. 3 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a store clerk at the game arcade.

  The store clerk at the game arcade performs the wagon service according to the order content input to the remote control. FIG. 45 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes the number of used game balls "300" is generated in a state where there are "1000" of game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order occurs, the CU backs up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game ball accompanying the wagon order occurrence, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, required addition ball number = 0, required subtraction ball number. Do. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but merely backs up "300" as the required number of balls for subtraction. Then, from the CU to the P unit, a command with subtraction, ON during subtraction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during display) indicating that subtraction is in progress (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  Upon receiving the command, the P unit determines whether the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is equal to or greater than the number required for subtraction. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 45, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is greater than or equal to the number required for subtraction. In the P unit, the payout control section 17 receives a command of operation instruction including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, thereby controlling display including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (under subtraction display) on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, pre-addition ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0 and pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 At the same time, the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0. Then, the number of gaming balls is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the number of balls deducting 300 from the current number of gaming balls 1000 according to the number of deduction required balls = 300.

  Then, from P unit to CU, as operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, current number of game balls = 700, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, start opening (2) the number of times 0, the game is possible, special prize OFF, and the response of definite variation OFF reply.

  Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, game ball number = 1000 (pre-update game ball number) −300 (subtraction request ball number) +0 (additional ball number) −0 (subtraction ball number) = 700 Then, correct the number of game balls to "700" and back it up. As described above, the subtraction of the number of game balls is decided only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units.

  In addition, the CU backs up C-ID, cumulative addition ball number = 0, subtraction ball number cumulative = 0, starting opening (1) cumulative = 0, and starting opening (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P unit determines that the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is less than the subtraction request number, the P unit does not execute the subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . Also, in this case, the P-unit sends back an operation response of subtraction refusal ON as an operation response to the CU. Thereby, the CU is notified that the subtraction of the game ball based on the subtraction request has not been performed because the P unit has refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 44, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units. On the other hand, as described using FIG. 43, the storage (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU is decided when the CU receives the ball-consumption consumption.

  As described above, the reason why the settling time is made different between “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU” and “consumption of balls (balls having balls) based on the instruction of CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when CU received subtraction processing of the number of game balls such as wagon order etc, although there was allowance in the number of game balls, although the subtraction instruction was sent, the game ball is used for the game when P unit received the subtraction instruction As a result, the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction may not be left.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is determined based on the number of gaming balls stored in the CU when the CU accepts the subtraction processing, the number of gaming balls actually remains on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be determined and a contradiction will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU" is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit.

  On the other hand, "consumed ball (consumed ball) consumption based on the instruction of CU" is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so when the instruction reaches P, P stores Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, the “conserved ball (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is determined when the CU receives the ball (congested ball) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing in the case where a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 46, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and while an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted / received between P units and CUs in a game, a definite variation big hit occurs, and the said big hit It is shown that the probability change occurrence probability has improved and the probability change started after the end of the control.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n, C-ID is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, C-ID is transmitted from the CU to the P units as an operation instruction. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 13, pre-start opening (1) number = 1 and pre-start opening (2) number = 1 The game ball number is updated to 1000 as the game ball number = 1010 + 3 (additional ball number) -13 (subtractive ball number) = 1000 is calculated. Furthermore, after creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 1000, number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 13, number of starting openings (1) = 1, number of starting openings (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game available, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. Thus, the P unit transmits not only the number of subtracted balls and the number of added balls but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether the number of gaming balls stored in the P unit matches the number of gaming balls managed in the CU.

  In the P unit in the present embodiment, as described above, since 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 in one minute, one pachinko ball is hit in the game area in 0.6 seconds. It will Then, as described in FIG. 26, since the command / response is transmitted at an interval of 200 ms, the subtraction ball number from the transmission of the previous response to the transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P unit to the CU is also 0 or 1. However, if the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of gaming balls does not change so much, resulting in a processing flow that is difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as needed are largely described.

  In the CU that receives the response of the operation response, calculate the number of game balls = 10 10 + 3-13 = 1000 and back up that 1000 as the number of game balls, and add the total number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, start opening Back up (1) Cumulative = 1 and Start opening (2) Cumulative = 1

  While repeatedly executing transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response, a probability change big hit occurs in the P unit, and the ball related information is the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of start openings (1) = 2, and the number of start openings (2) = 2. And a definite change starts after the big hit ends in P units. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID are transmitted to P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, pre-additional ball number = 120, pre-subtraction ball number = 20, pre-start opening (1) times = 2, and pre-start opening (2) times = 2 is backed up, and the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is updated to 1100. Furthermore, after creating a response, each counter value of the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 1100, the number of added balls = 120, the number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 the number of starting openings (2) The response of the number of times = 2, game available, special award ON, and special award ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, and the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, corrects the number of gaming balls to 1100 and backs up, and adds up the number of added balls = 120, Total subtraction ball number = 20, start opening (1) total = 2 and start opening (2) total = 2 backup. Also, the CU detects that the "special award" has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, processing in the case where it is detected that game balls are lost while playing a game on P units will be described. The initial game ball number is set to 20, and the CU backs up SQN = n, C-ID, and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n, C-ID to P as operation instructions. . In the P unit, back up SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-addition ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 18, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, and pre-start opening (2) number of times = 1 . Then, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) are cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 5, number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 18, number of starting openings (1) number of times = 1, starting opening (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game available, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of gaming balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5 are corrected, and then the number of gaming balls is corrected and backed up, and addition balls number accumulation = 3, subtraction balls number accumulation = 18 , Start-up port (1) cumulative = 0, and start-up port (2) cumulative total 0 = back up. After that, in the P unit, the number of subtraction balls = 5, so the number of gaming balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 0, so the number of addition balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0 , The number of start openings (2) changes to 0. At the stage when the number of game balls becomes 0, in the P-unit, no ball is detected, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops the driving of the ball firing motor 18 and can not drive the ball into the game area Control to the prohibited state. It should be noted that the variable display is continued if the variable display device is already displaying the variable display only at the stage where the batting launch is stopped. Further, when the start stop (1) or the start opening (2) has a start memory at the stage of performing the firing stop control, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the memory is continued.

  The CU backs up SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2, C-ID to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, and the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 5, the number of front start openings (1) = 0, and the number of front start openings (2) = 0 After making a backup and creating a response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 5, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, starting openings (2) The response of the number of times = 0, game available, prize off, and definite off is sent to the CU.

  The CU receives it, calculates the number of gaming balls = 5 + 0-5 = 0, corrects the number of gaming balls to 0 and backs up, and adds up the number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 5, start opening (1) Correct the total number to 1 and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  As described above, the main control of the number of game balls is performed by CU, but only when performing game prohibition control (fire stop control) accompanying the fact that the number of game balls has become 0 in P, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (fire stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as an operation response, final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to carry out the hitting and firing stop control at the moment when the number of gaming balls becomes zero on the P-unit side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the reception of the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from P side becomes 0 becomes Wait, the final game ball number is calculated on the CU side and it becomes 0, thereby transmitting the command of the operation instruction with the prohibition request for prohibiting the game to the P side, and receiving it In the case where the ball launch stop control is performed on the P platform side for the first time, there is a possibility that the pachinko ball is fired and fired during response and command transmission and reception, and a new subtraction ball number may be generated during that time. On the side, despite the fact that the number of game balls has already become “0”, there arises a disadvantage that a new number of subtraction balls is generated and eventually the number of game balls becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, control is performed based on the number of game balls on the P-unit side only when hitting ball firing stop control is performed when the number of game balls becomes zero.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hit firing stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P unit itself, this is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared to the case where such game control is performed, game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although an example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting release control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 6) may be configured to perform the hit release control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits, to the main control board 16, a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls is zero when the number of gaming balls is determined to be zero. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits driving of the hitting and firing motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing when there is a card return operation will be described. In the state where the number of gaming balls is initially 500, the operation instruction from CU to P, and in response to the operation response from P to CU in response, CU is pressed when return button 322 is pressed, CU is As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition request existence for prohibiting the game, no clear request request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P-unit, in accordance with the instruction of the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting and firing state. Thereafter, a weight of 15 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 and flow to all out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. Polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait time. As the action response during the wait time, the P unit is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0 , Start opening (2) number of times 0, game prohibited, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and the response of definite variation OFF to CU. As the operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID to the P-unit.

  Then, as a response after 15 seconds, P is SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, number of game balls = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, The operation response of the start opening (2) number of times = 0, game prohibited, game completed ON, prize OFF, and definite variation OFF is sent to the CU. The "game completion ON" has a role as initialization enable information indicating that information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls can be received in P units. In addition, the number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. Note that this sequence example shows the case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls change due to the floating balls. If a prize is generated by a floating ball or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of balls according to the prize is transmitted to the CU as the “number of additional balls”.

  Upon receiving the response of the operation response, the CU detects game completion, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and the data with clear request. Furthermore, according to "the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2)" included in the operation response, the stored "number of gaming balls, total number of added balls, total number stored" The data on the number of balls subtracted, the starting opening (1) total winning number, the starting opening (2) total winning number are updated. By this, the number of game balls at the end of the game is decided on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P base side, and the cost of the P base can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including clear request ON, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 3, C-ID as an operation instruction to P units. After that, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (in clear display) indicating that the display is being cleared (see FIGS. 105 and 106). The "clear request" is data for instructing initialization of the number of game balls on P units.

  In the P unit, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control board 53 for a display causes the display 54 to display a display screen (screen in clear display) which is being cleared.

  In this example, the CU determines the number of game balls at the end of the game in response to the input of the “signal requesting the end of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322. However, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is not limited to the signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates the player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and that the fingerprint information specified by the gaming card inserted in the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. Allow the game as a condition. Furthermore, at the end of the game, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request” is configured by the game end request signal input from the server.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. Clear request present, clear display, SQN = n + N + 3, P unit that received the C-ID command shifts and stores the game history data and C-ID currently updated and stored in the storage area to the backup area .

  Next, the P unit, as an operation response, clear rejection OFF not rejecting the clear request, SQN = 0, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, starting opening (1) number of times = 0, starting opening (2) number of times = 0, game prohibited, game completed ON, special prize OFF, and a probability variation OFF response are transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game ball = 0, and ball = 500. The number of balls = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of gaming balls received immediately before the clearing request, to the balls.

  Thereafter, the CU records ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, a command including the prohibition request no, the clear request no, the clear display OFF, the SQN = m, and the C-ID = 00 h is transmitted to the P-unit as the operation instruction. After that, the P unit has SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the starting opening as operation response 2) Send the response of the number of times = 0, no game, game completion ON, special prize OFF and definite variation OFF to the CU. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card. As described above, both recording the points of the card directly on the card and storing the points in correspondence with the card number in the upper-level server are collectively referred to as “correlating” the points to the card. Do.

  In FIG. 48, a weight of 15 seconds is provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side, but in addition to that, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls-number of far balls-number of out balls-winning The number of balls may be determined to be 0, or the number of fired balls-number of far balls-number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 may be determined to determine that the processing of floating balls is completed. It may be determined that the processing of the floating balls is finished when the earlier condition of such determination and the lapse of 15 seconds is satisfied, and the game completion may be turned on. Furthermore, when the game completion is turned ON based on the lapse of 15 seconds, the CU receiving the game completion ON will time out when, for example, 20 seconds have elapsed from the card return operation etc., and the card ejection process is executed. Good. In addition, when the game completion is turned on based on the passage of 15 seconds, or when the card ejection process is performed when 20 seconds have elapsed, the number of fired balls-number of balls-number of balls-number of prize balls 所 定 predetermined threshold value Alternatively, it may be executed under the condition that the number of fired balls−the number of far balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 ≦ predetermined threshold value.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when interrupting a game.

  It is similar to the processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 48, and the difference is that an interrupting operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for temporarily interrupting the game in order for the player to finish the small use, and the player calls a store clerk in the game arcade to have the store clerk perform remote control operation for the game interruption. Then, the IR light receiving unit 315 receives an infrared signal output from the remote control, converts it into an electronic signal, and inputs it to the main control unit 323. Further, in the case of this game interruption processing, even if the CU detects the game completion, the clear request is not transmitted to the P-unit. As a result, in the P unit, data (C-ID, the number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player is stored and held. When the CU ejects a card, the CU ejects the point 0 card and returns it to the player. Thereafter, while the game is suspended, the other players are prohibited from playing (see FIG. 42).

  The process when the lock of the glass door 6 is released and opened will be described with reference to FIG. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction of no glass open request without a glass door open request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a normal response including the number of gaming balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, when a problem such as pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 in P units is caught on the game board surface, and the player calls a staff in the game arcade, the staff in the game arcade holds The remote controller is operated to release the lock of the glass door 6 and transmit an infrared signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for opening it. The IR photosensitive unit 320 having received the signal inputs a glass door open instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a prohibition request existence for stopping the game, no glass opening request, and a command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In other words, in order to perform the shot-off control on the P-unit before actually opening the glass door 6, an operation instruction with prohibition request and no glass-opening request is sent to the P-unit.

  In response to this, the P-unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 and controls the hitting and firing state. Next, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including the prohibition refusal OFF indicating that the gaming prohibition is not rejected and the gaming prohibition data indicating that the gaming prohibition state has been made as the operation response.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction including the above-mentioned prohibition request to the P car, the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 in the P car flow to the out ball and are collected In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided, and during this time, the CU transmits a command including an instruction of game prohibition, that is, prohibition request existence to the P unit to continue polling.

  Then, when a wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction to open the glass door 6 for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 and to open the door as an operation instruction is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In P which received it, while exciting the glass door open solenoid 10, the lock of the glass door 6 is released and the glass door 6 is opened, the bit in the glass door development life is turned ON, and thereafter, the glass door 6 Remains on (until the detection signal from the glass door closure detector 12 is input) until the. Then, the P-unit returns, as an operation response, a response including a response such as glass open rejection OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, game prohibition, and glass development in progress to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened if it is not rejected for the command of the glass open request, that is, if a response including a response of glass open rejection ON is not returned. After that, a command including no glass open request is transmitted to the P-unit as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 51 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference compared to the process of FIG. 50 is that when the instruction input to open the glass door is detected in the CU, not only the prohibition request having a game prohibition request is issued but also the lock of the glass door 6 is released. It is a point that a command of glass open request having a release request is transmitted to the P-unit. In response to this command, the P unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 to control to stop being fired, and the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 flow to the out balls to be collected, ie, In consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P unit continue to transmit and receive the operation instruction / operation response. When the weight time of 10 seconds has elapsed, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to release the lock of the glass door 6 and the glass door 6 is opened. Then, the bit under development of the glass door is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the glass door 6 is closed (until a detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is input).

  And as for the operation response, the P unit has a glass open refusal OFF that does not refuse the opening of the glass door, a game prohibition indicating that the ball is in the ball shooting suspension state, and the lock is released and the glass door is open. Send a response to the CU that includes data on glass development and so on.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened by receiving the operation response of the glass open rejection OFF.

  As described above, the modified example shown in FIG. 51 is characterized in that the weight processing of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the process of releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 5 and releasing it will be described. In the opening process of the cell (front frame) 6, the same process as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 50 is performed. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  If the staff of the game arcade operates the remote control to release the lock of the front frame (cell) 5 to open it, the remote control outputs an infrared ray including a cell open command signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Be done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, in CU, it is determined that an instruction input to open a cell for opening a cell is detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data on prohibition request existence for prohibiting a game and cell open request nothing to P units. In the P unit, in response to that, the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor is stopped to control the ball to be in the ball hitting and stopping state.

  In the CU, a weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10 seconds of the waiting time is over, cell open request data is issued which is an instruction to release the cell lock and release it. Send the included command to P units. In the P car which received it, the front frame open solenoid 11 is excited to release the lock of the front frame 5 and the front frame 5 is opened. Then, the bit under development of the cell is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the cell is closed (until the detection signal from the front frame closing detector 13 is input).

  And, P unit, as the operation response, the cell open refusal OFF which does not refuse the open request of the cell, the game prohibition which shows that it is in the ball hitting suspension state, the cell development live etc which shows that the cell is being opened etc Send response including data to CU.

  If the CU does not reject the cell open request, that is, if a response including the cell open rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell is opened.

  In the process of opening the cell shown in FIG. 52, as in the modification shown in FIG. 51, the P platform has the function of providing a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time. When a command to open a cell is detected, the CU sends a command including a command to prohibit and a command to open a cell to the P unit, and the P unit receives that command and performs batting ball launch prohibition control. After that, the action instruction / action response is continued with a 10-second wait period CU and P units, and when the 10-second wait time elapses, the front frame open solenoid 11 is controlled to excite and lock the front frame 5 May be released and then a cell open rejection OFF, and a response including data on cell development may be sent to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the P front member, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the process when the power is turned on while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality in which P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since the communication between the CU and the P unit occurred while the card was inserted and playing a game on the P unit, at the stage where the power supply of the CU was restarted, the command of the recovery request is P units from the CU Sent to. However, because there are P unconnected failures, the response from P is not sent back to CU. Then, as described in FIG. 27, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to P units. If no response is returned from the unit P despite that, the second recovery request is resent to the unit P. If no response is returned from the P unit in response to the second retransmission, the CU determines that the communication is abnormal at this stage, and displays an indication that an error has occurred due to the non-connection from the display 312. Control for turning on or blinking the alarm lamp while performing control to Note that instead of the recovery request, a device information request command may be transmitted.

  In this state, when the game store clerk remotely operates the CU to output an infrared signal for forcibly discharging the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced discharge signal is sent to the main control unit 323. It is input. In response to this, the CU adds the "number of game balls" backed up in the CU to the "bearing balls" of the inserted card, and clears the "number of game balls" "connection time" of the CU to 0. Then, an instruction to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. The card reader / writer 327 receiving it ejects the card being taken. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to P units to perform restart processing of the connection sequence (see FIG. 39). The CU determines that the connection sequence resumes with the card inserted (state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at reconnection of FIG. 39, not the connection sequence at power on of FIG. Do. The number of addition balls (for example, j) or the number of subtraction balls from the occurrence of P unconnected failures to the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 39) and the transmission of the first operation response by P. The process when the number (for example, r) is generated is performed in the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 39, the CU receives the recovery response from P units to calculate the number of gaming balls = 0 + j (number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of gaming balls as the calculation result. Back up = j + r. Then, as described in FIG. 39, a communication start request including the values of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and SQN and the value of the game ball is transmitted to P units, and P SQNs and the number of game balls And make corrections.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, processing in the case where the operation instruction (no request operation) from the CU has not reached P will be described.

  As described in FIG. 46 and the like, the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction from the CU, and thereby the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area. Back up the pre-addition subtract ball number and pre-start opening number in the front ball related information storage area, and clear the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and current start opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area to 0 In the case of FIG. 54, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached P units. Therefore, the backup clear process described above is not performed on the P unit. As a result, whenever the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the start winning combination occur, the data is accumulated and stored as the current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in the state of the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU transmits a request without request and an SQN = n command to the P-unit as an operation instruction. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described based on FIG. 27, the CU transmits the command of the same operation instruction to P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach P, the CU retransmits a second time for the same operation instruction, because a response from P is not sent back to the CU. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n and no incremental update of "1" is performed.

  When the command reaches P in the second re-transmission, P is, as described above, the data of the number of added / subtracted balls and the number of starting openings as the ball related information until the arrival of the operation instruction. It is cumulatively stored as Then, using the accumulated number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = The response of the operation response of 490, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball number = 520 + 6 (additional ball number) −36 (subtractive ball number) = 490, and performs processing of correcting and storing the game ball number in the 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, processing in the case where the operation response (response to no request operation) from P units has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 55, since the command from the CU is input to P, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is executed, but the value of SQN of the command transmitted from the CU to P next time Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P-unit judges that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to the fact that the response to the CU has not reached CU, and The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the current start opening number are accumulated and added to the data without clearing the data of the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the number of front start openings which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, with the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU first transmits a request of no request as an operation instruction and a command of SQN = n to P units. In the P unit that received it, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is performed to calculate the current number of gaming balls = 520-13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of gaming balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the front starting opening number, and a command of operation response is created and the current addition subtraction ball number and current starting as current ball related information Clear the data of the number of mouths to 0. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the data of the response of the operation response. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 Send the response of to CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as the previous one, that is, no request, a command of SQN = n to P units.

  On P units that received it, the response of the operation response sent does not reach the CU, because the SQN received this time is the value (= n) that precedes the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up. It is judged that it is a retransmission due to the current addition, and the current addition subtraction ball number as current ball related information for these data without clearing the previous addition subtraction ball number as the ball related information and the data of the number of front starting openings Accumulate and backup data of the current number of starting openings. As a result, the number of pre-addition balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front starting openings (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front starting openings (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After creating the response of the operation response consisting of these data, the data of the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current number of starting openings are cleared to zero. Then, as an operation response, the P unit has SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings = 1. Send response to CU. However, since this response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits a command of the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) to P units again.

  In P that has received it, the response of the operation response has reached CU, judging that the value of SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up It detects that there is no retransmission. As a result, in the P unit, the cumulative addition storage for the previous ball related information is performed as described above, and the response of the operation response is created and sent back to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 485, the number of added balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, the number of starting openings (2) = 2 as an operation response Send to CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing of correcting and storing the data of the gaming balls in 485.

  As described above, when the operation response transmitted earlier does not reach the CU, the P unit retransmits the unreached operation response and then transmits the next operation response instead of transmitting the next operation response. The information after adding up is sent as the next operation response. As a result, in the gaming apparatus, information on the number of gaming balls and the number of starting opening winnings can be collected reliably and efficiently. In the example of FIG. 55, although the case where the operation response from P units has not been reached once has been described, if the operation response has not been reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is The sum of the information of the operation response transmitted for the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, processing when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. It is assumed that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 520, the number of required additions when there is a withdrawal operation from the stored balls replay or the prepaid balance is 125, and the CU first requests addition, SQN = n, and A command including data on the number of requested addition balls = 125 is transmitted to P units. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the same operation command. Since the re-transmission command has not reached P, the corresponding response from P is not sent to the CU. Thus, as described above, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. The second retransmission command reaches P units. In the non-arriving period of the command of the operation instruction from the CU, addition and subtraction data and the starting opening number are added to the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current starting opening number as current ball related information Accumulate count data and store it.

  Then, the P unit calculates the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 (number of requested addition balls) +6 (the number of currently added balls) -36 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 615, and sets the current number of gaming balls data to 615, Create response of operation response. Specifically, the P unit, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 615, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting Send a response of mouth (2) times = 1 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, corrects the number of gaming ball data, and stores it in 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, processing in the case where the operation response (response to the addition request) from the P units has not been reached will be described. In the case where the initial game ball number is 520, an operation to play the game is performed from the stored ball replay or the prepaid balance as withdrawal, and the case where the 125 ball number addition request is generated will be described. First, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P as an operation instruction. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up to the ball related information storage area last time, and the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that transmission is performed, although the requested number of added balls = 125 is included in the received command, addition updating of the game balls based on the command is not performed. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the game ball number = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the game ball number is corrected to 630 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 630, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the addition request ball number 125 is received, addition update is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is not performed. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. A response of n = 1, the number of game balls = 610, the number of addition balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, and the number of starting openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of gaming balls to 610, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up In the case of = n, it is determined that it is re-transmission, and it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, and addition update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is performed. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. A case will be described where, with the initial number of game balls = 520, a subtraction request of 300 balls is generated due to the generation of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits a command of subtraction request existence, SQN = n, and subtraction request ball number = 300 to P as an operation instruction. However, since the command did not reach P, a response from P is not sent back to CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. The response from the P unit is not sent back to the CU because the re-send command also did not reach the P unit. Therefore, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units.

  In the P unit, while the command of the operation instruction from the CU is not reached, as in the process of FIG. 54, the addition / subtraction ball number and the start winning combination are accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. Do. Then, at the stage when the command of the second operation instruction is input to the P unit, the game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as the operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 190, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and number of starting openings (2) = 1 Send the response of to CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190, corrects the game ball in the 190, and stores it.

  As described above, when performing subtraction from a game ball, the CU first transmits an operation instruction command including data of the subtraction request presence and the subtraction request ball number to the P unit, and a response as an operation response to it is Wait for the response to the CU, and subtract the subtraction requirement from the game ball. Although the main management function to manage the current game balls by adding / subtracting game balls is on the CU side, with respect to the game balls changing every moment with progress of the game in P unit, the CU side It is possible to calculate the current game ball by performing addition and subtraction of the game ball only after the operation response including the reply is sent back, and the period for waiting for the operation response from the P unit, the game in CU compared to the P unit. The calculation time of the ball is late. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data having a time delay with respect to the P unit, and even if the current game balls on the CU side have the same number of balls required for subtraction, the P unit side In fact, there may be no remaining game balls for the number of required subtraction balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, upon subtraction of the game balls, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the P's and performs subtraction of the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the process in the case where the operation response from P (the response to the subtraction request) does not reach CU will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number = 520 and the subtraction required ball number = 300, the CU first transmits a command with subtraction required, SQN = n, and subtraction required ball number = 300 to the P units as operation instructions. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up to the ball-related information storage area last time, and the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 210, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. It detects that it is transmission, and although the subtraction request ball number = 300 is included in the received command, subtraction update of the game ball based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update according to the subtraction request is not performed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of gaming balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the subtraction request ball number 300 is received, the subtraction update is not performed, and the subtraction update is not performed double according to the subtraction request. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. = N + 1, game ball number = 205 + 6-26 = 185, ball number to be added = 12, subtract ball number = 47, start opening (1) times = 2 and start opening (2) times = 2 responses are sent to CU . Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 12-47 = 185, corrects the number of gaming balls to 185, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up If it is = n, it is judged that it is re-transmission, and it is not judged that it is an additional subtraction request, and subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request is performed. I do not do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a process in the case where P responds to the addition request of CU in response to the addition rejection response will be described. The initial game ball number = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and first, the operation command from the CU, no request, SQN = n, C-ID command P units Sent to. P is calculated the game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of balls subtracted, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2), SQN = n + 1, and C- Send an operation response including ID data to CU. The CU calculates the gaming ball based on the operation response and corrects it to gaming ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits a command including an addition request presence, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 as operation instructions to P units. In the P unit, for any reason, the response of the operation response including the addition refusal ON that rejects the addition is sent back to the CU.

  Since the CU receives the operation response including the addition refusal OFF, the game ball can not be added at P, and it is determined that the game ball difference has occurred between P and CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do this, send a command for communication disconnection request to P units. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a release control signal for stopping the release from the release control unit 17 to the release control board 31, The launch control board 31 having received the command stops the drive of the launch motor 18 to stop the game.

  The P unit further has, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of pre-additional balls as previous ball number = 6, pre-subtraction number of balls = 36, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 2, pre-start Number of mouths (2) = 2; current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, current added number of balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13, current starting opening (1) number = 1, current starting opening (2 ) Store the data of the number of times = 1.

  Next, after the chip ID authentication is performed between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of a recovery request command and a recovery response response are performed. In the response of this recovery response, the aforementioned recovery data stored on the P base side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of gaming balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (the number of currently added balls = 3, the number of currently subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing at the time of reconnection (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 39, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the Ps in the communication start request. In response to this, the P unit corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that it is the resumption of the connection sequence after transmitting the communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence upon reconnection of FIG. 39 instead of the connection sequence upon power on of FIG. Do.

  Also in the process of FIG. 60, the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from P, so the response including the addition refusal ON as the operation response from P is Even if it has been sent back, the balance consumption has already been settled on the CU side in the earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a process in the case where P responds to a subtraction rejection request in response to a CU subtraction request will be described. Since the number of added balls is 3 and the number of subtracted balls is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P one reciprocation as the initial game ball number = 520. The game ball is 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  When an order of wagon service or the like is generated at this stage and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU sends a command for subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 500 as operation instructions. Send to the table. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 in the P unit, and the number of gaming balls at the current time = 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of gaming balls (480) is smaller than the number of subtraction required balls (500), it is not possible to meet 500 of the subtraction request. Therefore, the P unit, as an operation response, indicates subtraction refusal indicating rejection of subtraction request ON, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) Send a response of 2 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction refusal is detected, and processing of subtraction cancellation is performed. In the process of this subtraction cancellation, for example, a message such as “Insufficient game ball can not be subtracted” is displayed by the display unit 312.

Thereafter, polling of normal operation instructions and operation responses is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a clear rejection response in response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is depressed with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU requests the P unit as an operation instruction to prohibit the game and prohibit it as in the process of FIG. Send a command including unrequested data to P units. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 48, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  After that, the CU transmits a clear request existence command and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to P units. P that received it is clear rejection ON indicating that it can not be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) The response of the operation response of = 1 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and performs clear cancellation processing. The processing of this clear cancellation is processing such as displaying a message such as “Return operation has been canceled but can not be canceled” on the display unit 312 or the like. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instruction and operation response is performed between CU and P units.

  Referring to FIG. 63, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a response of permission rejection in response to the game permission request of CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, and in a trouble state in which some gaming prohibition factor has occurred, the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P in a state where the gaming of P is prohibited. It is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game prohibition factor cancellation” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the Ps as an operation instruction. However, the P unit sends back to the CU an operation response command including an impossibility to hit the ball for some reason, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including the game permission request as an operation instruction to the P unit until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a response of prohibition rejection in response to the game prohibition request of CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response between the CU and the P unit are performed, for example, at the stage of “prohibition factor generation” in FIG. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as operation of the return button 322 has occurred. At this stage, the CU transmits, to the Ps, a command of game prohibition request existence and SQN = n + 2 as an operation instruction. In the P unit, the response of the operation response including the prohibition refusal ON which rejects the game prohibition request for some reason is sent back to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition rejection, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P as an operation instruction until the game prohibition is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a response to the glass open rejection in response to the glass open request of CU will be described. When the input of the opening instruction of the glass door 6 is detected as the initial game ball number = 520, although not shown in FIG. 65, the CU first has a prohibition request as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. And send the command without glass open request to P unit. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the weight of 10 seconds is finished, the CU transmits a command of glass open request and an operation command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to this, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a glass open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a glass open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a normal open cancel after processing the glass open cancellation. The process of this glass open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as "The glass door can not be opened" by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a response of cell open rejection in response to the cell open request of CU will be described. When an input of an instruction to open a cell is detected as the initial game ball number = 520, although not shown in FIG. 66, the CU is first requested to operate as an operation instruction, as in the process of FIG. Send the open request no command to P. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the wait of 10 seconds is completed, the CU transmits a command of cell open request presence and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to that, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a cell open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and release the cell for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a cell open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a process of cell open cancellation and thereafter performs normal polling. The process of cell open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “the cell can not be released” by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. In the state of SQN = n with the initial number of game balls = 520, the command of the operation instruction is transmitted to the P unit, and the P unit has SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 500, number of added balls as operation response. The response including the addition / subtraction data of = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of gaming balls = 500, and if a power failure occurs in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P unit thereafter . In the P unit, as described in FIG. 28, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and transition to the unconnected state is stopped, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped. Stop play. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. It is done by the platform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partners are the same and both SQNs match, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction will be described with reference to FIG. As the initial game ball number = 520, the P unit which received the command of the operation instruction, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, the number of balls subtracted = 23, After sending a response to the CU to the start opening (1) number of times = 1 and the start opening (2) number of times = 1 and the CU accordingly corrects to SQN = n + 2, gaming ball = 500, the CU as an operation instruction Send no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID commands to P units. If the command does not reach P and the power is cut off immediately after that, the P can not receive a command for 4 seconds or more after sending the last response as in the process of FIG. 28. In this case, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state transition is made to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. It is done by the platform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) number of times = 1, current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current addition number of balls = 6, current subtraction number of balls = 36, current start opening (1) number of times = 2, current start opening ( 2) Store the number of times = 2 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one more than the SQN on the P side, so based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. After sending and receiving the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response between CU and P as the initial game ball number = 520, the command of the operation instruction of no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID is After being transmitted to the P unit, the P unit is an operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 2, The response of the number of start openings (2) = 2 was sent to the CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off at the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, the P unit receives 4 seconds after the last response transmission. If the command is not transmitted, the disconnection detection is detected, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. It is done by the platform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current game number of balls = 470-3 = 467, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball = 3, current start opening (1) number of times = 0, current start opening ( 2) Store the number of times = 0 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls)-3 (the current number of subtraction balls) = 467 Total number of additional balls = 6 (current number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (current number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current subtractive ball number), starting opening (1) total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the control contents in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. (A) shows a case where a CU is replaced with a new CU and disagrees, and (b) shows a case where a P is replaced with a new P and disagrees.

  For example, if a CU fails and a power failure occurs, it is often performed in a game arcade to replace the failed CU with a new CU. In the game arcade, a plurality of CUs are aged in a unit stocker. The aging is a standby state connected to the upper server. FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which a CU that has been aged in the unit stocker is replaced with a failed CU, connected to P units, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the other party (P) connected is different based on the device information response sent from P, and the recovery data of P is not used for the correction of the game ball. In this case, since the P unit displays the unsent data when the CU is not connected, if there is the unsent data, the store clerk of the game arcade manually corrects the number of game balls of the card by POS. Specifically, the maintenance screen is displayed on the display 54 on the P unit side, so that the unsent data to the CU can be confirmed, and if the unsent data is displayed, artificially by the store clerk at the game arcade Perform manual correction. This prevents the player from losing money.

  Note that, instead of this artificial hand correction, automatic correction may be performed under certain conditions, as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives the recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read, and the C-ID of the inserted card and a recovery response are sent. It is determined whether the C-ID matches or not, and when the C-ID matches, the processing of correcting the backup value as described below is performed.

  When the determination result of the C-ID does not match, the current game ball count included in the recovery response is transmitted to the upper server 801. At this time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. The upper-level server 801 that has received it back-stores the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. As a case where the determination result of this C-ID becomes unmatched, the player is playing a game while replacing it with a new CU which is broken and aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the player gives up and continues to insert a card to start a game after the replacement work is over. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for some loss for the player who has given up continuing the game during the replacement operation. The player who gives up such continuation of the game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the player and associates the number of current game balls backed up with the member card as a ball bearing. Discharge and make it possible to exchange prizes. Also, once a player who gives up continuing the game has left the game arcade, he / she can stay on the upper server 801 for several days to be able to compensate for the loss even if the player who went away comes to the game arcade again. The number of gaming balls is backed up, and the player who has returned to the store causes the higher-level server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the player itself, and the current number of gaming balls backed up is taken as the ball. They may be discharged in association with each other so that a prize exchange can be made.

  As a condition for automatically correcting the backup value, in addition to the C-ID coincidence determination, it may be a condition that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed. That is, since the work of replacing the failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) for which the replacement work can be performed sufficiently has elapsed, the card Even if it is inserted and it is determined that the C-IDs match, control may be performed so that automatic correction of backup data is not performed.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and communication is possible, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the unit stocker transmits the number of game balls and the C-ID together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801, and , And a new CU connected to the P unit transmits data such as the number of game balls corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and in the upper server 801, data such as the number of game balls of both Control may be performed to check whether they match or not. If they do not coincide with each other, abnormality determination is performed to perform predetermined abnormality processing such as abnormality notification.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from P units, the CU may download the recovery data from the upper server 801 and perform the data correction. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801, stores it back up in the upper server 801, is replaced by a new CU, and is connected to P units. When the C-ID contained in the post-recovery recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 70 (b) shows the case where the P units are replaced with new ones and connected after power-off. In that case, first, activation processing is performed, and device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the P's of the connection partners are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P's recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The recovery data of the original P units, which had been installed before being replaced with the new P units, are manually corrected manually at the POS with the help of a game arcade clerk.

  FIG. 71 shows control in the case where the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 71, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 72 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 72, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and P units, and the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls generated therebetween When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request presence, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 as operation instructions to P units. If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where transmission of the last response and no reception of the command continues for 4 seconds. Stop and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P units execute the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in the process of FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  Since the CU has the same communication counterpart and is one more advanced than the SQN on the P side than the SQN on the P side, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 595, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side at a stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1,000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P units, and the game balls = based on the number of additional subtraction balls generated therebetween After becoming 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, addition required ball number = 125, balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen is calculated, balance is made 500 yen, and consumption of the balance is fixed at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 to P as operation instructions. P unit that received it, as operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 595, number of added balls = 6, number of reduced balls = 36, starting opening (1) number of times = 2, and starting opening (2) Send the response of the number of times = 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and a power failure occurs before the operation response processing according to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 28, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and transition to the unconnected state is stopped, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped. Stop play. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, the game ball = 595-3 = 592 is calculated And the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. It is done by the platform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current number of balls as current number of balls = 592, number of current addition balls = 0, current number of subtraction balls = 3, number of current start openings (1) = 0, number of current start openings (2) = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same and the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls in CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (number of current addition balls)-36 (pre-number of subtractive balls)-3 (current subtraction number of balls) = 592 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  FIG. 75 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 75, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 76, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the subtraction request will be described. As the number of initial game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and at the stage when the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition and subtraction balls in the meantime When a request for subtraction of 300 balls is generated due to a request for wagon service, etc., the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and as an operation instruction, there is a request for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, And the command of the subtraction required ball number = 300 is transmitted to P unit.

  If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where transmission of the last response and no reception of the command continues for 4 seconds. Stop and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P units execute the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit and receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, so it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed on P, and the backup value is based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed on the P base based on the value of SQN, so that the correction request of 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery processing. Although being raised, subtraction of the required number of balls 300 is not performed from the number of game balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side in the stage before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request will be described. The initial game ball number is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of added subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a request for wagon service for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and the operation instruction includes the required for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and Send a command of subtraction required ball number = 300 to P unit.

  In response, the P unit receives SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 170, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, and the starting openings (2) Send a response with the number of times = 2 to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 28, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and transition to the unconnected state is stopped, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped. Stop play. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 170-3 = 167 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed as in FIG. 39, and the recovery request and recovery response are transmitted and received from the CU and P units. Do.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current number of balls as current number of balls = 167, current addition number of balls = 0, current subtraction number of balls = 3, current starting opening (1) number of times = 0, current starting opening (2) number of times = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the P unit has received the subtraction instruction because the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction transmission is in progress, and the P SQN is advanced by 1, and the recovery transmitted by the recovery response Perform processing to correct backup values based on data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of pre-subtraction balls)-3 (current subtractive ball number) = 467 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  The CU transmits a device information request at power-on to restart the connection sequence, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P do not match, as shown in FIG. Instead of the connection sequence at the time of power supply start, the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 39 is executed. As a result, the CU forcibly adds the game balls for the subtraction cancellation to the P base with the operation instruction after recovery, and corrects the SQN as well as the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to P units (see FIG. 39). In response to that, the P unit corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even if it is determined that the P unit receives the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation processing is that the P unit that received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction There is also a possibility that refusal of subtraction was performed on the P side. When the subtraction is rejected on the side of P, if the subtraction is determined on the side of CU, there is a disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, at the time of such a CU side power failure occurrence, although the P unit side should have refused the subtraction instruction because there are not enough remaining points, the subtraction is performed and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 79 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 79, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 80 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 80, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at a stage before reaching the clear request will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 81, as in the process of FIG. 48, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data of prohibition request existence and clear request non-existence for prohibiting the game to the P units as an operation instruction. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 48, in the P unit, a 15-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU makes SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including a clear request, clear display, SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID as an operation instruction to P, but the command reaches P. If not, the P unit detects the disconnection and stops the driving of the bat firing motor 18 to be in the play stop state at the stage where the state where the command is not received continues after sending the last response for 4 seconds. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening 2) The number of times = 0, the current number of balls as the current number of balls = 500, the number of current addition balls = 0, the current subtraction ball = 0, the current starting opening (1) number = 0, the current starting opening (2) number = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the clear request has not arrived because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Do the processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the current number of game balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting opening (1) Correct the total number to 0, and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, recovery processing in the case where a power failure occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 82, as in the process of FIG. 48, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data of prohibition request existence and clear request non-existence for prohibiting the game to the P units as operation instructions. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 48, in the P unit, a 15-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including clear request present, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P unit clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and clears the SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0, and then the SQN as an operation response. Send a response to CU with = 0, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, and number of starting openings (2) = 0 . If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs in the CU before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 28, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and a transition to the unconnected state is made.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed as in the process of FIG. 39, and transmission / reception of device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, recovery response CU and P perform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, C-ID, pre-additional ball number 0, pre-subtraction ball number 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times 0, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 0, Current game number of balls = 0, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current starting opening (1) number = 0, Current starting opening (2) number = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  FIG. 83 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 83, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 84 shows control in the case where the communication partner does not match in the recovery when the CU side power failure occurs shown in FIG. Also in the control of FIG. 84, the same control as the control operation described in FIG. 70 described above is performed. Here, the description will not be repeated.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P-base side corresponding to the control operation at the time of card insertion shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 85, when the card is not inserted, a command of an operation instruction without an operation request is sent from the CU to P during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. P is sent back to CU. During transmission and reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 85, “None” in the “Card type” title column on the display 312 of the CU, “0 shot” is displayed in the “playing ball” title column. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 85, in the column of the title of “game ball”, the column of the title of “0 ball” and the card balance ”. "0 yen" is displayed. In addition, on the display 312 and the display 43, various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time is displayed. For example, in FIG. 85, the number of times of start, the number of big hits, the number of definite variations, and the number of highest runs are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes The frequency is displayed as a bar graph. Furthermore, on the CU side display unit 312, an amount display portion for setting a credit amount, an amount display portion for the card balance, a display portion for the number of replayed balls, a display portion for the number of balls and a display portion for the rate of rental balls Is provided.

  Furthermore, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by the touch panel as described above, and display items of "base information", "setting change", and "order menu" are displayed at the upper left of each display screen. When the user selects a touch operation, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 85, a screen in a state in which “host information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided at the lower part of each display screen with a selection operation display unit for "return", "rental", "replay", and "call", and the player can select any of these display units. It is possible to input a command to the CU by selecting one and performing a touch operation. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Loan" is touched, gaming balls from the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card are lent. Further, if "replay" is touched, replay using balls or balls of the inserted card (membership card) can be performed. When "call" is touched, a notification for calling a game center clerk is made.

  When the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command of no operation request to the P-unit as an operation instruction during the card insertion process. In response to this, the unit P detects that the card insertion process has been started on the CU side. After sending and receiving the command of the operation instruction, it is in the state of inquiring to the upper server (for example, the hall management computer 1). In the state in which this inquiry is in progress, the display 312 on the CU side displays "inquiring" as shown in the second "card balance inquiring screen" from the top, and also displays on the P side In the display unit 54, the server displays an arrow from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second normal screen (during inquiry of card balance), and the server is inquired of the card inserted. The picture is displayed. Note that "IC" in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  In P units that have received the above-mentioned operation instruction, while waiting as an operation response, a response of game ball = 0 is sent back to the CU.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is collated by inquiring the server and the balls (= 5000) and the balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. , Add required ball number = 5000, card balance = send a command to P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed in addition. On the P unit that has received this command, the CU detects that the card balance and the balls have been settled, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, "5,000 balls" is displayed in the ball display column as shown on the third "Up in ball lending" screen from the top on the display 312 of the CU, and the game machine is headed. An arrow is displayed, and it is displayed to the player that it is in the middle of transmitting 5,000 balls to the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the P-unit, as shown on the third [Normal screen (during a rental)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display unit and the card balance display unit. The display (during addition display) which is being added with the ball rental is thereby made. Then, "5000 balls" are displayed on the game ball display unit, and "7000 yen" is displayed on the card balance display unit.

  Next, a response including gaming ball = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P unit to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the movement display of the ball indicating the addition display is started, the addition display is ended and “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, in the P unit, the addition display is ended after a few seconds since the movement display of the ball during the addition display is started, and the movement display of the ball by the display 54 is ended.

  In this way, while the display of the start of the operation process such as during inquiry or addition display is started at the same time with CU and P units, the end of the display of those operation processes is ended from CU to P unit The command or the like is not transmitted, and the P-unit side can be terminated at its own timing, and the CU-side end timing is not constrained. As a result, it is possible to make a unique display unique to the P stand.

  FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing control processing in the case where the player divides and transfers the game ball to another person while carrying out the game. The flowcharts shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 and 88 described later indicate control that allows the player to divide and transfer the game ball to others while sharing the game while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 86, card A as a membership card with balls = 5000 is first inserted into CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game even if the gaming value (balls, balls and prepaid balance) of the membership card is all zero. You must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the required number of added balls = 5000 to the P base to add “5000” which is the balls held by the card A on the P base side to the P base. In P unit, in response to that, the game ball is updated to 5000, and a response including the game ball = 5000 is transmitted to the CU as an operation response. After that, the game is started in P units, and at the stage when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 along with the execution of the game, the ball sharing of 1000 balls is transferred to another person for sharing balls When the specification operation of "ball" is performed, thereafter, it will be in the state of being divided into balls at CU and P units.

  A card B in which balls are to be divided and transferred to another person (ball sharing) is recorded by taking out a stock card stocked in a card stock unit in the CU to a card reader / writer 327 and compensating it. In order to eject the card B by writing, it is necessary to eject the card A already inserted in the card reader / writer 327 in order to eject the card B. At that time, when all the game balls (= 4000) at the current time are written to the card A (member card owned by the player) and discharged, the game balls become 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. It disappears.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide points (share balls) while playing a game, the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of "point = 0", and the game ball corresponding to the points is CU Control to leave it as collateral information. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are sent to the upper server, and the points stored in the upper server are stored in association with the card number received, Update that point to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point = 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point = 0) in the CU is taken out and compensated for by the card reader / writer 327. At that time, with the continuation of the game on the P unit, the game balls are subtracted, and the game balls are in the state of 3800. Then, a command including an operation request (operation instruction) of the number of subtraction required balls = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P unit in order to write 1000 which is the balls having balls to be divided and transferred (shared balls sharing) in the card B. In the P unit, the game ball number 3800 is subtracted from the current game ball number 3800 to make the game ball number 2800, and an operation response including the game ball number 2800 is transmitted to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up and stores the data of game ball = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “held ball = 1000” on the card B by the card reader / writer 327, and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands over the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred to other persons (shared balls). In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer A card that shares 1000), which is a point to be shared, is sent to the upper server, and a point = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points that are generated by ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is a member card of the player who has ejected the card B, and causes the display 312 to display the insertion of the card A (see FIG. 94). Then, the player who has seen it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball is 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, it is determined whether or not the inserted card A is the same as the card A ejected once in the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match) If they do not match, the card A is discharged, while if they match, the processing of the ball division (ball sharing) ends, and the display 312 displays that effect (see FIG. See 95).

  In the inserted card A, at the time of returning the card after the end of the game, the game ball is written as a ball and is ejected from the CU.

  FIG. 87 shows a control operation in the case where the player performs the divided transfer of balls (sharing balls) while inserting a visitor card B in which 5,000 balls have been recorded into the CU and playing a game. There is. In this case, the previously inserted card B is a visitor card that does not necessarily need to be returned to the player. It is made to carry out ball sharing by disclosing and discharging the visitor card B to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (ball ball = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the addition request ball number = 5000 for adding all the ball balls of 5000 recorded on the inserted card B as game balls (Operation instruction) is transmitted from CU to P units.

  In response to this, the P unit stores the game ball = 5000 and sends back an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, it is possible to play a game with P units and it will be in the state of playing.

  Then, after the game ball is used for the game and the game ball becomes 4,000, the player performs designation of ball sharing (1000 ball) for transferring 1000 balls worth of balls to others. From this stage, it will be in the state of point division. At this stage, the game ball is further used for the game, and the game ball is 3800. Then, an operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 1000 for subtracting 1000 game balls for divided transfer (shared ball share) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P car. In response to that, the P unit subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response to that, the CU backs up and stores the data of the game ball = 2800. Then, “ball bearing = 1000” is written to the card B held in the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the processing of divided transfer of balls (ball sharing) is completed. After that, if the player continues playing the game at P, and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return processing shown in FIG. 48, and is stored in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and ball data corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded in the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer Send 1000 to the upper server with the points to be shared), retrieve the stored points in correspondence with the card number received by the upper server, and use the points as the number of game balls received from CU The card is updated to the corresponding value (= 1000 points), and it is stored as a history that the card is a card that has been divided and transferred (point sharing) and 1000 points are points resulting from ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. Then, with regard to the stock card discharged at the end of the game, the card number and the data of the number of gaming balls at the time of card discharge are transmitted to the upper server, and the points = 1000 in correspondence with the card number received by the upper server. And a history that the holder of the card B described above has been changed to the holder of this stock card. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (sharing balls). Differences from the control processing shown in FIG. 86 will be mainly described. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 88, the same as in FIG. 86, the card A, which is a member's card of the player already inserted, is returned first when performing divided transfer of ball (sharing balls). There is, on the occasion of the return, after securing the game ball (200 collateral balls) required to continue the game during the ball division, the remaining game balls are recorded as the ball A on the card A. Is different from that of FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates the display 312 which is a touch panel, and designates ball sharing for transferring 1000 balls in a divided manner. Then, the CU leaves 1000 shared balls to be divided and transferred and the above-described 200 protected balls in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) -secured ball (200) -shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits a command of operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 3800 to P units. In response to this, the P unit subtracts 3800 from the current gaming ball 5000, and calculates and stores the remaining gaming balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is sent back to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200 and the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the ball = 3800 to the card A held in the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. As described above, in order to carry out divided transfers of balls (sharing balls) while continuing the game in P, return of the card A that has been inserted leaving a collateral ball (play: 200 balls) for play in the CU The

  After that, the CU takes out and compensates the stock card (card B with ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327. In the meantime, the game continues on the P unit, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of reduced balls = 60 are generated. As a result, gaming balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) -60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  Then, in the CU, in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball share), the command of the operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 1000 is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In the unit P, upon receipt thereof, the subtraction required ball number 1000 is subtracted from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game ball = 150, and the response of the operation response including the game ball = 150 is transmitted to the CU.

  In the CU, it is received, and "ball = 1000" is written on the card B and returned (discharged). The player can perform divided transfer of the game ball (shared ball sharing) by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B has been discharged, the CU causes the display 312 to display a message prompting reinsertion of the membership card A of the player who has been discharged. The player who sees it reinserts the previously ejected card A (ball with ball = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues on P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, when the card A is reinserted, the game ball is 150 + 10-85 = 75. Then, when the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether or not the inserted card A and the card A that has been ejected in the course of the point sharing process are the same (for example, both card numbers are If they do not match, the card A is discharged, and if they match, the CU causes the ball having ball = 3800 recorded on the card A to be added to the P as a game ball Then, the command of the operation request including the requested number of addition balls = 3800 is transmitted to the P units. In response to that, the P-unit calculates game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits the response of the operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer A card that shares 1000), which is a point to be shared, is sent to the upper server, and a point = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points that are generated by ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

89 to 106 are screen diagrams displayed by the display 312 of the CU.
First, the display screen displayed on the display unit 312 in the case of performing ball sharing as shown in FIG. 86 will be described based on FIG. 89 to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 89, the player selects and specifies ball sharing from among a plurality of menus displayed by the player touching the “menu” display item (icon) displayed above the left half of the screen. The state shown in FIG. 89 is the display screen for ball sharing shown in FIG. The ball sharing (divisional transfer of game balls) can be divided transfer from balls owned by the player or divided transfer from balls. For that purpose, a message "Please select a ball sharing source" is displayed first, and a display item (icon) representing a ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a ball are displayed.

  On the display screen in the right half of FIG. 89, the status of the currently inserted card is displayed. In FIG. 89, a membership card is inserted, and it is shown that the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, 0 balls, 500 balls, and 10000 balls at the current moment.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending the game balls from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls, which is the number of balls for 500 yen, are the number of payout balls. Furthermore, it is shown that the player can insert a bill into the CU and reload the card balance of the inserted card, thus allowing "payment available".

  The player performs a touch input of the ball sharing source by touching either "ball" or "pool" in the left half of the screen. Here, the case of selecting “balls with ball” is shown.

  When the player selects "ball-bearing", a screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed next. The message "Please select the number of balls to share" is displayed in the left half of the screen, and as the selection target of the number of shared balls, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 2500, 3000, 3500, and Nine types of 4,000 balls and 5,000 balls are displayed. The player touches one of the nine types to select and input. Here, the case of selecting and inputting "1000 balls" will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs "1000 balls", a screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed next. On the screen shown in FIG. 91, a message of “The ball is divided by the above statement. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls of your card is 9000 as the statement of the number of balls shared, It is displayed that the number of balls of the shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball share) is 1000. Then, the display item (icon) of "ball sharing start" and the display item (icon) of "cancel" are displayed. The player touches and selects one of the display items. If "cancel" is selected, ball sharing is canceled. On the other hand, if "ball sharing start" is selected and input, the ball sharing process as shown in the specification of the number of shared balls is started.

  If the player selects and inputs "start ball sharing", the screen shown in FIG. 92 is displayed next. On the screen shown in FIG. 92, a message of “your own card is ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. The ball sharing processing status image has three types of processing order: 1, 2 and 3. In the first processing, ejection of a card of the player (player), ejection of a shared card as second processing, third processing It is displayed as a reinsertion of his card as ejected. Then, "processing" and "waiting" are displayed from the top in the "status" column, and it is indicated that the first processing is currently being processed. Then, an image in which one's own card is ejected is shown by a broken line from the first process.

  In the screen on the right half of FIG. 92, 10000 balls, which are game balls in P units at the present time, are displayed in a blinking manner.

  When the discharge of one's own card is finished, the screen shown in FIG. 93 is displayed next. In FIG. 93, in the column of “Status”, it is indicated that the ejection of one's own card as the first processing is “done”, and then the ejection of the shared card as the second processing is being processed. . Then, the state in which the shared card is being ejected from the second process is shown by the arrow.

  When the discharging of the shared card is completed, a screen shown in FIG. 94 is displayed next. In the screen shown in FIG. 94, one's own card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process, and at this point, the reinsertion of one's own card is in process. It is shown that there is. Then, an image for inserting one's own card is displayed by an arrow in the place of the third process.

  When the player reinserts his card into the CU, the screen of FIG. 95 is displayed next. In FIG. 95, a message of “ball sharing completed” is displayed, and it is indicated that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed as the ball sharing processing status. Then, since the ball sharing of 1000 balls is completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in the P unit at the current point is 9,000 balls at 10000-1000 = 9000.

  Next, FIGS. 96 to 102 are diagrams of display screens by the display unit 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 45 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 96, the display screen of FIG. 96 is in a state where the player touches and selectively inputs the display item (icon) of "wagon service" displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message "Please select the type to order" is displayed, and as a wagon menu, "5 items for basic menu", "30 items for drinks", "10 items for food", "20 for sweets" As well as displaying four types of menu items, the icon of "order status confirmation" is displayed.

  In the screen on the right half of FIG. 96, 1000 balls are displayed as the number of game balls at the current time in P units. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, taking into consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects "30 drinks", a screen shown in FIG. 97 is displayed next. In FIG. 97, the message "Please select the product to be ordered" is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown, and the number of game balls required to order each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects one of the displayed menu items in consideration of the fact that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 1,000. In addition, on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed, an icon of an equilateral triangle and an icon of an inverted triangle are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled downward and the upper portion of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 97, the screen is scrolled upward, and the screen lower portion is displayed.

  In FIG. 97, after the player has selected a menu of coffee requiring 75 balls, the player touches the “Add Product” icon displayed in the title column of “Order Item Details” in FIG. Return to the wagon menu display screen, select the "10 items of food" menu in Fig. 96, and with the menu of food items displayed, the "burger" that requires 100 game balls from among them The menu is selected, and further, the icon of "Add Item" displayed in the title column of "Order Item Details" of FIG. 98 is touched to return to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. A case will be described in which the icon of "20 sweets" is selected and input, and the player selects "ice" requiring 50 game balls from the sweets display screen.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 98 is displayed next, and the details of the order item selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the ordered item name, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered item are displayed. In the case of FIG. 98, it is shown that one hamburger with 100 consumption balls, one coffee with 75 consumption balls, and one ice with 50 consumption balls are ordered. And, it is displayed that the total number of consumed balls is 225 balls. Furthermore, the "Add" icon is displayed in the column of the quantity of the order item details, and the player touches this additional icon to input, and the quantity is incremented by one each time the player touches. Ru. Also, on the right side of the quantity, a "delete" icon is displayed corresponding to each order prize. By the player touching the icon, it is possible to delete the corresponding product order. For example, if you touch the top "Delete", the hamburger order will be deleted, touch the second "Delete" to delete the coffee order, and touch the third "Delete" to get ice Your order is deleted.

  Furthermore, an icon of "product addition" is shown below this order item description, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the display screen of the wagon menu of FIG. 96 again as described above, and the player Makes it possible to select additional order items and order items.

  Further, a "cancel" icon is shown below the ordered item description in FIG. 98, and the player can cancel all ordered items ordered up to this point by touching this icon.

  Furthermore, an "order" icon is shown below the order item description, and the player performs touch operation on the wagon service as indicated in the order item specification by touch operation on the icon. Become.

  When the player touches the “Delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen shown in FIG. 98, the screen shown in FIG. 99 is displayed. FIG. 99 shows that the order of “ice” has been cancelled.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 98, when the player touches the “order” icon, the screen shown in FIG. 100 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 100, the image in the inquiry of the order item is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total of the number of consumed balls, and 1000 game balls in P at the current point in time, which indicates that communication is in progress. Specifically, referring to FIG. 101, first, an arrow is displayed from the number of balls consumed "225" to the direction of "1000" balls of P, with reference to FIG. The word "in querying" is displayed.

  After this display is made, arrows are displayed from "1000" balls of P units to "225" balls in the number of consumed balls, and the characters "in inquiry" are displayed. And both these displays are repeated and displayed several times. After the display, next, the screen of FIG. 102 is displayed. On the screen shown in FIG. 102, a message “The order item has been received, and the above-mentioned number of withdrawal balls has been withdrawn from the ball” is displayed, and display of the order item reception completion is made. The total consumption ball number “225” is displayed as a ball. Then, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that as a result of the consumption of 225 balls, the gaming balls in the current P cars are “775” balls.

  FIGS. 103 and 104 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 41, and are the third display screens from the top among the display screens of the display 312 on the CU side shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 103, in the left half of the screen, gaming machine information showing the same content as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 85 is shown although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 103, it is displayed that all the 1000 balls, which are balls of the card inserted in the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, at the stage when the ball movement is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 104, and the message "Carry ball movement complete!" Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the ball ball column becomes zero. A 1000 ball is displayed as a game ball in the P unit, and a display is made in which “1000” is displayed in a blinking manner.

  FIGS. 105 and 106 are display screens showing that clear display is in progress in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 105, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current game ball in P is 1000 balls, and "1000" is displayed in a blinking manner. Then, a state in which the ball is being moved is displayed in the display column of the ball from P to the ball, and the character "during ball movement" is displayed.

  Then, when movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 106, and a state in which the game ball on the P platform side has become 0 is displayed, and 1000 balls are displayed as the ball. And "1000" is displayed blinking.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, an error monitoring function based on detection signals of various detection switches accompanying the circulation of the sealing ball will be described. Referring to FIG. 107, when the detection signal from the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is continuously OFF for 2 seconds or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball shortage error 1 has occurred.

  When the detection signal of the ball raising switch (down) 41 b is continuously on for 2 seconds or more during conveyance of the game ball, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball conveyance error 1 occurs. When the detection signal of the firing ball detection switch is continuously on for 2 seconds or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that the number of game balls is too large, the number of balls being filled is too large.

  If the detection signal of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 is continuously turned off for 2 seconds or more after 30 seconds from the end of the game, the payout control unit 17 has too few balls inserted, and the game ball number is too low judge.

  If the detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is continuously OFF for 2 seconds or more except during conveyance of the game ball, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball number shortage error 2 is made.

  If the detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is continuously on for 2 seconds or more other than during game ball transport, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball transport error 2 has occurred.

  When the payout control unit 17 determines that the difference between the number of times the ball lift switch (upper) 41a is turned on and the number of turns on the fired ball detection switch 903 is 30 or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game board ball jam error Do. The difference between the number of times the ball lift switch (upper) 41a is turned on and the number of times the fired ball detection switch 903 is turned on is a floating state in which pachinko balls thrown into the game board, ie, the game area 27 are still floating in the game area 27 It is the number of balls, and such floating balls do not become 30 or more in the normal case, and when it becomes 30 or more, it is thought that pachinko balls are caught and clogged in the game area 27 Be In such a case, the payout control unit 17 determines that a game board ball jam error has occurred.

  When the payout control unit 17 determines the various errors shown in FIG. 107, a command signal for causing the display unit 54 to display the type of the error and the occurrence of the error is outputted to the effect control substrate 53 for the display unit. . Furthermore, the type of error that occurred and the fact that an error occurred are notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the type of the error that occurred in the hall management computer 1 and that the error occurred And may be notified.

  Next, the counting function of the number of gaming balls by the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIG. In FIG. 108, the variation factor of the number of gaming balls, the factor of variation of the number of gaming balls, the variation detection means of the number of gaming balls, the management item by the payout control unit 17, and the number of gaming balls of plural types for each item of variation value. The counting function is shown.

  First, the detection of the launch of the game ball, which detects that the number of game balls has been launched into the game area 27, is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input in the LSI 799 (see FIG. 6) in which the payout control unit 17 is provided, and the payout control unit 17 subtracts “1” from the number of gaming balls based on the detection, The number of center balls (the number of floating balls in the game area 27) is incremented by "1", and the number of fired balls fired in the game area 27 is incremented by "1".

  The detection of the foul ball is detected when the foul ball detection switch 33 is turned on, and is detected by the port input in the LSI 799. When the payout control unit 17 detects the far ball, the number of game balls is incremented by one, the number of balls being played (the number of floating balls) is decremented by one, and the number of far balls is incremented by one. .

  The detection of the winning of the game ball is detected when the winning opening switch and the starting opening switch are turned on, and is detected when the command from the main control board 16 (see FIG. 6) is received by the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799. Ru. By detecting the winning, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of gaming balls by the number of winning balls to be paid out with the winning.

  Out ball detection is detected when the out ball detection switch 701 (see FIG. 6) is turned on, and is detected when there is a port input in the LSI. The payout control unit 17 adds "1" to the out ball based on the detection of the out ball.

  The detection of the discharge of the game ball from the gaming board is detected when the launch ball detection switch 903 (see FIG. 6) is turned on, and is detected by the port input in the LSI. When the payout control unit 17 detects the discharge of the game balls from the game board, the number of balls being played (the number of floating balls) is decremented by “1”.

  The reception of the addition request instruction is detected by receiving a command of the addition request instruction from the card unit. When the payout control unit 17 detects it, control is performed to add the number of requested addition balls instructed by the command of the addition request instruction to the number of gaming balls.

  Reception of a subtraction request instruction is detected by receiving a subtraction request instruction command from the card unit, and when the payout control unit 17 detects it, the subtraction request ball number specified by the subtraction request instruction command is received. Control to subtract the number of game balls is performed.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the control of the ball removal processing for ball removal executed by the payout control unit 17. At S30, it is determined whether the one ball removal flag or the all balls removal flag is set, and if it is not set, the ball removal processing at the time of the ball removal ends. The one-ball removal flag is a flag which is set when the ball removal portion 915 (see FIG. 2) is operated only once and only one sealing ball is removed, and is set in S55 described later. On the other hand, the all ball removal flag is a flag that is set when the ball removal portion 915 is operated continuously and all the enclosed balls are removed, and is set in S56 described later. These flags are set under the condition that the ball removal switch 922 (see FIG. 2) is operated as described later in S55 and S56 of FIG.

  If either the one ball removal flag or the all balls removal flag is set, the control proceeds to S31, and it is determined whether the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is off. When the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is on, that is, when the loading of the supply balls into the pachinko machine 2 is completed and the game is ready to be played, the determination of NO is made in S31 and The control of the ball transport processing at the time of ball removal ends. On the other hand, when a new pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game arcade, the enclosed ball has not been loaded into the pachinko machine 2 yet. In that case, first, a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are poured from the out port 145. Then, the pachinko ball flows down the out ball flow down path 702, the collection ball passage path 901, and the ball collection path 189, and reaches the front of the transfer device 190. In that state, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is in the OFF state where the pachinko ball is not detected. Therefore, a determination of YES is made in S31, the control proceeds to S32, and it is determined whether the conveyance failure flag is on. The transport failure flag is a flag set in step S38 described later, and the control for transporting the pachinko ball parked in front of the transport device 190 described above upward by the transport device 190 is performed despite the predetermined time This flag is set when the pachinko ball has not been transported upward.

  If the transport failure flag is not on, the control proceeds to S33, where a first timer that counts 6 seconds is set. Next, at S35, the conveyance motor 40 is driven, and the conveyance device 190 operates. Next, at S36, it is determined whether or not the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is in the on state to detect the conveyed balls.

  As described above, the ON determination of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is, for example, continued for several milliseconds, and the YES determination is made because the pachinko ball is detected in the ON state. Thus, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the pachinko balls transported upward and discharged from the transfer device 190 flow down to the rectifier 916 and are stopped, and the parked pachinko balls are stopped by the ball raising switch (upper When the detection position of 41a is reached, a determination of YES is made in S36, and stop control of the transport motor 40 in S40 is executed. After the stop control of the transport motor 40 in S40 is executed, the ball transport processing at the time of deburring is finished, and when the deburring processing in FIG. 110 is executed, it is determined as NO in S51 and S66. The ball removal / all ball removal flag is reset.

  If NO is determined in S36, it is determined in S37 whether or not the timer has timed up, and if it has not timed out yet, the control returns to S36. The timer according to S37 at this stage is a first timer which counts 6 seconds set in S33. When pachinko balls are normally transported upward while traveling through the loop of S36 → S37 → S36, the pachinko balls reach the ball raising switch (upper) 41a before the time-up. A determination of YES is made by S36, the control proceeds to S40, and control to stop the conveyance motor 40 is performed.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko ball (stopped ball) is not detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to some trouble despite the fact that the transport motor 40 is driven for 6 seconds, a determination of YES is made in S37 and the control is performed. The process proceeds to step S38, the conveyance failure flag is set, and an error notification is issued in step S39, and then the process proceeds to step S40. In this error notification, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for error notification to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display is controlled to display on the display 54 that a transport error has occurred. Alternatively, the fact that a transport error has occurred may be notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the hall management computer 1 may notify that.

  After the transport failure flag is once set in S38, when the control reaches S32, a YES determination is made in S32, and a second timer for counting 2 seconds is set in S34, and the transport in S35 is performed again. The motor is driven and control for conveying the ball upward is executed again. Then, as described above, the control cycles from S36 → S37 → S36, and if the pachinko ball reaches the detection point of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a at the stage before 2 seconds have elapsed, the control proceeds to S40 and transport The motor is stopped.

  On the other hand, at the time of conveyance by retry after failure in the first conveyance, the second timer (2 seconds) is set, so the loop of S36 → S37 → S36 is circulated to carry the conveyance motor 40 If the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is not turned on despite the second drive control, the control proceeds to S38, the conveyance failure flag is set, and the control of the error notification after S39 is performed as described above. It will be executed.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing control of the ball removal processing performed by the payout control unit 17. By S51, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 922 is operated to be in the on state. If it is not in the on state, the control proceeds to S66, where the one ball removal flag or the all ball removal flag described above is reset. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch is on, the control proceeds to S52, the on time of the ball removal switch is continued, and it is determined in S53 whether or not the ball removal switch is switched off. If the switch has not been made yet, the process returns to S52.

  Then, the switch on time is measured at S52 until the ball removal switch is switched off, and when the switch is switched off, the control proceeds to S54 where it is determined whether or not the long press operation has been performed. If the switch on time measured in S50 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), it is determined that the operation is a long press operation, and the control proceeds to S56. If it is shorter than the above-mentioned one), a judgment of NO is made by S54, control proceeds to S55, and a one ball removal flag is set.

  Next, the control proceeds to S56a, where it is determined whether or not the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is off, and in the case of OFF, that is, at the time of loading of the sealing ball at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2, this ball removal processing No ball removal operation is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is on, that is, when the loading of the sealing ball is completed, the control proceeds to S57, the ball removing motor 195a is driven, and the ball removing motor origin sensor 195b is turned on by S58. It is judged whether or not it has become, and it waits until it becomes. When the deburring motor 195a makes one rotation and the deburring motor origin sensor 195b is turned on again, a determination of YES is made in S58, and stop control of the deburring motor 195a is performed in S59. By one rotation of the ball removal motor 195a, one enclosed ball is pushed out of the path and discharged.

  Next, the control proceeds to S60, where it is determined whether the all balls removal flag is set. When the one ball removal flag is set, the determination of NO is made in S60, the one ball removal flag in S66 is reset, and the ball removal processing is completed.

  On the other hand, if the all ball removal flag is set, a determination of YES is made in S60, the control proceeds to S61, and it is determined whether the ball removal switch 922 is turned on. When all the sealing balls are extracted, after the ball removal switch 922 is turned on for 3 seconds or more, NO is determined in S61 because the ball removal switch 922 is not operated again. Then, at S65, it is judged whether or not the conveyance failure flag is set. If it is not set, the control returns to S57, and the ball removing operation by driving the ball removing motor 195a after S57 is executed. The control is performed until all the enclosed balls are deburred. The transport failure flag at S65 is a flag set at S38 described above.

  In this ball removing process and the ball removing process in FIG. 109, the ball transferring process in FIG. 109 is performed first, and then the ball removing process in FIG. 110 is performed, and both processes are repeated in that order. Be done. Then, by performing the ball removal by the ball removal portion 915, the ball lifting switch (upper) 41a which has detected the ball up to that point is in the off state where the ball is not detected. Then, the determination of YES is made in S31 of FIG. 109, and the processing in S32 and subsequent steps is performed, whereby the balls are transported upward by the transport device 190. Then, if the ball is not detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a even though the timer has timed up in S37, the transport failure flag is set in S38. In that case, a determination of YES is made in S65 of FIG. 110, the process proceeds to S66, the one ball removal / all ball removal flag is reset, and the ball removal process and the ball removal process are not executed.

  On the other hand, if it is desired to stop the ball removal processing halfway while all the ball removal processing is being performed, the attendant of the game arcade holds the ball removal switch 922 again for 3 seconds or longer. Then, the determination of NO is made in S63, the switch on time is continued in S62, and it is determined in S64 whether or not the long press operation is performed when the ball removal switch is switched off. If there is, the one ball removal / all ball removal flag at S66 is reset, and the ball transfer process and the ball removal process at the time of ball removal are stopped.

  Alternatively, in place of or in addition to the above long press operation, control may be performed to stop the ball removal processing halfway when the ball removal switch 922 is pressed for a short period of less than 3 seconds.

  In the above-described control, the one-ball removal flag or the all-balls removal flag is reset by S66 when S51 is NO, but the process returns without performing S66 when S51 is NO. Good. By doing this, it is possible to use the control routine of the ball removal processing for ball removal at the same time for the drive control of the transport motor 40 in the operating state in which the player performs the hitting operation. In this ball removal processing during ball removal, the first timer (6 seconds) is set in S33 and it is determined whether or not the time is up in S37. However, the above-mentioned player is performing the hitting operation. The off time of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a in the state is at most about 2 to 3 seconds, and the first timer (6 seconds) is set again at S33 without being determined as YES at S37. The delivery failure flag is never set.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing control of the firing error process executed by the payout control unit 17. At S71, it is determined whether the card is being inserted. This determination is made based on whether or not a command including a card holding ON operation instruction transmitted from the CU described based on FIG. 41 is received. If a command including ON during card holding is received, a determination of YES is made in S71, but if a command including OFF during card holding is received, a determination of NO is made in S71, and the process proceeds to S72 and the firing motor A determination is made as to whether there has been a change in the level of the detection output of the origin sensor 37. If not, this firing error processing ends, but if there is, the control proceeds to S73 where the firing motor operation error flag is set. The firing motor operation error flag is a flag indicating that an error has occurred in which the hitting and firing motor has been rotated despite the fact that no card is inserted. Then, at S74, control for notifying a firing motor operation error is performed. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for notifying the firing motor operation error to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving the command displays that the firing motor error has occurred. The control to display is performed by 54. Alternatively, the fact that a firing motor error has occurred may be notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the hall management computer 1 may notify that effect.

  Next, the control proceeds to S93, and control for restricting the game ball circulation function is performed. Specifically, control is performed such that any one or two or more or all of the transport motor 40, the polishing motor 193a, the rectifier solenoid 196a, the firing motor 18, and the ball removal motor 195a do not operate.

  Next, at S94, control is performed to limit the game ball counting function. Specifically, control for disabling any one, two or more or all detection signals of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the far ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the firing ball detection switch 903 It is.

  If it is determined in S71 that the card is being inserted, the control proceeds to S75, and it is determined whether the firing motor 40 is rotating. When the rotational drive is not in progress, the firing error processing is ended. When the rotational drive is in progress, the error determination processing based on the detection signal of the firing motor origin sensor 37 after S76 is performed.

  The firing speed of the pachinko balls into the game area 27 is set to 100 per minute. Accordingly, the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 is also controlled to rotate at a predetermined speed. The discharge control unit 17 determines whether or not the rotation speed or rotation of the discharge motor 18 is detected by the detection output of the discharge motor origin sensor 37, and the rotation speed is too slow error (fire speed error 2), the rotation speed is too fast Judgment such as error (firing speed error 1), an error (firing motor origin detection error) that the firing motor origin sensor can not be detected even though the firing motor is driven and controlled for a predetermined upper limit time (for example 2 seconds) Do.

  First, at S76, it is determined whether or not the firing motor origin sensor 37 is in the on state. If it is in the on state, control is performed to update the measured value of the on state of the firing motor origin sensor 37 in S77, and it is determined whether the off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is being measured in S78. Is done. When the off-time is not being measured, this firing error processing ends. On the other hand, when the off time is being measured, it is determined in S79 whether or not the firing motor origin sensor off time is shorter than the predetermined high speed limit time. If it is determined that the speed is short, the process proceeds to S86, where the firing speed error 1 flag is set. The firing speed error 1 is an error in which the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 is faster than a predetermined speed. Next, at S87, the control for notifying the firing speed error 1 is performed, and then the process proceeds to S91. In the notification of the firing speed error 1, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for reporting the firing speed error 1 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display generates a transport error in the display 54. Control to display. Alternatively, the fact that the firing speed error 1 has occurred may be notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the hall management computer 1 may notify that.

  If NO in S79, the process proceeds to S80, in which it is determined whether the firing motor origin sensor off time has exceeded a predetermined low speed limit time. If it does not exceed, the measurement value of the firing motor origin sensor off time is reset by S85 and this firing error processing ends, but if it exceeds the low speed limit time, the control proceeds to S88 and the firing speed error 2 flag is set. The firing speed error 2 is an error in which the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 is too slow than a predetermined speed.

  Next, in step S89, control is performed to notify the firing speed error 2, and then the process proceeds to step S93. Specifically, the control for notifying the firing speed error 2 transmits a command for notifying the firing speed error 2 from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display which has received it. Controls the display 54 to display that the firing speed error 2 has occurred. Alternatively, the fact that the firing speed error 2 has occurred may be notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the hall management computer 1 may notify that effect.

  If it is determined at S76 that the firing motor origin sensor 37 is not in the on state, the control proceeds to S81, and control is performed to update the measured value of the off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37. Next, at S82, it is judged whether or not the on time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is being measured. If it is not during measurement, the process proceeds to S90. If it is during measurement, the process proceeds to S83. A determination is made as to whether the on time of the sensor is less than a predetermined high speed limit time. If not, it is determined in S84 whether the on time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than a predetermined low speed limit time. If it is not long, the process proceeds to S84a, the firing motor origin sensor on time measurement value is reset, and the firing motor origin sensor off time measurement value is reset at S85, and the control of the firing error processing ends. On the other hand, if the result of S84 is YES, the control proceeds to S88 described above.

  Next, when the determination of NO is made in S82, it is determined in S90 whether or not the off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than the predetermined off upper limit time. If it is not long, the control of the firing error processing is ended, but if it is long, the control proceeds to S91 and the firing motor origin detection error flag is set. The firing motor origin detection error is an error in which the firing motor origin sensor 37 does not detect the rotation of the firing motor 18 despite the fact that the firing motor 18 is being driven. In such a case, after the control for notifying the firing motor origin detection error is performed in S92, the control proceeds to S93. More specifically, the notification control of the firing motor origin detection error transmits a command for firing motor origin detection error notification from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for a display, and receives that a presentation control substrate for a display 53 performs control to display on the display unit 54 that a firing motor origin detection error has occurred. Alternatively, the hall management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that a firing motor origin detection error has occurred, and the hall management computer 1 may notify that.

  The step of S71A shown by the broken line in FIG. 111 shows a modification, and instead of the step during card insertion of S71, the determination step of point (number of game balls) = 0 of this S71A may be executed. In this determination of S = 0 in S71A, the payout control unit 17 of P units determines whether the total number of game balls is 0 or not, and the payout control unit 17 described based on FIG. 47 described above. It is a judgment function of 0 ball detection of. If YES is determined in S71A, the control proceeds to S72, and if NO is determined, the control proceeds to S75.

  As the above-mentioned firing motor origin detection error, instead of or in addition to the case where the firing motor origin sensor can not be detected although the firing motor is driven and controlled for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 2 seconds) If the firing motor origin sensor is in the on state (the state where the detection of the origin is continued) even though the firing motor is driven and controlled for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 2 seconds), an error is determined It is also good.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing control of the game end detection error 1 process executed by the payout control unit 17. This error is an error in which the payout control unit 17 detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on in a state where the wait for customer status has exceeded 60 seconds or no card is inserted. First, in S101, it is determined whether or not 60 seconds or more has passed since the customer waiting state. This determination is made, for example, based on whether or not the period in which the user does not hit the ball after the last fluctuation of the variable display device has stopped is 60 seconds or more. If it has not elapsed, it is determined in S102 whether or not the card is being inserted. When the card is being inserted, the control of the game end detection error 1 process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that 60 seconds or more have passed while waiting for a customer, or if it is determined that the card is not being inserted, control proceeds to S103 and it is determined whether or not the fired ball detection switch 903 is on. When it is determined that the game is not in the on state, the control of the game end detection error 1 process is ended, but when it is determined that the on state, the game end detection error 1 flag is set in S104. Be done. The determination in S103 is determined as YES when the launch ball detection switch 903 is on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) continuously. The detection switch used to determine the game end detection error 1 is not limited to the launch ball detection switch 903 but may be another switch.

  Next, in S105, control to notify the game end detection error 1 is performed. Specifically, the game termination detection error 1 notification command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving the command is displayed on the display 54 with the game termination detection error 1 Control to display. The game completion detection error 1 is an error in which the number of the enclosed balls exceeds the prescribed number (50) and is in an excess state.

  Next, at S106, control to limit the game ball circulation function is performed, and at S107, control to limit the game ball count function is performed. The control of S106 and S107 is the same as the control of S93 and S94 of FIG. 111 described above.

  FIGS. 113 to 118 are diagrams showing various errors and incorrect states determined by the payout control unit 17. As shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 117, there are a power supply system, an unauthorized gaming system, a communication system, an operation system, and an operation system as a system showing an error occurrence part. Further, as shown in FIG. 118, as a system indicating the occurrence of the fraud, there are a ball lending / dispensing system, a winning system, and a control system.

  In addition, an error display (error number common to devices) for displaying the type of error that has occurred, an error item, an error notification location notifying an error, a cause of an error, a function limited during an error, and a payout control unit The items of the error cancellation and error recovery method / operation after error detection are shown.

  First, four errors will be described as errors occurring in the power supply system with reference to FIG. The error in the error display (inter-device common error number) in E-0001 (0x01) is the power off of the card unit 3 as an error item, and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as an error notification location. The cause is that the device request command (device information request shown in FIG. 29) is not received from the card unit 3 even after 5 seconds from the power-on of the payout control unit 17, and the function restricted during an error As a communication function with an external device, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. Further, it is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17 and, as an error recovery method / operation after error detection, to put the communication cable between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 into a normal state, And, it is to check the power supply wiring of the card unit 3 and to turn on the power.

  The error in the error display (inter-device common error number) is E-0002 as an error item, the power of the delivery control unit 17 is turned off, and the indicator 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as an error notification location. In the case where the start instruction command from the payout control unit 17 is not received even after 3 seconds from the power-on of the effect control substrate for a display, display of the number of gaming balls as a function limited during an error; This is all the functions except for the unit, and it is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. In addition, the error recovery method / operation after error detection includes supplying power to the pachinko machine 2, turning on the power switch on the power supply board, and correctly connecting the harness that connects the power supply board and the LSI 799. is there.

  In the case of an error of E-0003 (0x02) as an error display (error number common to devices), power failure 1 of the main control board 16 is an error item. This is a power-off when the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the LSI 799 is off. The indicator 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as an error notification location, and as a cause of an error, the connection confirmation signal input from the main control board 16 is turned on even if 3 seconds have elapsed since the power on of the payout control unit 17. It is not the case. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. The game ball counting function is the addition / subtraction function of the number of balls shown in FIG. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. As the error recovery method / the operation after the error detection, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 2, the power switch on the power supply board is turned on, and Correctly connect the harness between the power supply board and the main control board 16.

  When the error display (inter-device common error number) is an error of E-0004 (0x03), the power failure 2 of the main control board 16 is an error item. The power-off 2 is a case where there is no response from the main control board 16 at the start-up when the power is turned on. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the response command has not been returned even if one second has passed after the delivery control unit 17 transmits the device information request to the main control board 16. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: Supply power to the pachinko machine 2, turn on the power switch on the power supply board, and correct the harness between the power supply board and the main control board 16 It is to connect.

  Next, errors that occur in the illegal game system will be described. In the case of an error as a result of the main control section 323 of the card unit 3 authenticating the ID of the main control CPU of the main control board 16 as an error item, the error display (error number common to devices) is the card unit 3 Displayed with reference to the use of. In the case of this error, the error notification point is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side, and the cause of the error is that the ID of the main control CPU was abnormal when the CPU from the card unit 3 was authenticated. That's the case. All functions are limited as functions that are limited during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. As the error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is checked whether the main control board 16 is normal.

  Also in the case of an error determined as a result of the main control section 323 of the card unit 3 authenticating the ID of the payout control CPU (CPU of the payout control section 17) as an error item, referring to the use of the card unit 3 An error display (error number common to devices) is displayed. In the case of this error, the error notification part is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side, and as the cause of the error, the ID of the payout control CPU at the time of CPU authentication from the card unit 3 was abnormal. That's the case. The functions that are limited during an error are all functions. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. As the error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is checked whether the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 is normal.

  In the case of an error in which E-1001 is displayed as an error display (error number common to devices), the error item is a base abnormality. In the case of this error, it is the indicator 54 side of the pachinko 2 side as an error notification part, and as the cause of the occurrence of the error, the number of game balls is displayed when the glass door 6 or the frame main body (front frame 5) is not open. It is a case where a prize ball payout of a game ball exceeding the base value designated by the unit (rendering part 50) is detected by the display effect control board 53. In the case of this error, there is no limitation during the error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to check whether an illegal game is not being performed, and the error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have elapsed from the occurrence.

  In the case of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-1002 (0x81), the error item is an incorrect winning error. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the main control board 16 detects a game ball winning to the big winning opening in a state other than a large hit or a small hit. In the case of this error, there are no features restricted during the error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to check whether an illegal game is not being performed, and the error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have elapsed from the occurrence.

  Referring to FIG. 114, in the case of the error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-1003 (0x82), the error item is the radio wave sensor error and is displayed on the display 54 of the pachinko machine 2 side. Ru. An error is caused when the main control board 16 detects that the radio wave sensor is on. The main control board 16 is connected to a radio wave sensor for detecting unauthorized radio waves, and a radio wave sensor error is determined by inputting a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor to the main control board 16. In the case of this error, there are no features restricted during the error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. The error recovery method / the operation after the error detection is to confirm whether the illegal game is not being performed. The error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have passed since it occurred.

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-1004 (0x83) is that the error item is a magnet sensor error. The magnet sensor error is an error when an illegal action occurs such as the player bringing a magnet close to the game area 27 and guiding a pachinko ball to a winning opening in the game area 27. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. An error is caused when the main control board 16 detects that the magnet sensor is on. A magnet sensor is connected to the main control board 16, and when the magnet sensor detects magnetism and the detection signal is input to the main control board 16, it is determined that a magnetic sensor error has occurred. . There are no features restricted during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. As the error recovery method / the operation after the error detection, it is confirmed whether the illegal game is not performed. The error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have passed since it occurred.

  Next, errors in the communication system will be described. In the case of the error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-2001 (0x04), the error item is an error in the communication line disconnection of the card unit 3. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As a cause of the occurrence of an error, if the next request command is not received even after 4 seconds after the payment control unit 17 transmits a response to the card unit 3, or if the payment control unit 17 is requested by the card unit 3. When the communication line is disconnected. The functions restricted during an error are an external device communication function, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication automatically, make the communication cable between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 normal, card unit 3 The power of pachinko machine 2 is to be switched off and on again.

  If the received command from the card unit 3 is an error of an error item of abnormal (CRC abnormal), no error display is performed. The error is caused when the CRC portion of the command received from the card unit 3 and the CRC calculation result in the payout control unit 17 do not match. The CRC is a parity check as described above with reference to FIG. 24 and the like, and that the CRC is abnormal means that the result of the parity check is NG, that is, the abnormality. There are no features restricted during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to discard the command received from the card unit 3 and not to send a response command, and to wait for a command transmission retry from the card unit 3.

  In the case of an error of an error item of the reception command abnormality (data length abnormality) of the card unit 3, no error display is performed. As a cause of occurrence of this error, the length of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate. There are no features restricted during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to discard the received command and not to send a response command, and to wait for a retry of command transmission from the card unit 3.

  In the case of an error of an error item of the reception command abnormality (data content abnormality) from the card unit 3, no error display is performed. The cause of the occurrence of the error is a case where part or all of the contents of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 are not appropriate. There are no features restricted during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to discard the received command and not to send a response command, and to wait for a retry of command transmission from the card unit 3.

  If there is an error in the error item of the card unit reception command error (cryptographic error), no error is displayed. The cause of the occurrence of this error is the case where the encryption unit of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate. There are no features restricted during an error. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to discard the received command and not to send a response command, and to wait for a retry of command transmission from the card unit 3.

  The error of E-2101 (0x05) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is communication line disconnection 1 of the main control board 16. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. An error is caused when the connection confirmation signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is turned off (except in the case of E-0003). The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection is to put the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 into a normal state, and to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again. .

  The error of E-2102 (0x06) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is communication line disconnection 2 of the main control board 16. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the response command has not been returned even after one second after the delivery control unit 17 transmits other than the device information request to the main control board 16. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication, put the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 into a normal state, pachinko machine Turn off the power of 2 and turn it on again.

  Referring to FIG. 115, the error of E-2103 (0x07) error display (inter-device common error number) is an error of the reception command abnormality (sum value abnormality) of the main control board 16 as an error item. This error is the indicator 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as a notification location, and the CRC operation result of the command received from the main control board 16 and the CRC calculation result in the payout control unit 17 are three consecutive times as the cause of the error occurrence. And if you disagreed. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication, put the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 into a normal state, pachinko machine Turn off the power of 2 and turn it on again.

  The error of E-2104 (0x08) error display (error number common to devices) is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (data length abnormality) of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the length of the command transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate three consecutive times. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication, put the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 into a normal state, pachinko machine Turn off the power of 2 and turn it on again.

  The error of E-2105 (0x09) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (data content abnormality) of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is a case where part or all of the content of the command transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate three consecutive times. The functions to be limited during an error are an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: Initialize the communication state and restart communication. Make the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 normal. What to do is to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-2 201 is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (sum value abnormality) of the effect control substrate 53 for counter display. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the CRC part of the command received from the payout control part 17 and the CRC calculation result in the display effect control board 53 disagree three times in a row. The function limited during an error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication. The communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 is normal. To put it in the state is to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-2 202 is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (data length abnormality) of the counter display effect control board 53. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the length of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53 is not appropriate three consecutive times. The function limited during an error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication. The communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 is normal. To put it in the state is to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-2203 is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (data content abnormality) of the counter control device 53 for display control. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where part or all of the content of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53 is not appropriate three consecutive times. The function limited during an error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: initialize the communication state and restart communication. Make the communication cable between the LSI 799 including the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 normal. What to do is to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again.

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-2204 is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (sequence abnormality) of the counter control device 53 for control of presentation control. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is when the sequence number missing of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53 occurs. The function limited during an error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to clear the error in the payout control unit. Error recovery method / Operation after error detection: Initialize the communication state and restart communication. Normal state of the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit and the effect control board for display unit 53. It is to turn the pachinko machine 2 off and on again.

  Next, errors in the operation system will be described. The error in the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-3001 (0x0A) is that the error item is a door open error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is when the payout control unit 17 detects the opening of the glass door 6 and / or the opening of the frame (the front frame 5). The functions limited during the error are a game ball launch function and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. The error recovery method / action after error detection is to close the glass door 6 and / or the frame (front frame 5).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the error of E-4001 (0x0B) error display (inter-device common error number) will be used to explain an error of the operation system, the error item being a firing motor operation error. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side, and a command for notifying the firing motor operation error is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board 53 for display, and the effect control board for display that has received it 53 controls the display 54 to display E-4001. An error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects a level change of the firing motor origin sensor 37 in the card uninserted state. The functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the dispensing control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after the error detection is to inspect, repair, and replace the firing mechanism (the launching unit 38).

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4002 (0x0C) is that the error item is a firing motor origin detection error. The error notification part is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying the firing motor origin detection error to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving the command displays E-4002 on the display 54. Control to The error is caused when the discharge control unit 17 can not detect that the discharge motor origin sensor 37 is on even if two seconds have elapsed while the discharge motor 18 is being driven. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a firing ball circulating function and a game ball counting function. It is possible to clear the error in the delivery control unit, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect, repair or replace the launch mechanism (the launch unit 38).

  The error display (inter-device common error number) error of E-4003 (0x0D) is that the error item is the firing speed error 1 (the firing speed is fast). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying the firing speed error 1 to the effect control substrate for display 53, and the effect control substrate for display 53 receiving the command causes the display 54 to display E-4003. Take control. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the discharge control unit 17 detects that the on time or off time of the fire motor origin sensor 37 is shorter than the specified time while the fire motor 18 is being driven. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the dispensing control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after the error detection is to inspect, repair or replace the firing mechanism (the launching unit 38).

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4004 (0x0E) is that the error item is the firing speed error 2 (the firing speed is slow). The error notification point is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying the firing speed error 2 to the effect control substrate 53 for a display, and the effect control substrate 53 for a display having received it causes the display 54 to display E-4004. Take control. The cause of the occurrence of the error is when the payout control unit 17 detects that the on time or off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than the specified time while the firing motor 18 is being driven. However, it excludes the case where it corresponds to the above-mentioned error display of E-4001. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the dispensing control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after the error detection is to inspect, repair or replace the firing mechanism (the launching unit 38).

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4101 (0x0F) is that the error item is a game ball shortage error 1 (before the transport motor). This is an error in which the game ball runs short on the front side of the transport motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball shortage error 1 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display which has received it displays E-4101 on the display 54. Control to The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is off for 2 seconds or more. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17, and as the error recovery method / operation after error detection, supply the game ball to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, insert the game ball into the out port 145) , Game ball circulation mechanism, eliminating jams on the board, and checking, repairing and replacing the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4102 (0x10) error display (inter-apparatus common error number) is an error item of game ball transport error 1 (before transport motor). This error is a transfer error of the game ball generated on the front side of the transfer motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball conveyance error 1 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display which has received it displays E-4102 on the display 54. Control to The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is on for 2 seconds or more during the transfer operation of the game ball. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and as the error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is necessary to eliminate clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, and to check, repair and replace the game ball circulation mechanism. It is.

  The error of E-4103 (0x11) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is a game ball shortage error 2 (after the conveyance motor). This error is an error in which a game ball shortage has occurred on the transport lower side of the transport motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball shortage error 2 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display which has received it displays E-4103 on the display 54. Control to The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects the turning-off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a for 2 seconds or more other than during the conveyance operation of the game ball. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17, and as the error recovery method / operation after error detection, supply the game ball to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, insert the game ball into the out port 145) , To eliminate the clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, to check, repair and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4104 (0x12) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is game ball transport error 2 (after transport motor). This error is a transfer error of the game ball generated on the transfer lower side of the transfer motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball conveyance error 2 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display which has received it displays the E-4104 on the display 54. Control to The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is on for 2 seconds or more during the transfer operation of the game ball. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and as the error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is necessary to eliminate clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, and to check, repair and replace the game ball circulation mechanism. It is.

  An error item of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4105 (0x13) is the game ball transport error 3 as an error item. The error notification part is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball transport error 3 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving it displays E-4105 on the display 54. Control to As a cause of the occurrence of an error, in the case other than the occurrence of the game ball conveyance error 3, when the payout control unit 17 can not detect turning on of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a for 6 seconds or more during the conveyance operation of the game ball During the game ball transport operation, the payout control unit 17 can not detect that the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned on for 2 seconds while the game ball transport error 3 occurs. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error by the payout control unit 17, and as the error recovery method / operation after error detection, supplying the game ball to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, inserting the game ball into the out port 145) , To eliminate the clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, to check, repair and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4201 (0x14) is an error item having an excessive number of game balls. This error is an error in which the total number of enclosed balls sealed in the gaming machine 2 is too large. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the game ball excess error to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving it displays E-4201 on the display 54. Control to The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on for 2 seconds or more after 60 seconds have passed while waiting for a customer. There is no function limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to perform several ball removal and to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism. .

  The continuation of the error of the operation system will be described with reference to FIG. The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4202 (0x15) is an error item being the game end detection error 1 (abnormality detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying a game end notification error to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display receiving the command causes the display 54 to display E-4202. Take control. The error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on in a state where the wait for a customer has elapsed for 60 seconds or the card is not inserted. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4203 (0x16) is that the error item is the game end detection error 2 (ball clogging). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is on for 0.5 seconds or more. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4301 (0x17) error display (inter-device common error number) is that the error item is a game ball number under error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. An error is caused when the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the game ball shortage detection switch 904 has been turned on for 2 seconds or more after 60 seconds have passed while waiting for a customer. There is no function limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error. It is possible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17, and as the operation after the error recovery method / error detection, supply the game ball to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, insert the game ball into the out port 145) ), Check, repair and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4401 (0x18) error display (inter-device common error number) is an error item being a game board jam error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects that the difference between the number of times the ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is turned on and the number of times the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on becomes 30 or more. The difference between the number of balls detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the number of balls detected by the fired ball detection switch 903 is that the pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 are not yet recovered. It is the number of floating balls floating in the inside, and it is generally impossible for the number of floating balls to be 30 or more, and the fact that it is 30 or more is driven into the game area 27 It is assumed that the game ball is stuck on the game board surface and is stuck. The function limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error is only the launch function of the game ball circulation function. The error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to open the glass frame 6 and eliminate the clogging of the game balls on the board.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4501 (0x19) is a foul ball detection error 1 (error detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. An error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects that the foul ball detection switch 33 is turned on in a state where the wait for a customer has elapsed for 60 seconds or the card is not inserted. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to check, repair or replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4502 (0x1A) is that the error item is a foul ball detection error 2 (ball clogging). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects the turning on of the foul ball detection switch 33 for 0.5 seconds or more. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4601 (0x1B) is an out-of-ball detection error 1 (error detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects that the out ball detection switch 701 is on in a state where the wait for a customer has elapsed for 60 seconds or the card is not inserted. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  An error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4602 (0x1C) is out-of-ball detection error 2 (ball clogging). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the out ball detection switch 701 is on for 0.5 seconds or more. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is checking, repairing, and replacing the gaming ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4701 (0x1D) error display (inter-device common error number) is a ball removal switch error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the discharge control unit 17 detects that the ball removal switch 922 is continuously on for 1 second after the power is turned on. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of the error display (inter-device common error number) of E-4702 (0x1E) is that the error item is a deburring motor origin sensor error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the occurrence of the error is the case where the discharge control unit 17 detects that the ball removing motor origin sensor 195 b is turned on except during the ball removing operation. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4703 (0x1F) error display (error number common to devices) is that the error item is a dropout error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the payout control unit 17 detects that the signal level of the deburring motor origin sensor 195b does not change even if one second elapses while the deburring motor 195a is being driven. The functions limited by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. It is possible to clear the error in the payout control unit 17, and the error recovery method / operation after error detection is to inspect / repair / replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, various illegal game contents when the illegal game is performed will be described. First, the illegal game of the ball lending and payout system will be described. The interface Goto's fraudulent game as an item is that the content of the fraudulent game is data tampering between the device, CPU spoofing and interface. It is a card unit 3 as a detection part of an unauthorized game. The notification location of the unauthorized game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side. As measures against illegal gaming, identity verification between devices and encryption of data between interfaces are to prevent impersonation and falsification of data.

  The fraudulent game of item Sergot is to insert a thin board made of celluloid or the like into the game board as the content of the fraudulent game, and open / close the entrance of the winning opening, changing the trajectory of the game ball. The detection locations of the illegal game are the card unit 3, the main control board 16, and the effect control board 53 for a display. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As measures against the illegal game, it is necessary to detect the number of winnings per unit time and monitor base abnormality, and to monitor the illegal winnings for the electric part.

  Next, a prize-based illegal game will be described. In the case of the illegal game of magnet Goto as an item, it is to change the track of the game ball using the magnet as the content of the illegal game, and to increase the winning rate to the winning opening and the like. The detection position of the unauthorized game is the main control board 16. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As a measure against the illegal game, it is to monitor the magnetism by the magnet sensor.

  When the item is an illegal game of radio wave goto, the radio wave transmission device is used to cause software or a proximity sensor to malfunction as the content of the illegal game. The detection position of the unauthorized game is the main control board 16. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As measures against illegal games, it is necessary to monitor transmission of radio waves by a radio wave sensor and to monitor the difference between the number of winning and the number of discharges.

  In the case of an illegal game with the item of glass door open / frame open, the glass door 6 or the frame (front frame 5) is opened using a tool such as a key or a bar obtained illegally as the content of the illegal game. It is to make a game ball win / replace a control board. The detection locations of the unfair game are the card unit 3, the main control board 16, and the payout control unit 17. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As measures against illegal games, the prize balls are not paid out even if the winning of the game balls is detected while the glass door / frame is open, and the board replacement is the same as the item of interface Goto.

  In the case of an illegal game having an illegal ball goto as an item, a game ball smaller than a regular ball is used as the content of the illegal game to increase a winning rate to a winning opening or the like. The detected portion of the unfair game is not applicable (not detected) and is undetectable fraud. Therefore, it is also impossible to notify an unfair game, and measures against the unfair game are also impossible.

  Next, an illegal game of the control system will be described. In the case of an illegal game with back ROM exchange as an item, as the contents of the illegal game, attach a non-regular board or CPU to the gaming machine, play a game in a specific procedure and make a big hit, or the number of prize balls It is to falsify. The detection point of the illegal game is the card unit 3. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side. As a measure against unfair gaming, it is to prevent impersonation by ID authentication between devices.

  In the case of an illegal game having an item of an intermediate machine, as the content of the illegal game, a special device is used to synchronize the firing timing of the game ball with the internal lottery timing of the gaming machine and make a big hit. There is nothing that corresponds to the detected part of the illegal game and the notified part of the illegal game. As a countermeasure against the unfair game, the random number acting on the payout rate is to change the initial value and to make the update of the random value indefinite.

  In the case of an unauthorized game where hanging is an item, the content of the unauthorized game is to attach a substrate or the like for operating the timing of a signal or the like to the substrate / harness. The detection places of the illegal game are the card unit 3 and the effect control board 53 for display. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As measures against illegal games, it is necessary to detect the number of winnings per unit time and to monitor base abnormalities.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124, a detailed example of communication commands between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 will be described. In FIG. 119 to FIG. 124, (A) authentication response (disbursement control unit → card unit), (B) recovery request (disbursement control unit → card unit), (C) recovery response (disbursement control unit → card) The commands related to the operation instruction (card unit → payout control unit) of the unit) (D) and the operation response (card unit → payout control unit) of (E) are shown.

  In (A) to (E) shown in FIGS. 119 to 124, information such as a provider of information on a command to be transmitted, a sender, and a receiver on various commands is associated in a tabular form. The command communicated between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 includes SOF (Start of Frame) data indicating the start of the communication frame and EOF (End of Frame) data indicating the end of the communication frame. In the meantime, basically, it is frame data having a frame configuration in which data length, transmission data (business telegram), and data of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) are arranged in this order. In the command, the data length of the transmission data is specified by the data length. Further, as the CRC, the CRC-ITU-T method is used with the task message as the calculation target range.

  The command of the authentication response shown in FIG. 119 (A) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3, and notifies that the authentication request from the card unit 3 has been received. The authentication response command includes, as transmission data, a command code, a random number A, a random number B, and a MAC. The command code is code information provided in association with each command in order to specify the command type.

  The recovery request command shown in FIG. 119 (B) is a command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, and requests the gaming machine to transmit recovery information. The command for recovery request includes, as transmission data, a command code, a spare, and a MAC.

  The recovery response command of (C) in FIGS. 119 and 120 is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3, and transmits recovery information to the card unit 3. The command of recovery response includes, as transmission data, a command code, connection time, last sequence number, last ball related information, current ball related information, spare, and MAC. The connection time is the connection time backed up by the gaming machine, and the final sequence number is the final sequence number backed up by the gaming machine.

  In the previous ball related information of the recovery response, the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball launch number information, the out ball passage information, the number of determined symbols 1, the number of determined symbols 2, the number of starting opening 1 notified last time There are two starting openings, three starting openings, one large winning opening, two large winning openings, one winning opening, two winning openings, three winning openings, and four winning openings. In this example, there is shown a case where the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are divided into bytes of 1 byte and transmitted.

  In the current ball related information of the recovery response, the game ball total number information, the game ball obtained number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball fired number information, the out ball passage information, the number of determined symbols, currently held in the gaming machine 1, symbol determination number 2, starting opening 1 number, starting opening 2 times, starting opening 3 times, large winning opening 1 number, large winning opening 2 times, winning opening 1 number, winning opening 2 times, winning opening 3 times, and , 4 winning openings have been included.

  Among the data sent to the card unit 3 in the recovery response, the game ball acquisition number information, symbol decision frequency 1, symbol decision frequency 2, starting opening 1 times, starting opening 2 times, starting opening 3 times, winning opening 1 times The main control board 16 is an information providing source for the special winning opening 2 times, the winning opening 1 time, the winning opening 2 times, the winning opening 3 times, and the winning opening 4 times.

  The main control board 16 transmits a response of the table state inquiry response to the payout control unit 17 in response to the command of the table state inquiry request from the payout control unit 17. In the main control board 16, the integrated value of the number of prize balls (number of prize balls), the number of symbol determination times 1, the number of symbol determination times 2, the number of gaming balls won to the starting opening 1 during command transmission of platform status inquiry response Number of starting openings 1 winning number), number of gaming balls that got a starting opening 2 (number of starting opening 2 winnings), number of playing balls that got a start opening 3 (number of starting openings 3 winnings), winning a large winning opening 1 The number of gaming balls (big winning opening 1 winning number), the number of gaming balls winning to 2 large winning opening 2 times (big winning opening 2 winning number), the number of gaming balls winning to winning opening 1 (winning opening 1 winning number) ), The number of gaming balls that have won in the winning opening 2 (winning opening 2 winning number), the number of gaming balls that have won in the winning opening 3 (winning opening 3 winning number), and the number of gaming balls that have won in the winning opening 4 A process is performed to calculate the total value of (the winning opening 4 winning number).

  Then, each data accumulated in this way between command transmissions is provided to the payout control unit 17 as data of the table status inquiry response. In the payout control unit 17, based on each data provided from the main control board 16 as described above, the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball launch number information, the out ball passage information, the symbol as described above. Number of determinations 1, Number of symbol determinations 2, Number of openings 1 number, Number of openings 2 times, Number of openings 3 times, Number of large openings 1 number, Number of large openings 2 times, Number of openings 1 number, Number of openings 2 times, Number of openings 3 times And, data of 4 times of winning opening can be obtained, and these data are transmitted as data of recovery response.

  The command of the operation instruction of (D) in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 is a command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, and instructs the gaming machine to play the game and Request transmission of gaming machine information. In the command of operation instruction, as transmission data, command code, sequence number, operation request, CU status, number of requested addition balls, number of required subtraction balls, card balance, operation mode switching preparation specification, operation mode switching specification, gaming ball total The number information, maintenance content or test content, and MAC are included.

  For the operation request, as described above, “1 game ball count addition request”, “game ball count subtraction request”, “game permission request”, “game prohibition request”, “game ball count” by 1 byte of Bit 0 to Bit 7 And a request for clearing the sequence number, a request for opening the glass door, and a request for opening the cell (bit 7 is reserved).

  As for the CU state, in this example, with 2 bytes of Bit0 to Bit15, "card insertion processing", "cash insertion processing", "general card holding", "member card holding", "test card holding" "Prepaid lending display", "Replay lending display", "Mid ball split display", "Wagon service display", "Clear display", and "Breaking" (Bit 7 to 5, Bit 15 ~ 14 is indicated as "preliminary".

  The addition request ball number indicating the value to be added to the game ball number is effective when the operation request Bit 0 is “1” as described above. As described above, the number of subtraction request balls indicating a value to be subtracted from the number of game balls is valid when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1”.

  The card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3 is designated by two bytes.

  With respect to the operation mode switching preparation designation, the switching preparation designation of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by one bit of Bit0 to Bit7.

  The operation mode includes the "operation mode" in the operation state, the "test card insertion mode" in the test card insertion state, the "maintenance mode" in which daily cleaning, consumables replacement, and equipment failure / repair are performed, and nails There are multiple modes of "Testing mode" to check the result of adjustment and base adjustment, and check the operation at the time of installation, and "Test mode" used for analysis of operation at the time of production and return of the game machine. . The operation mode is switched when a predetermined switching condition as described later is satisfied.

  As the operation mode switching preparation specification, it is the operation mode preparation specification when Bit 0 is "1", the test card insertion mode preparation specification when Bit 1 is "1", and the maintenance mode preparation specification when Bit 2 is "1". When Bit 3 is "1", it is a trial hitting mode preparation designation, and when Bit 4 is "1", it is a test mode preparation designation (Bits 7 to 5 are spares).

  As for the operation mode switching specification, the switching specification of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by one bit of Bit0 to Bit7.

  The operation mode switching specification is the operation mode switching specification when Bit 0 is "1", the test card insertion mode switching specification when Bit 1 is "1", and the maintenance mode switching specification when Bit 2 is "1". When Bit 3 is “1”, it is a trial hitting mode switching specification, and when Bit 4 is “1”, it is a test mode switching specification (Bits 7 to 5 are spares).

  The game ball total number information is 3-byte data indicating the number of game balls held in the gaming machine when transitioning to an operation mode other than the operation mode, and transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when transitioning to the operation mode Be done.

  With regard to maintenance content or test content, when Bit 2 “1” is set in the operation mode switching specification and maintenance mode switching specification is performed, maintenance contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bit 0 to 7 (Bit 7 to 4) Is a reserve). On the other hand, when the test mode switching designation is made as Bit 4 “1” in the operation mode switching designation, the test contents 1 to 4 are designated by one byte of Bits 0 to 7 (Bits 7 to 4 are spares).

  The operation response of (E) in FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 is a response transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3, and the result of the execution of the game operation instruction and the number of game balls etc. Informing of vehicle information. For the operation response, as transmission data, command code, sequence number, execution result, total game ball number information, total game ball number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing Information, ball related information, gaming machine information, operation mode switching preparation result, operation mode switching result, and MAC are included.

  As for the sequence number, a value obtained by incrementing the received sequence number by one according to the operation instruction is indicated by one byte.

  As to the execution result, as described above, “1 game bit addition permission”, “game ball number subtraction permission”, “game permission permission”, “game prohibition permission”, “game number permission” by 1 byte of Bit 0 to Bit 7 And, the clear permission of the sequence number, the "Glass door open permission", and the "cell open permission" (Bit 7 is "reserve") are indicated.

  The ball related information of the operation response is information indicating the current number of balls, and as described above, the game ball total number information, the game ball obtained number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball currently held in the gaming machine Launched number information, out ball passing information, symbol fixed number of times 1, symbol fixed number of times 2, starting opening 1 times, starting opening 2 times, starting opening 3 times, winning opening 1 times, winning opening 2 times, winning opening 1 times , 2 winning openings, 3 winning openings, and 4 winning openings.

  In the payout control unit 17, as described above, based on each data provided from the main control board 16, the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball launch number information, the out ball passage information, as described above. Number of symbol determination 1, number of symbol determination 2, number of starting openings 1 number, number of starting openings 2 times, number of starting openings 3 times, number of large winning openings 1 number, number of large winning openings 2 times, number of winning openings 1 number, number of winning openings 2 It is possible to obtain data of the number of times and 4 times of winning opening, and these data are transmitted as an operation response.

  The game machine information of the operation response is information indicating the current state of the game machine, and includes the game machine state 1, the game machine state 2, the game machine error state 1 and the game machine error state 2 as described above. ing.

  In the payout control unit 17, as described above, the game state 1, the game state 2, the game state 2, the game error state 1, and the game error state 2 provided from the main control board 16, It is possible to obtain data on gaming machine state 2, gaming machine error state 1 and gaming machine error state 2 and transmit these data as an operation response.

  For gaming machine state 1, one byte of Bit0 to Bit17, "playing allowed or prohibited state", "waiting or playing", "number of playing balls 0", "play complete", and "playing pad" "Reset" (Bit 7 to 5 is "reserve") is instructed.

  About game state 2 by 1 byte of Bit0-Bit17, "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit display", "high base" “High probability” and “waiting for customer” are indicated.

  About error status 1 of the game console, “1 main frame open”, “open glass door”, “magnetic sensor error occurring”, “radio wave sensor error occurring” and “illegal” by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit17 It is indicated that a winning error is occurring "(Bit 7 to 5 is" reserve ").

  For game console error state 2, in this example, “one device common error number” (Bit 0 to 6) is indicated by one byte of Bit 0 to Bit 17 and an error (Bit 7: 1) on the main control board or a payout control unit An error (Bit7: 0) at is indicated.

  With regard to the operation mode switching preparation result, the switching preparation result of the operation mode of the gaming machine is indicated by one bit of Bit0 to Bit7. As the operation mode switching preparation result, when Bit 0 is “1”, operation mode transition permission is denied, when Bit 1 is “1”, test card insertion mode transition permission is denied, when Bit 2 is “1” maintenance mode transition permission or not, Bit 3 is “1”. In the case of “1”, it is a test striking mode transition permission, and when Bit 4 is “1”, a test mode transition permission or denial is made (Bits 7 to 5 are spares).

  As for the operation mode switching result, the switching result of the operation mode of the gaming machine is indicated by one byte of Bit0 to Bit7. As the operation mode switching result, transition to the operation mode when Bit 0 is "1", transition to the test card insertion mode when Bit 1 is "1", maintenance mode cut when Bit 2 is "1", and Bit 3 when "1". When the Bit 4 is “1”, the test mode is transitioned (Bits 7 to 5 are spares).

  Next, a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 125 to 127, (A) start instruction (disbursement control unit → effect control board for display), (B) gaming machine information notification (disbursement control board → effect control board for display), and (C) The command regarding the card insertion request (disbursement control board → effect control board for display) is shown.

  In (A) to (C) shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, information such as a provider of information on a command to be transmitted, a sender, and a receiver on various commands is associated in a tabular form. The command communicated between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 is basically data of transmission data (business telegram) and sum (SUM) value (error detection data of communication frame) Is frame data consisting of a frame structure arranged in this order. In the command, the sum value is calculated by the addition result of all data other than the sum value.

  The command of the start instruction in FIG. 125A is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and notifies the effect control substrate 53 for display that the power is turned on. The command of start instruction includes a command code as transmission data.

  The gaming machine information notification of (B) in FIG. 125 to FIG. 127 is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and notifies gaming effect information to the effect control substrate 53 for display . In the gaming machine information notification, as transmission data, command code, total game ball number information, number of game ball obtained number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passage information, symbol confirmation Number of times 1, Design fixed number 2, Number of opening 1 number, Number of opening 2 number, Number of opening 3 number, Number of large opening number 1, Number of large number opening 2, Number of number 1 opening, Number 2 number of opening, Number 3 number of opening, 4 times winning opening, gaming machine status 1, gaming machine status 2, gaming machine error status 1, gaming machine error status 2, CU status, card balance, operation mode switching preparation designation, operation mode switching designation, gaming ball total number information, And, maintenance content or test content is included.

  Game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passage information, symbol fixed frequency 1, symbol fixed frequency 2, starting opening 1 frequency, starting Figure 123 (E) for the 2nd opening, 3rd opening, 1st opening, 2nd opening, 1st opening, 2nd opening, 2nd opening, 3rd opening and 4th opening It is data of the same content as each of the data described in the operation response of. The payout control unit 17 can obtain these data based on each data provided from the main control board 16 or the like, and transmits these data as data of the gaming machine information notification.

  The gaming machine state 1 is data of the same content as the gaming machine state 1 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and can be obtained from the data of the gaming machine state 1 provided from the main control board 16 . The game machine state 2 is data of the same content as the game machine state 2 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and can be obtained from the data of the game machine state 2 provided from the main control board 16 .

  As for the gaming machine error state 1, one byte of Bit 0 to Bit 17 is used to indicate that “Magnetic sensor error is occurring”, “radio wave sensor error is occurring”, and “unfair prize error occurring is complete” (Bit 1 to 0 to 7 to 5 "Preliminary" is indicated. The payout control unit 17 can obtain data of the gaming machine error state 1 based on the gaming machine error state 1 provided from the main control board 16. The gaming machine error state 2 is data of the same content as the gaming machine error state 2 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and is obtained from the data of the gaming machine error state 2 provided from the main control board 16 be able to.

  The CU state is data of the same content as the CU state described in the operation instruction of FIG. 121 (D), and can be obtained from the data of the CU state provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  The card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3 is designated by two bytes.

  The CU state is data similar to the CU state described in the operation instruction of FIG. 121 (D), and can be obtained from the data of the CU state provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  The operation mode switching preparation designation is data of the same content as the operation mode switching preparation designation described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and as described above, the operation mode switching preparation designation provided from the card unit 3 It can be obtained from the data of

  The operation mode switching specification is data of the same content as the operation mode switching specification described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and as described above, from the data of the operation mode switching specification provided from the card unit 3 You can get it.

  The maintenance content or the test content is data of the same content as the maintenance content or the test content described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and as described above, the maintenance content or It can be obtained from test content data.

  The card insertion request in FIG. 127 (C) is data transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 table, and transmits the card ID (C-ID). The command for card insertion request includes a command code and a card ID as transmission data.

  The card ID is data similar to the operation mode switching designation described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and can be obtained from the data of the card ID provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  Next, each operation mode will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the transition (transition) relationship of the operation mode in the form of a table.

  As described above, as the operation mode, there are a plurality of operation modes (mode 1), test card insertion mode (mode 2), maintenance mode (mode 3), trial hitting mode (mode 4), and test mode (mode 5). Mode is provided.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation in the operation mode, which is an operation mode in which a normal game can be performed, is started. In the operation mode, a function related to a general gaming machine such as a gaming function and a gaming history data collecting function are activated, and it is possible to perform normal gaming. The operation mode does not transition to another operation mode when the general card (visitor card) and the membership card are inserted into the card unit 3, and transitions to the test card insertion mode when the test card is inserted into the card unit 3. Do. When a test card is inserted, information such as the number of game balls is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3.

  The test card insertion mode (mode 2) is an operation mode in which transition to another operation mode can be made, for example, in accordance with an operation on the card unit 3.

  In the test card insertion mode, the mode setting operation unit including the operation button icon for performing the operation of selecting and setting the maintenance mode, the test hitting mode, or the test mode is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 .

  In the test card insertion mode, when the operation for selecting the maintenance mode is performed by the mode setting operation unit of the display unit 312, the operation mode transitions to the maintenance mode. In addition, in the test card insertion mode, when an operation of selecting a test hitting mode by the mode setting operation unit of the display unit 312 is performed, the operation mode changes to the test hitting mode. In addition, in the test card insertion mode, when the mode setting operation unit of the display unit 312 performs an operation to select the test mode, the operation mode transitions to the test mode. In the test card insertion mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed by the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode changes to the operation mode.

  The maintenance mode (mode 3) is an operation mode for performing maintenance such as daily inspection and cleaning of the gaming machine, replacement of consumables, breakdown / repair of equipment, and setting of operating parameters. In the maintenance mode, functions relating to a general gaming machine that are activated in the operation mode and the game history data collection function are not activated.

  At the time of transition to the maintenance mode, the main control board 16 outputs the payout rate (the number of paid-out balls / the number of inserted balls) such as the probability variation function (control function for positive change state) and the change time shortening function (control function for short time state) A variable related to 100 (%) is temporarily saved in the save area provided in the RAM, and when returning to the operation mode, the saved variable is returned to the original state to restore the state of the gaming machine .

  Further, in the maintenance mode, it is possible to shift to another operation mode in accordance with the operation in the card unit 3.

  In the maintenance mode, the game machine can be operated by lending a ball from the test card. Further, backup of gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is not performed.

  In the maintenance mode, an operation button icon for selecting a maintenance mode is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 as a mode setting operation unit. In the maintenance mode, when the operation for selecting the maintenance mode is performed by the mode setting operation unit of the display unit 312, the maintenance mode is ended, and the operation mode is transited to the test card insertion mode. However, the maintenance mode does not end until all the fired game balls are discharged from the game board surface. It is confirmed based on the fact that the number of in-game balls counted as described above has become “0” as described above, that all the ejected game balls have been discharged from the game board surface.

  In the maintenance mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed by the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode changes to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations (number of symbol determinations) is cleared by the gaming machine. Further, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of gaming balls received by the card unit 3 at the time of test card insertion is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When maintenance is conducted at a gaming machine maker, an apparatus simulating the card unit 3 is used instead of the card unit 3 to analyze and repair the broken part of the gaming machine, and the operation after the analysis and repair Verification is performed by the test mode.

  In the test mode (mode 4), shipment inspection at the time of manufacture of the gaming machine at the gaming machine manufacturer, operation confirmation at the time of installation of the gaming machine in the hall, ball number display such as safe / out, and base confirmation at gauge adjustment Is an operation mode when the game machine is operated to try a game ball. In the trial game mode, the functions related to a general gaming machine, which are activated in the operation mode, and the game history data collection function are not activated.

  At the time of transition to the test hitting mode, the main control board 16 temporarily saves variables related to the ball out rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function to the save area provided in the RAM and returns to the operation mode Then, the saved variable is returned to the original state, and the state of the gaming machine is restored.

  Further, in the trial hitting mode, it is possible to shift to another operation mode in accordance with the operation in the card unit 3.

  In the trial mode, the game machine can be operated by lending a ball from the test card. Further, backup of gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is not performed.

  Further, in the test hitting mode, an operation button icon for selecting a test hitting mode is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 as a mode setting operation unit. In the test hitting mode, when the operation to select the test hitting mode is performed in the mode setting operation unit of the display unit 312, the test hitting mode ends, and the operation mode shifts to the test card insertion mode. However, the strike mode does not end until all the fired game balls are ejected from the game board surface.

  In the test hitting mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed by the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode changes to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is cleared by the gaming machine. Further, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of gaming balls received by the card unit 3 at the time of test card insertion is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When a game machine maker makes a trial hit, a device simulating the card unit 3 is used instead of the card unit 3, and a test shot in the trial mode is performed as in the case of using the card unit 3.

  The test mode (mode 5) is an operation mode for confirming the operation of the gaming machine maker at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine and the operation at the time of installation of the gaming machine in the hall. In the test mode, a function related to a general gaming machine that is activated in the operation mode and a game history data collection function are not activated.

  In the test card insertion mode, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 has an operation button icon for selecting a test mode such as "fire test", "circulation test", or "display test" as a mode setting operation unit. Is displayed. When one of the icons for selecting the test mode is selected, the operation mode transitions to the test mode.

  When transitioning to the test mode, the main control board 16 temporarily saves variables related to the ball out rate such as the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function to the save area provided in the RAM, and returns to the operation mode Then, the saved variable is returned to the original state, and the state of the gaming machine is restored.

  Further, in the test mode, it is possible to shift to another operation mode in accordance with the operation in the card unit 3.

  In the launch test in the test mode, the operation of the launch mechanism alone of the game ball is performed. In the circulation test in the test mode, the game ball circulation mechanism is operated by operating the hitting operation handle 25 by lending the ball from the test card. In the display test in the test mode, various data are displayed on the display 54.

  Further, in the test mode, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays a test end icon as an operation button icon for selecting the test end. In the test mode, when the test end icon is operated on the display 312, the test mode ends, and the operation mode transits to the test card insertion mode. However, in the circulation test, the test mode does not end until all the fired game balls are discharged from the game board surface.

  In the test mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed by the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode changes to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, gaming history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is cleared by the gaming machine. Further, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of gaming balls received by the card unit 3 at the time of test card insertion is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When a test is conducted at a gaming machine maker, an operation test in the test mode is performed as in the case of using the card unit 3, using an apparatus simulating the card unit 3 instead of the card unit 3. .

  Next, the communication sequence between the card unit 3 and the LSI (including the payout control unit) 799, the communication sequence between the LSI (including the payout control unit) 799 and the main control board 16, and the LSI (including the payout control unit) A representative example of a communication sequence between the 799 and the presentation effect control board 53 will be described.

  FIGS. 129 and 130 are diagrams showing representative examples of communication sequences between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17. FIG. 131 and FIG. 132 are diagrams showing representative examples of communication sequences between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16. FIG. 133 to FIG. 136 are diagrams showing a representative example of a communication sequence between the SI 799 and the effect control substrate for display 53. FIG. 137 is a view showing a display example on the display 54. As shown in FIG. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification.

  129 and 133 show communication sequences executed between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 and between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 based on insertion of a card. ing.

  Referring to FIG. 129, in the card unit 3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer 327 reads information such as the card balance and the card ID recorded in the inserted card. Then, from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, as an operation instruction as shown in FIG. 121 and (D) in FIG. 122, a sequence number, card holding ON (general card holding, member card holding), When the card insertion process is ON, data including OFF during addition display (during prepaid lending display, replay lending display) is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the updated and updated sequence number is sent to the card unit 3 as an operation response as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. Will be sent.

  Further, referring to FIG. 133, in the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, it is in a state of inquiring card information, and from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display unit, FIG. As the gaming machine information notification as shown in (B) of the above, data including a display ON during card insertion processing is transmitted. Referring to FIG. 133, in the effect control substrate for display 53, a display for waiting for a customer is displayed on the display 54 in a state where no card is inserted, and when such notification of gaming machine information is received, the display Control is performed to switch the display of 54 to an animation display during communication (an animation display indicating that communication with the card unit 3 is in progress).

  Referring to FIG. 129, when the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the payout control unit 17 as a card insertion request. Then, in the card unit 3, processing is performed to inquire the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801.

  The payout control unit 17 having received such a card insertion request from the card unit 3 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17, and as shown in FIG. 133, the card As the insertion request, data including the received card ID is transmitted to the effect control board 53 for display. Thus, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  Referring to FIG. 133, in the effect control board for display 53 which has received the card insertion request, the card ID of the membership card, the general card or the test card inserted in the card unit 3 based on the received card ID. , And stores (stores) it in the card ID storage unit of the effect control substrate 53 for a display.

  Then, in the effect control substrate 53 for a display unit, it is determined whether or not the received card ID matches the previously stored card ID, and when it matches, the future game result is stored in the personal gaming history stored last time Perform processing to be added to the data. On the other hand, when they do not match, the personal gaming history data stored last time is cleared, and the future gaming results are processed as new personal gaming history data.

  In addition, in the effect control substrate 53 for display devices, as described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID, but separately from the effect control substrate 53 for display devices, the payout control unit 17 also A history data storage unit may be provided, and game history data may be accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit in association with a card ID. Specifically, when storing the card ID received from the card unit 3 in the payout control unit 17, the game history data collected by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is And the game history data storage unit. When such a configuration is adopted, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 133, the payout control unit 17 also acquires and stores the card ID as well as the effect control substrate 53 for a display, and also receives the received card It is determined whether or not the ID matches the previously stored card ID. If the ID matches, the game result to be used in the future is added to the previously stored personal game history data and used. On the other hand, when they do not match, the personal gaming history data stored last time is cleared, and the future gaming results are processed as new personal gaming history data.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  In the card unit 3, when the card insertion response is received and the inquiry result to the effect that the card ID is normal is obtained, the sequence number, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display as operation instruction While transmitting data including ON, the number of requested addition balls, and the card balance to the payout control unit 17, the data of the sequence number in the transmission data and the data of the number of gaming balls (the number of required addition balls) are stored in the backup recording area Do. Further, in such a state, in the card unit 3, control is performed to perform display during addition indicating that addition of a game ball is being performed on the display unit 312.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the gaming machine includes the game ball number related information, the card balance, the card insertion processing display OFF, and the addition display ON according to the received data. An information notification is sent to the effect control board 53 for a display. In the effect control substrate for display 53, when such a notification of the gaming machine information is received, control is performed to switch the display of the display 54 to an animation display during addition (an animation display indicating that the addition is in progress).

  Further, the payout control unit 17 having received such an operation instruction transmits data including the sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction.

  Thereafter, in the card unit 3, the addition display is ended, and the operation instruction includes the sequence number, the card holding ON, the card insertion processing OFF, the addition display OFF, the number of requested addition balls, and the data including the card balance. Transmit to control unit 17.

  When receiving such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 transmits a gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display to the effect control board for display 53 according to the received data. In the effect control substrate for display 53, when such notification of the gaming machine information is received, the display 54 performs control to end the animation display during addition.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 having received such an operation instruction transmits data including the sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the communication sequence when the operation mode shifts from the operation mode to the test card insertion mode will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 130, in the card unit 3, when a test card is inserted, information such as a card ID recorded in the inserted card is read by the card reader / writer 327. Then, from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, as an operation instruction as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (D), the sequence number, card holding ON (test card holding), and card insertion processing ON Data is sent.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the updated and updated sequence number is sent to the card unit 3 as an operation response as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. Will be sent.

  When the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits, as a card insertion request, data including the read card ID to the payout control unit 17. Then, in the card unit 3, processing is performed to inquire the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801.

  The payout control unit 17 having received such a card insertion request from the card unit 3 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17 and receives the card as a card insertion request. Data including the ID is transmitted to the effect control board for display 53. Thus, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  In the card unit 3, when the card insertion response is received and the inquiry result to the effect that the card ID is normal is obtained, the data including the test card insertion mode preparation designation ON of the operation mode switching preparation designation as the operation instruction Transmit to the payout control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, according to the received data, the test card insertion of the operation mode switching preparation designation is made in each of the main control substrate 16 and the effect control substrate for display 53. Send data including mode preparation specification ON.

  Referring to FIG. 131, the payout control unit 17 switches the operation mode as a platform state inquiry request to the main control board 16 according to the data including the test card insertion mode preparation designation ON received from the card unit 3. Send test data including test card insertion mode test mode ON. The main control board 16 having received such a stand status inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a stand state inquiry response which is a response to the stand state inquiry request.

  As shown in FIG. 131, test card insertion of the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response as shown in (E) of FIG. 124 until the condition of not being symbol variation and not being a big hit is satisfied. Data including test card insertion mode transition rejection ON similar to mode transition rejection is transmitted. On the other hand, when the condition of not being in symbol variation and not being a big hit is established, data including test card insertion mode shift rejection OFF is transmitted. As a result, when the condition that symbol variation is not in progress and jackpot is not in progress, preparation for transition to the test card insertion mode is completed in the gaming machine.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such a stand state inquiry response is received from the main control board 16, control to stop the firing of the game ball is performed according to the received data. Then, with reference to FIG. 130, payout control unit 17 waits for the game completion state in which all the game balls are discharged from the game board surface, and responds to the operation instruction of test card insertion mode preparation designation ON. As a response, data including test card insertion mode transition permission / disapproval OFF is transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, it is notified that the preparation for the operation mode switching of the entire gaming machine is completed.

  When the operation mode switching preparation for the entire gaming machine is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the test card insertion mode switching specification ON of the operation mode switching specification to the payout control unit 17 as the operation instruction.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such an operation instruction is received from the card unit 3, the test card insertion mode of the operation mode switching specification is made to each of the main control board 16 and the effect control board for display 53 according to the received data. Send data including switching specification ON.

  Referring to FIG. 131, the payout control unit 17 instructs the main control board 16 to switch the operation mode as a platform state inquiry request according to the data received from the card unit 3 including the test card insertion mode switch specification. Send the data including the test card insertion mode switching specification ON. The main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request temporarily saves variables related to the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function in a save area provided in the RAM. Furthermore, on the main control board 16, gaming history data such as the number of gaming balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the operation mode is switched by performing processing switching operation such as temporary saving of data and clearing of the game history data when the variation of the symbol and the big hit gaming state are ended. Be

  The main control board 16 waits until the end of the switching of the operation mode, and as a stand state inquiry response, which is a response to the stand state inquiry request, of the operation mode switching result included in the operation response as shown in FIG. Data including the test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the test card insertion mode transition ON is transmitted to the payout control unit 17.

  When receiving the table state inquiry response including such test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 responds to the operation instruction of the test card insertion mode switching specification ON according to the received data. As a certain operation response, test card insertion mode transition ON of the operation mode switching result, and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the test card insertion mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the test card insertion mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a communication sequence when transitioning from the test card insertion mode to the operation mode will be described.

  When the return button 322 is operated in the card unit 3 in the test card insertion mode, the card unit 3 sets the operation mode preparation specification ON of the operation mode switching preparation specification as shown in (E) of FIG. 122 as an operation instruction. Contains data is sent.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such an operation instruction is received from the card unit 3, according to the received data, the operation mode preparation of the operation mode switching preparation designation is made to each of the main control board 16 and the effect control board for display 53. Send data that includes designated ON.

  In the payout control unit 17, the test card insertion mode preparation designation of the operation mode switching preparation designation as the platform state inquiry request is made to the main control board 16 according to the data including the operation mode preparation designation ON received from the card unit 3. Send data including ON. The main control board 16 having received such a stand status inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a stand state inquiry response which is a response to the stand state inquiry request.

  In the main control board 16, until the condition of not being symbol variation and not being a big hit is satisfied, the operation mode transition rejection of the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response as shown in (E) of FIG. 124 is rejected. Similar to the above, data including the operation mode transition rejection ON is transmitted. On the other hand, when the condition that the symbol is not changing and not being a big hit is satisfied, data including the operation mode shift rejection OFF is transmitted.

  When receiving the table state inquiry response including such an operation mode transfer refusal OFF from the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 performs control to stop the firing of the game ball according to the received data. The payout control unit 17 waits until all game balls are discharged from the game board surface, and then, as an operation response which is a response to an operation instruction of the operation mode preparation designation ON, data including operation mode shift permission / disapproval OFF Is sent to the card unit 3.

  When the preparation for the operation mode switching is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the operation mode switching specification ON of the operation mode switching specification to the payout control unit 17 as the operation instruction.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such an operation instruction is received from the card unit 3, according to the received data, the operation mode switching specification of the operation mode switching specification is made to each of the main control substrate 16 and the effect control substrate for display 53 Send data including ON.

  In the payout control unit 17, the data including the operation mode switching specification ON of the operation mode switching specification as the table state inquiry request according to the data including the operation mode switching specification received from the card unit 3 to the main control board 16 To the main control board 16. On the main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request, the variables related to the payout rate such as the probability change function and the change time shortening function temporarily saved in the save area are returned to the original state, Restore the machine's condition. Furthermore, on the main control board 16, gaming history data such as the number of gaming balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the operation mode is switched by performing processing switching operation such as temporary saving of data and clearing of the game history data when the variation of the symbol and the big hit gaming state are ended. Be

  The main control board 16 waits until the end of the switching of the operation mode, and as a stand state inquiry response, which is a response to the stand state inquiry request, of the operation mode switching result included in the operation response as shown in FIG. Data including the test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the test card insertion mode transition ON is transmitted to the payout control unit 17.

  When receiving the table state inquiry response including such test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 operates in response to the operation instruction of the operation mode switching specification ON according to the received data. As a response, operation mode switching ON of the operation mode switching result, and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the operation mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the operation mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 at the time of addition request will be described.

  In the card unit 3, when the prepaid lending operation by the operation of the lending button 321 or the replay lending operation by the operation of the replay button 319 is performed, an addition factor of the game balls is generated, and the game balls owned by the player are added Be done. In those cases, the game ball number related information including the number of requested addition balls shown in the operation instruction of (D) in FIG. 121, CU state (data displayed during prepaid lending display or replay lending display (added display) Is ON, and data such as the card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction. As described above, an operation instruction including data specifying an addition factor (during prepaid lending display and replay lending display) is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When the addition based on the prepaid lending operation or the replay lending operation is performed, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image in an addition display as shown in FIG.

  When the addition factor of the game ball occurs, the payout control unit 17 calculates the total number of game balls shown in the notification of the game machine information of (B) in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 based on the data received from the card unit 3. Game ball related information including CU, CU status (prepaid loan display or replay play data display data (additional display) is ON), and data such as card balance for the display unit from the payout control unit 17 as the gaming machine information notification It is transmitted to the effect control board 53. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including data (prepaid lending display and replay playing display) specifying the addition factor is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  In the effect control substrate 53 for a display, when the gaming machine information notification is received, whether the addition factor of the game ball corresponds to the prepaid lending or the replay lending based on the data specifying the addition factor judge.

  Then, in the effect control board for display 53, when the addition factor of the game ball is prepaid lending based on the determination result of the addition factor of the game ball, the display 54 displays (A1) to (A3) in FIG. Perform display control to display prepaid lending animation as shown. The prepaid lending animation display becomes a display during prepaid lending as in (A2) of FIG. 137 from the display before prepaid lending as in (A1) of FIG. 137, and then prepaid as in (A3) of FIG. It will be displayed after lending. In the display during prepaid lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the possessed ball (“handled ball” in the figure), and the animation display in which the possessed ball increases Is done. Then, when such an animation display is finished, it becomes a display after prepaid lending as shown in (A3) of FIG. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, it is specified that the adding factor is the prepaid lending by the display of the card balance value being changed to increase the number of balls.

  In addition, in the effect control substrate 53 for a display device, when the addition factor of the game ball is replay lending based on the determination result of the addition factor of the game ball, the display 54 displays (B1) to (B3) in FIG. Perform display control to make replay play lending animation display as shown in. From the display before replay lending as in (B1) in FIG. 137, the replay lending and animation display becomes a display during replay lending as in (B2) in FIG. 137, and thereafter, in (B3) in FIG. It becomes a display after such replay lending. In the display during replay lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the drawing) is not changed, and animation display is performed in which the number of balls (“balls” in the drawing) gradually increases. Then, when such animation display is finished, it becomes a display after replay play lending as shown in (B3) of FIG. As described above, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the additional factor is the replay lending by displaying that the number of balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  When the image display in the addition display in the card unit 3 is finished, the data (the addition display) in the prepaid lending display or the replay play lending display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned off. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, data (additional display) of the prepaid lending display or the replay lending display included in the CU state is turned OFF. The effect control substrate 53 for display performs control to end the addition animation display when the data of the prepaid lending display or the replay lending display is turned off in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 at the time of a subtraction request will be described.

  In the card unit 3, when a ball division operation is performed by designating a ball sharing (ball division) or a wagon order operation by a wagon order designation, a subtraction factor of the game balls is generated, and the player owns The game ball of is subtracted. In those cases, the game ball number related information including the subtraction required ball number shown in the operation instruction of (D) in FIG. 121, the CU state (data being displayed during divided ball display or wagon service display (under subtraction display) Is ON, and data such as the card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction. As described above, the operation instruction including the data specifying the subtraction factor (during divided ball display or wagon service display) is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  For example, when the wagon order operation is performed, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image under subtraction display such as an image showing subtraction of the wagon service display shown in FIGS. When the ball-dividing operation is performed, the display 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image under subtraction display such as an image indicating subtraction due to the ball-dividing being performed.

  When a subtraction factor of gaming balls is generated, the payout control unit 17 determines the total number of gaming balls shown in the gaming machine information notification in (B) of FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 based on the data received from the card unit 3. Game ball related information including CU state, CU status (ball division display or data of wagon service display (subtraction display is ON), and data of card balance etc. for the display unit from the payout control unit 17 as a notification of gaming machine information It is transmitted to the effect control board 53. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including the data specifying the subtraction factor (the ball divided display or the wagon service display) is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  In the effect control substrate 53 for display, when the notification of the gaming machine information is received, whether the subtraction factor of the game ball corresponds to the ball division or the wagon order is based on the data specifying the subtraction factor. judge.

  Then, in the effect control substrate 53 for the display device, when the subtraction factor of the game ball is the ball division, based on the determination result of the subtraction factor of the game ball, the numerical value of the ball is gradually divided in the display 54 Is converted to a numerical value, and an animated display is made with decreasing balls. On the other hand, in the effect control substrate 53 for the display, when the subtraction factor of the game ball is the wagon order based on the determination result of the subtraction factor of the game ball, the numerical value of the ball gradually becomes the minute wagon order in the display 54 Is converted to a numerical value, and an animated display is made with decreasing balls. A display in which the number of balls is reduced based on the subtraction factor in this way is called a subtraction animation display. Thus, in the subtraction animation display, the subtraction factor is specified.

  When the image display under subtraction display in the card unit 3 is finished, the data during ball division display or wagon service display (subtraction display) included in the CU state in the operation instruction sent to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, the data (addition display) of the ball divided display or the wagon service display included in the CU state is turned OFF. The effect control board 53 for display performs control to end the subtraction animation display when the data (subtraction display) of the ball division display or the wagon service display becomes OFF in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 during the game will be described.

  In the gaming state until a big hit occurs in the card unit 3, the display control for the in-game animation, which is an animation display displayed during the game, is performed on the display 54 by the effect control substrate 53 for display Be Then, when a big hit occurs, the game control board 16 gives a payout control unit 17 a table state inquiry response, a big hit similar to ON as a big hit among the big hit 1 to 4 included in the game information notification as shown in (B) of FIG. Data including medium ON is sent.

  When receiving a platform state inquiry response including such a big hit ON, the payout control unit 17 receives a game ball including the total number of game balls shown in the game machine information notification of (B) in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126. Data including number related information, big hit medium (including big hit 1 to 4 inside) ON, and big hit end display OFF are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board 53 for display as gaming machine information notification. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including the data specifying the gaming state is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  A display control for producing a big hit during animation, which is an animation display displayed during a big hit game, on the display 54 when receiving a gaming machine information notification including a big hit on the effect control board 53 for a display Is done.

  And, before the gaming state of the big hit ends, during the big hit end indication which is included in the game information notification which is shown in (B) in Figure 126 as a stand state inquiry response from the game control board 16 to the payout control section 17 Similar to ON, data including ON while displaying a big hit is transmitted.

  When receiving the table status inquiry response including ON during such a big hit end display, the payout control unit 17 turns on the data of the big hit end display included in the gaming machine information notification of (B) in FIG. 125 and FIG. (The data during the big hit continues with ON).

  In the effect control board 53 for the display, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit ON and the big hit end ON is received, the display 54 ends the big hit middle animation display, and the animation display is displayed at the time of the big hit end. Display control is performed to display a certain big hit end animation.

  Then, when the gaming state of the big hit is over, from the gaming control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, as a platform state inquiry response, the big hit during the big hit OFF and the big hit which are included in the game information notification as shown in FIG. Data including OFF during display is transmitted.

  When receiving a platform status inquiry response including such a big hit medium OFF and a big hit end display OFF, the payout control unit 17 receives the big hit during the big hit included in the gaming machine information notification of (B) in FIG. 125 and FIG. Turn off the data and the data on the big hit end display.

  In the effect control board 53 for the display, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit medium OFF and the big hit end display OFF is received, the display 54 ends the big hit end animation display, and a display for displaying the game animation image Control is performed.

  FIG. 138 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, which is a modification of the one shown in FIG. Here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko ball is mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a turning lever 100 for attaching a game board, and the turning operation of the turning lever 100 enables the game board 26 to be detached. On the other hand, all winning balls winning from the winning opening and the variable winning ball device provided in the game area 27 are collected by the winning ball set cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball entering the out port 45 is received by the out ball flowing path 702 and flows down the out ball flowing path 702. An out ball detection switch 701 is provided in the out ball flowing path 702, and a ball flowing down the out ball flowing path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul ball is discharged from the far ball return port 150 and then detected by the far ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul ball enters the out ball flow down path 702. The pachinko ball that has flowed down the out ball flow down path 702 is guided to the ball collection rod 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collecting rod 89 are pumped by the pumping device 190. The lifting and lowering device 190 has a built-in lifting and lowering screw that is rotated by the transfer motor 40, and when the lifting and lowering screw rotates, the pachinko balls are lifted. On the back of the pumping device 190, polishing members 200a and 200b (200b can not be seen in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of the pumping are provided. The surface is polished while being done.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41 b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lift device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is provided on the ball discharging side (upper side). A pachinko ball to be pumped is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The pachinko balls which are lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball lifting switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the hitting ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next pachinko ball to the hitting position, every time the player operates the hitting operation handle 25 and strikes one pachinko ball. A pachinko ball fed by the ball feeding device is detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17 as described later.

  Further, game ball excess / minimacy detection switches 42a and 42b are provided along the circulation path of the pachinko balls (see FIG. 4) to detect whether or not the pachinko balls in the circulation path are a predetermined number (for example, 50). .

  FIG. 139 is a view showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 138. Here, mainly the differences will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 139, various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h for detecting winning balls are provided in various prize ports provided in the game area 27, and only the out balls collected from the out port 145 are provided. An out ball detection switch 701 for detecting A merging path detection switch 32 is provided on a merging passage path 702 through which the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the winning balls detected by the various winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h merge and pass. There is.

  Among these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are configured by proximity switches. By configuring various detection switches in this way, so-called radio wave goths are generated, illegal radio waves are transmitted, and the proximity switch turns off when an illegal act is made to cause the various winning balls detection switches to output the winning balls detection signal illegally. Although the detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, since only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by the optical sensor, no detection signal is output without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switch is the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch. However, when a radio wave goto for transmitting an illegal radio wave is generated, the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 is not output, and the detection signal from the detection switch configured by another proximity switch is output. The ball detection total by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switch does not match the number of detected balls of the merging path detection switch 32. Based on the occurrence of such an unmatched phenomenon, it can be determined that a fraud has occurred.

  Therefore, the payout control unit 17 receives detection signals of various winning balls detection switches 700a to 700h, detection signals of out ball detection switch 701, detection signals of far ball detection switch 33, and detection signals of merging path detection switch 32. Calculate the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h configured by the proximity switch and the out ball detection switch 701, and whether the total matches the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 Determine if If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54.

  As still another example, the merging path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 139 is provided at a lower position than the merging point where the farball detected by the farball detection switch 33 merges into the merging passage path 702, The total of the out ball and the far ball may be detected by the merging path detection switch 32. In that case, the sum of the number of balls detected by various detection switches composed of proximity switches, that is, the prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701 and the far ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the sum and the merging route It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54.

  As still another example, the merging path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 139 is at the same position, and is located at a lower position than the merging point where the balls detected by the far ball detection switch 33 merge into the merging passage path 702. The combined route detection switch may be provided, and the sum of the winning balls, the out balls and the far balls may be detected by another combined route detection switch. In that case, the sum of the number of balls detected by various detection switches composed of proximity switches, that is, the prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701 and the far ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the sum and the merging route It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54. The above-described abnormality determination is also performed by determining whether the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out-of-ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 or not. Run in parallel.

Next, another control of the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIG.
FIG. 140 (a) shows a control command output process of firing and lifting, which is executed by the payout control unit 17. In step SA (hereinafter simply referred to as SA) 1, it is determined whether the game prohibition flag is ON. The game prohibition flag is turned on by receiving an operation instruction including prohibition request from the CU, and turned off by receiving a game permission request. If it is determined NO by SA1, a process of outputting a release permission signal to the release control board 31 is performed by SA2. In response to the touch control signal input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 receives the signal and controls the hitting and firing motor 18 to hit and launch.

  A signal from the launch motor origin sensor is input in accordance with the driving of the striking launch motor 18. If there is an input of the signal, a determination of YES is made by SA3 and control to drive the transport motor 40 is made by SA4.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is ON, a process of outputting a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal to the launch control board 31 is performed by SA5. The launch control board 31 having received this stops the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 and puts it into a firing stop state where no hitting is released.

  FIG. 140 (b) shows error processing. At SA10, it is determined whether the game prohibition flag is ON. If it is determined YES in SA10, it is determined whether or not a winning detection signal is input. When a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. In SA11, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, the above-mentioned floating ball processing waiting time (10 When a winning ball detection signal is input after the lapse of seconds), a determination of YES is made by SA11.

  At this point in time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the prize ball detection signal has been input in spite of this is a so-called radio wave goto that causes the prize to be generated fraudulently by the illegal radio wave. There is a risk of In that case, control proceeds to SA12, and an error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is output.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is OFF, it is judged at SA13 whether or not the launch motor origin sensor signal has been input. If not, that is, if the firing motor 18 is not driven, the transport motor 40 should also be stopped (see SA3 and SA4). Nevertheless, when a detection signal from the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b is input, a determination of YES is made by SA14, and according to the type of error by SA12. An error notification signal is output.

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal according to the type of error is a payout of a signal for causing an error display by the display 54, a point of a failure notification lamp, etc. (or blinking) or an error notification by sound from a speaker. The control unit 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality judged YES by SA14, an abnormality display such as "The pumping device has malfunctioned" by the display 54, a point of a lamp for alarming a pumping device abnormality, etc. (or blinking) or The delivery control unit 17 outputs a signal for causing an alarm notification from the speaker by a voice such as “the transmission device has abnormally operated”.

  An error is notified when lifting of the pachinko ball is detected by the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b when the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when the ball is not fired. The reason is that if pachinko balls are pumped and continued to be supplied even though they have not been hit and fired, there is a risk that a ball will jam in the passage and a failure will occur. It is to be able to cope with it.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the control of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide the management function on the P base side, and accordingly, the cost of the P base is increased. It can be suppressed as much as possible. In particular, the unit P has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly, and tends to be replaced early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, while new models are being developed one after another that rapidly incorporate the rapidly changing tastes of players, the cycle of table replacement in game arcades tends to be quicker.

  On the other hand, CUs are less likely to be replaced from the viewpoint of taste, and in general, equipment is replaced according to a failure, and even if replaced due to a failure, re-sending after appropriate repair It is used. And if failure does not occur, replacement will not be performed for several years.

  For this reason, by providing the management function of the game ball on the CU side instead of the P base side and suppressing the cost of the P base, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game arcade introducing the P base can be reduced.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key for securing security and an SID (also referred to as a unique ID).

  In the game arcade, a host server 801, a card unit 3 and a pachinko machine 2 are installed. The card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 perform cryptographic communication with each other. The card unit 3 and the upper server 801 also perform cryptographic communication with each other. Furthermore, encryption communication is also performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 provided in the card unit 3. Also, encryption communication is performed between the delivery control unit 17 and the main control board 16 in the LSI 799 formed of one chip provided in the pachinko machine 2 and also between the main control board 16 and the key management server 803. There is. Further, in-chip communication is performed between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17.

  The upper server 801 is a server designed and manufactured by the maker of the card unit 3 and has a function of managing sales when a player inserts a card into the card unit 3 and plays a game using, for example, a prepaid balance. have. A key management server 800 capable of communicating with the host server 801 is installed outside the game arcade. The key management server 800 is also designed and manufactured by the maker of the card unit 3.

  A key management server 803 capable of communicating with the main control board 16 is installed outside the game arcade. The key management server 803 is designed and manufactured by the maker of the pachinko machine 2.

  The CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 store dedicated programs common to each company regardless of the card unit maker or the pachinko machine maker, and communication control is performed according to the programs. As a result, in order to enable communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 by any card unit maker, the specification of the communication interface between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 To each card unit maker. The specifications of the communication interface are not disclosed except between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. On the other hand, in the case of communication between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, since both are provided in the one-chip microcomputer to be in-chip communication, the communication interface specification between both units There is no need to publish

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key for securing security and a unique ID (also referred to as SID). Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and P unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17 and main control board 16, and the main control board 16 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate each other using the authentication information, and mutually determine whether the other device is appropriate or not. Then, they communicate with each other on condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. The distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below based on FIG.

  The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key are sent from the key management server 800 in FIG. 141 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 141, key management server 800 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit. The card unit maker stores the SID of the main control unit in the EEPROM 808 as described above at the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, ie, already stored in the ROM 809 The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it, and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key, which are transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit. In this manner, in the key management server 800, a database of pair authentication information is constructed, which includes the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding thereto, and the authentication key which is a common key.

  Thus, although the SID of the main control unit is itself authentication information, it is transmitted to the key management server 800 and is used to specify the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key corresponding to each other in the key management server 800. It is also used as authentication information identification information.

  After the card unit 3 is installed in the game arcade, the main control unit 323 performs key management of the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 via the upper server 801 when the power of the card unit 3 is first turned on. Send to server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323 and the authentication key, and the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80 The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the upper server 801. The main control unit 323 receives it, and stores the received SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same (paired) SID as the SID of the CU communication control unit 8 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808, and the same (paired) as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 The authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808.

  Between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808, whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct The CU communication control unit 80 determines whether the proper one or not by performing authentication, and performs serial ID authentication on the CU communication control unit 80, and stores it in the EEPROM 808 using the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813. The BB serial ID authentication is performed by determining whether the SID of the main control unit 323 is correct and determining whether the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is determined whether the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are stored as to whether or not the authentication key shared with each other is stored. Device authentication is performed using the determination.

  Next, the reason for distributing the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, and the authentication key to the main control unit 323 will be described as the key management server 800.

  For example, referring to FIG. 9 described above, main control unit 323 also sets SID of CU communication control unit 80 to ROM 804 at the time of chip manufacture, similarly to storing SID of CU communication control unit 80 in ROM 809 at the time of chip manufacture. If it is stored, a memory chip storing the same SID of the CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. It is necessary to mount a pair of memory chips, which causes a problem that the mounting process becomes complicated.

  Therefore, for example, the CU communication control unit 80 stores one of the pair of authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the initial stage or at the first power-on stage installed in the game arcade, one of the authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is sent to the main control unit 323, for example, It is conceivable that the EEPROM 808 stores the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit, and the authentication key.

  However, in the case of this method, since the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, there is a possibility that the authentication information may be leaked in the meantime, causing a security problem. In particular, as described above, the communication interface specification is published between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification, There is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases accordingly. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are, for example, devices located in the local area compared to the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the numbers thereof are also compared to the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. Because there are many cases, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud may easily access and intercept (eavesdropping) authentication information.

  Furthermore, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience also occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and thereafter, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits authentication information to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. If an unauthorized action is performed, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 do not judge that there is any abnormality in mutual authentication between them, and the CU communication control unit 80 Can not discover. That is, in the case of a method in which authentication information is supplied from one performing mutual authentication to the other performing mutual authentication, the one performing mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the authentication information is supplied to supply an authentication information. There is a security hole that you forgive.

  In order to prevent the problems as described above, a download method is employed in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 in the pachinko machine 2 as well, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is downloaded as described above. Then, a download method of storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown, at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM of the dispensing control unit 17, the SID of the dispensing control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is manufactured by the ROM writer or the like at the time of pachinko machine manufacturing. The SID and the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the delivery control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by the ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 from the I / O port of the main control board 16 at the first power-on after the pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game arcade It transmits to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in association with the SIDs of the main control boards in the plurality of pachinko machines. The key management server 803 searches the SID of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 16 and the authentication key, and the retrieved SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key Reply to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Furthermore, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 in the slot machine 2S (FIG. 142 to FIG. 146) described later, the key management server 803 A download method is employed in which the stored authentication information is downloaded and stored in the main control board 116.

  Specifically, although not shown, at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM of the payout control unit 117, the SID of the payout control unit 117 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is produced by the ROM writer at the time of slot machine manufacturing. The SID and the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the delivery control unit 117, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 by the ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured.

  In this state, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 from the I / O port of the main control board 116 at the first power-on after the slot machine 2S is installed in the game arcade It transmits to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in association with the SIDs of the main control boards in the plurality of slot machines. The key management server 803 searches the SID of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116 and the authentication key, and the retrieved SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key It replies to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 142, the slot machine 2S is provided so as to be able to open and close the front door 2b with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left edge thereof as the center of swing.

  A pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided near the end edge of the front door 2bS on the opposite side to the swinging center. The engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS opposed to the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. By pressing the front door 2bS in the open state against the main body frame 2aS, the engagement projections 6aS, 6bS ride over the engagement receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and in a state of riding over the engagement reception tabs 7aS, 6bS downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

  A front door open solenoid 110 (see FIG. 143) is provided on the back side of the front door 2bS, and the front door open solenoid 110 is excited to excite the force of the spring to excite the front door open solenoid 110. The coupling projections 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be in the unlocked state, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 5) is provided at a position contacting the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS to be in a locked state It is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, an outline of control circuits of the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described. The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 configured of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 or the like, and communication via the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S and the S-unit communication control unit 82 is performed. A CU communication control unit 80 for performing the process is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and the connection wiring.

  The genuineness and type of the bill are discriminated by the money discriminator 344 and the discrimination result signal is inputted to the main control section 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a staff at a game arcade, a light reception signal is inputted to the main control section 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323, and is written from the main control unit 323 to the inserted card into the card reader / writer 327. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The main control unit 323 outputs display data such as the balance or holding points to the display 312, and the display 312 displays the output display data. In addition, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 which performs progress control (game control) of the slot machine 2S and a payout control unit 117 which transmits information on points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Further, the slot machine 2S is provided with an effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 117, and an effect ROM board 92 electrically connected to the effect control board 90.

  The main control board 116 is mounted with a main control unit 41 configured of a game control microcomputer. The main control unit 41 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a random access memory (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. (Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  The main control unit 41 includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers in a predetermined range, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery of the winning combination using the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has one BET switch 500, MAX BET switch 600, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, game assist indicator 120, payout indicator 130, start enable LED 180, weight LED 19 and replaying The LED 200, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the number of bets, makes the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) start variable, and draws the result of one game and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  Here, the processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, when the symbol is aligned on the pay line of any of the variable display devices constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a prize is won. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be roughly divided into special roles with a transition to the Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB), and small roles with the payout of medals. There is also a replay role (replay) that can start the next game without requiring the setting of the bet number.

  In the following, the big bonus may be described as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be described as RB. In addition, the big bonus, regular bonus may be described simply as a bonus. In order to generate a winning of each combination determined in accordance with the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and to set a winning flag of the combination.

  In the narrow sense, the term "game" in the slot machine 2S refers to the period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the number of bets before the operation of 7, the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are also performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these additional processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense I assume.

  The main control unit 41 first sets the number of bets by detecting the operation of the 1-bet BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, and starts rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if a replay play is won in the previous game, the same bet number as in the previous game is automatically set by the replay game in progress flag (the replay game in progress flag is erased at this stage).

  When the number of bets is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control unit 41 extracts a random number for the internal lottery, and based on the value of the extracted random number, the main control unit 41 determines each role determined according to the gaming state. Perform a lottery process to determine whether or not to accept a prize.

  The main control unit 41 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation processing, the reels are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in the previous game and one game timer time has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, 32R are driven to start rotating the left, middle, right reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  The main control unit 41 stops when a predetermined condition (starting detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotational speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied. The operations of the switches 8L, 8C and 8R are enabled. Thereafter, the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to stop the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the main control unit 41 performs a prize determination process to determine whether any predetermined combination of symbols has been derived and displayed on the payline. When it is determined in the winning determination processing that a transition combination such as BB has been won, processing for controlling a bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag, etc.) is performed.

  When the winning determination process is completed, the main control unit 41 performs a payout process. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of holding points to be given is output to the payout control unit 117. Further, in the payout process, as various processes not related to winning, a bonus end determination process for determining whether a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus (BB or RB) is performed.

  Next, each substrate other than the main control substrate 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The payout control unit 117 includes a point control unit 31 configured of a point control microcomputer. The point control unit 31 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  The payout control unit 117 is provided with a point count counter for storing the total number of points of the player separately from the card unit 3. If the player performs an operation for securing the points by debiting the player-owned value, the payout control unit 117 sends an addition request number signal from the card unit 3, and the payout control unit 117 In response to the addition request number signal, the holding point counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the holding point counter.

  Further, the front door opening solenoid 110 and the front door closing detector 112 are electrically connected to the payout control unit 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2bS, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits a front door open solenoid excitation signal to the front door open solenoid 110, thereby exciting the front door open solenoid 110 and releasing the lock of the front door 2bS.

  On the effect control board 90, an effect control unit 91 configured of a microcomputer for effect control is mounted. The effect control unit 91 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a random access memory (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. (Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  The effect control board 90 is provided with a liquid crystal display 510, speakers 530 and 540, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The effect control unit 91 inputs the data read signal to the ROM mounted on the effect ROM substrate 92 to read out the image data and transmit the display data to the liquid crystal display 510, and the liquid crystal display 510. Control is performed to display a display screen such as navigation effects relating to points, the number of bets, or a small part.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the effect control board 90, and the effect control board 90 outputs the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the liquid crystal display 510 The liquid crystal display 510 displays a display screen on which the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 are reflected.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between the boards of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request (point +), a subtraction request (point-), a game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request number, and a subtraction request The numbers and all are sent as "commands".

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when lending of points with withdrawal of the prepaid balance or lending of points by operation of the replay button 319 is performed. The payout control unit 117 receives and updates the holding points. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when the point division transfer (point sharing process) or the wagon service is performed. The payout control unit 117 that has received it subtracts and updates the holding points.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control unit 117 to permit the game or a command for requesting the prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for specifying the number of points to be added to the number of holding points by the addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for specifying the number of points to be subtracted from the holding points by the subtraction request command.

  On the other hand, from payout control unit 117 of slot machine 2S to card unit 3, a credit point indicating the value of the credit point counter stored by payout control unit 117, an additional number of credit points according to winning, and a bet number A subtraction number of points according to the setting and external output information indicating various gaming states and the like are transmitted.

  In the external output information, bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by the operation of the 1-bet switch 500 or the MAX bet switch 600, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R Reel start information sent at the time of start, internal winning status information (showing the winning result) sent when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed The first to third stop operation information (indicating the type of stop reel) transmitted in, the result information (denoted or indicating the type of winning combination) transmitted when the display result is finalized, the gaming state has changed The game state information (indicating the type of changed gaming state) transmitted at the time and the error information (indication of the type of error) transmitted when an error occurs are included.

  When the CPU of the main control board 116 detects an error occurring during the game or disconnection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU turns on or blinks a call lamp provided on the curtain board and controls the I / O of the main control board 116. An O-port (not shown) outputs an abnormality notification signal notifying the hole management computer 1 that an abnormality has occurred.

  In the gaming state notified by the gaming state information, in addition to the big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), RT (Replay Time) in which the winning probability of replay is high probability, the internal lottery result is displayed by the effect control unit 91 It includes AT (Assist Time), which is a notification period in which navigation effects to be notified can be executed.

  From the payout control unit 117 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout acceptance command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command to check whether the main control board 116 is operating normally. The number-of-payouts acceptance command is a command indicating that the addition number transmitted from the main control board 116 has been accepted. The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the holding point counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the number of bets. When the main control board 116 receives the BET impossible signal, the main control board 116 prohibits the game from being newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operations of the single bet switch 500 and the MAX bet switch 600 for setting the bet number are invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control unit 117 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  Further, the main control board 116 transmits a signal of "addition number +" to the payout control unit 117 at the time of winning detection, while the signal of "subtraction number +" is at the start of reel rotation detection. Will be sent. "Additional number +" indicates the number of points to be added according to the winning, and "subtractive number +" indicates the number of points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 117 adds the value of the holding point counter and adds the “addition number” to be transmitted to the card unit 3 in accordance with the “addition number +” signal. Further, the payout control unit 117 subtracts the value of the holding point counter according to the signal of “subtraction number +”, and adds “subtraction number” for transmission to the card unit 3.

  Furthermore, various external output information indicating the bet number setting, the reel start, and the like described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90. The display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the slot machine 2S such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect control unit 91. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection when a next command is not received despite the elapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the reception of a command, and performs a time over detection process (error process). Specifically, when the next command is not transmitted despite the fact that 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted ten times in a row, effect control The substrate 90 detects a time-out, initializes the communication state, and performs control to display an error animation on the liquid crystal display 510.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the S base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the S-point holding points is calculated to manage the current holding points. The S-point side also calculates and stores the current points earned. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent the game from starting as soon as possible when the number of points becomes less than the minimum required number (for example, 0) for setting the number of bets. It is a secondary thing used for In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S side, and the cost of the S units is maximized accordingly It can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared with CU, the S has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function on the S side to the CU side to reduce the cost of the S side, the running cost of the game arcade introducing the S can be reduced. is there.

  FIG. 120 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and the storage data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 117 on the S side. First, when the power is started in a state where the S unit (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control unit 117 on the S unit side The main chip ID is sent from the main control board 116, and the main chip ID is sent to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored by the payout control unit 117 itself is sent to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the S side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the S-unit side to the CU side.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same S-unit as the previous one is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between CU side and S side is started every time the power is raised is sent from CU side to S side and the new connection time data Is stored on the S platform side.

  Also, every time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and S side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each on the CU side and the S side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And stored on the S platform side. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S unit. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and S in this embodiment will be described. The CU back-stores the SQN transmitted to the S in response to the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the S, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, the SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to S, and the transmitted SQN is stored in a backup storage. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, the SQN received from the CU in the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and then when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by one and transmitted. Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the S unit.

  Then, when a communication break occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection, but on the S unit side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the time of the communication break. Because of this, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the last transmitted SQN. On the other hand, on the CU side, since the operation instruction has been sent or the operation instruction has been received according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection, the SQN that has been backup-stored until communication reconnection is sent last Or the last received one.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the S side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the S side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the S-unit side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to S side.

  Next, the current point related information (point related information in counting) is transmitted from the S-base side to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 120, a total of four types of counters, ie, an addition counter, a subtraction counter, an external output information counter, and a holding point counter, are provided in the current holding related information storage area of the RAM. There is.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added according to the occurrence of the winning. When a winning occurs on the S-th car, the main control board 116 transmits an addition number signal capable of specifying the point addition number to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting holding points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. When the bet number setting operation is detected, the bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the bet number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the game state has changed. As an external output information counter, a counter that counts the number of bets set by the operation of the one-piece BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation A counter that counts the internal winning combinations for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operations for each of the first to third stopping operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is determined The counter includes a counter that counts up at a time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs.

  Note that the counters that count up according to each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The point counter is a counter for storing the player's point (the total number of points) at the present time. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the holding point counter by the addition of the addition counter when adding and updating the addition counter, and adds and updates the holding point counter when the addition counter of the subtraction counter is added and updated. Subtract and update.

  A command is sent from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals to request data transmission. Unit S transmits the values of the four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and holding point counter) to CU at the timing when the command is received. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6, the S units have the counter value of “previous point related information” at each data transmission for the three types of counters except the points counter of the above four types of counters. Backup to storage area.

  That is, the value of the addition number counter is stored as "addition number", the value of the subtraction number counter is set as "subtraction number", and the value of the external output information counter is stored as "external output information" respectively. It is stored in the area. In addition, at the time of storage in the storage area, data previously stored is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and stored (rewritten) in the storage area of the "previous point related information".

  The addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of "previous point related information" are then initialized (0 clear) to prepare for the next data count. Be

  As a result, in the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter, the amount of change (non-transmission to CU) of each data (point, external output information) after data transmission to CU last time Data) will be stored. Then, when the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change of the data from when the data transmission request was received last time to when the data transmission request is received this time is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized for each data transmission. Then, every time a transmission request for data is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, every time the S receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, it transmits the data change amount between the previous reception of the command and the current reception.

  In other words, data of addition number, subtraction number, external output information, which is the current holding related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before in the storage area of the last holding related information (the current holding related information transmitted immediately before) Are stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each counter at this time but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding related information is not transmitted from the S unit to the CU side. Is also intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, the total addition number (addition total), total subtraction number (subtraction total), external output information total, and holding points are stored in the total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of remaining points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Further, the total subtraction number and the holding points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Furthermore, the cumulative total number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S-unit. The total number of external output information is updated according to the type of each external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to "number of bets", "reel start", "internal winning by winning combination", "first to third stop operation", "display result", and "change in gaming state" The number (count) is accumulated.

  As described above, the CU can manage the latest holding points by updating the holding points according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from the S-unit. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total addition number, the total subtraction number, and the total number of external output information according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from S. Become.

  Although the CU receives the count value of the holding point counter in addition to the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter from the S side, the holding points stored by itself are the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter. The value is updated based on the value, and the count value of the holding point counter sent from the S base is not used. Therefore, even if the points sent from the S unit do not match the points managed by the CU, the points held by the CU are updated with the points sent from the S unit. It will not be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the holding point counter transmitted from the S-unit side with the current holding points updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU transmits normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with the S unit, on condition that determination that the unit matches (consistent confirmation) is performed. Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer An error notification may be issued according to 1), or a predetermined notification may be given to prompt an artificial response by a person in charge.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for correcting the holding points to the holding points managed by the CU, and then transmit the command to the S-unit. Conceivable. In this case, the S unit is provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored in itself according to the correction instruction command. Note that, as the correction instruction command, even as a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S-unit side It may be a command indicating.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S-unit side, and calculates and manages the current points, particularly based on the values of the addition / subtraction counters. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the S-unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the holding points are stored also on the S side for the purpose of enabling to prohibit the game immediately when the holding points become zero. However, it is possible not to provide the holding point counter for storing the holding points on the S-unit side.

  The CU does not match the function of performing a match score determination process that checks whether the calculated current score at the current point in time and the value of the score counter transmitted from the S base are matched or not. It has a function to perform control to shift to an error state (error control at non-coincidence).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the holding points are stored also on the S base side, it can be determined whether or not the holding points are consistent with the holding points managed and stored on the CU side. Yes (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the credit points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the credit points managed and stored on the CU side due to an unfair act or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the points stored on the CU side and the points stored on the S base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. And may be determined to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120, the CU further includes a storage area for storing the medals and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU uses a predetermined number of storage areas for storing medals according to an input requesting use of the medals (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 (see FIG. 143) provided for the CU). Subtract the medals of. In addition, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 143) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the loan button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by deducting the value from the game-owned value (for example, the prepaid balance, the points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) owned by the player, The number of requested additions for adding holding points for the withdrawal amount to the holding point counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S-base side. On the S side, in response to that, the holding point counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation to order a so-called wagon service is performed such that the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of requested subtractions of the gaming value owned by the player is from the CU side. It is sent to S side. In response to that, on the S side, the holding point counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 8, and is a diagram showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. The same control as that of FIG. 8 is performed, and the point is that it is S instead of P. Since the others are similar, only the disclosure of the drawings will be omitted here to repeat the description.

Next, modifications and feature points in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 146 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, and shows one in which the card unit 3 is incorporated inside the pachinko machine 2.

  At a lower position of the game area 27, a card unit 3 is incorporated as shown by a broken line. The player can insert a card from the card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and the player can insert a banknote from the bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the display 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the display 54 of the gaming machine in a state where the player can visually recognize. In the figure, 320 is an IR photosensitive unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a calling button.

  Although the modification of the card unit shown in FIG. 93 is one incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine serving as the incorporation control is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIGS. It may be the slot machine 2S shown at 145.

  (2) Next, modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 8, 42, and 145 will be described. FIG. 147 is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data of each of the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIGS. 8, 42, and 145 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 8, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the P-base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 147, the hall management computer 1 is used. The game history data is cleared based on the clear command transmitted to the CU 3 from the. It is necessary to clear the game history data for each gaming machine installed in the game arcade before the start of business of the game arcade. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data not by the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine but by simultaneous distribution of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3.

  The hall management computer 1 is operated by the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 causes the hall management computer 1 to be at a predetermined time before the start time of the game hall operation. A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage of the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the function of the clear processing unit provided in the gaming history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared). Further, the clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-unit 2 by the function of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 which has received the clear command signal erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 by the function of the clear processing unit, and the P game history data of this P unit The oldest stored data is erased from the stored data for 10 days of the storage unit, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the older day one by one. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day).

  Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 147, after the player has left the seat, the determination of the identity between the player who left the seat and the player who will play the next game is performed on the CU 3 side. The current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 stores C-ID, which is player identification information of the player who has left the seat. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play a game again on the P stand 2 which has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not both match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 391 of CU3 to the gaming history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2, but it is determined that the two do not match. The difference command is sent.

  If the game history data management unit 291 receives the same / different command, in the case of the same command, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and the game history data are stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a different command is received, control is performed to delete backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 147, and is a view showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. The same control as that in FIG. 146 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since the others are similar, only the disclosure of the drawings will be made here and the repetition of the description will be omitted. In FIGS. 147 and 148 as well as in FIGS. 8 and 145 described above, the identity of the player is confirmed only when the C-ID of the member card is read, not the visitor card, and the current player gaming history is confirmed. It memorizes in the data, it inherits the game history, it counts.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing control of insertion processing in the modification shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. The control of FIG. 149 is a modification of a part of the control shown in FIG. 42. The same control steps are denoted by the same step numbers, and the differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 149, solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and arrows of two-dot chain lines indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 149, the CU executes the steps S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21, and the P units execute S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that the process is not interrupted, the control proceeds to S20, in which C-IDs of the currently inserted card and the previously inserted card are compared to determine whether they match. Next, at S21, control is performed to transmit a command based on the determination result to the P-unit. Specifically, the same command is transmitted in the case of the determination result of the match, and the difference command is transmitted to the Ps in the case of the determination result of the non-coincidence.

  In the P unit, it is determined in S22 whether the transmitted command is a match command or not, and the game history data of the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (condition that matches). A control (S12) is performed to return to the current player gaming history data storage unit) and resume updating of the gaming history data.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 149, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 42 is not executed.

  In this modification, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the gaming history data a stored in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is It may be transmitted to the platform 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 and S 2 S) that has received the gaming history data a stores the received gaming history data a in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) and takes over the gaming history data a. Add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is not necessary in the gaming machine (P unit 2 or S unit 2S).

(3) The invention of the following composition is indicated by the embodiment mentioned above.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
And second control means (LSI 799,999) communicably connected to the first control means, and
The first control means is
Error determination means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116) for determining an error occurring during control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify an abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means;
The second control means is
Communicably connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 380 and 20 or connectors 330 and 220);
An abnormality determining unit (an authentication sequence of FIG. 31) for determining an abnormality of the first control unit;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to the game device when the abnormality determination means determines that the first control means is abnormal (an abnormality of the main control board 16, 116 The detected payout control units 17 and 117 include the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 to notify the CU communication control unit 80),
The gaming apparatus is characterized in that control is performed to notify an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function of notifying an abnormality when an error occurs during control of the gaming machine. A first control having an abnormality notification control function at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in order to perform control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality of the control means itself to the game apparatus from the first control means and to notify the abnormality in the game apparatus Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, abnormality notification control can be performed well.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use that information as they are. Although transmitted to the CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.) and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) Although the authentication sequence and the task message sequence shown in FIGS. 30 to 38 are the control of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, the control of the authentication sequence and the task message sequence shown in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the P unit communication control unit 81, or may be performed by the payout control unit 117 and the S unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S. The present invention may be carried out in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the

  In addition, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 may be performed between, for example, an island computer connected to hall management computer 1 and a computer of a gaming machine, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the ball storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) Although the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 is authentication using two types of SIDs, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, one type of SID (for example, SID for CU ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication of storing the same SID is performed.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 54 on the P base side. There is. When the number of game balls is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P-base side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P side. When the display control is performed on the P side, the information on the number of game balls to be displayed is received from the CU side, and the number of game balls managed in CU is displayed on the number display portion of game balls. It is possible to In addition, as described above, when the display control is performed on the P side, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of decorative (rendering) high value game balls. When the display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of gaming balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the gaming ball number counter stored in the P itself. The display control of the number may be performed.

  (8) In FIG. 51, the P platform side is provided with a weight of 10 seconds for floating ball processing waiting time, but instead, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls-number of far balls-number of out balls It is determined that the processing of the floating balls is completed by determining the number-number of winning balls = 0 or the number of firing balls-the number of far balls-the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 = 0. It is also good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the drive of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped and the bat firing is stopped in the P car that receives the command of prohibition request, and the stop or start winning memory of the variable display device during fluctuation. Although it has been shown that the fluctuation of the variable display device based on the above does not stop, the fluctuation of the variable display device may also be stopped instead.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, when the game balls are subtracted by the wagon service etc., as described based on FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of gaming balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently large compared to the number of balls of the subtraction request (for example, larger than 30 balls), the CU without waiting for a response from P units. The game balls may be subjected to subtraction processing alone, and then an operation instruction of a subtraction request may be transmitted to P units.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to it, and the response is sent back to the CU. Conversely, the command is sent from the P unit to the CU Also, it may be a communication form in which the CU responds to it and returns a response to the P unit.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 17, 117 is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is sent to the P-unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82 transmits to CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is sent from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81, S unit The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control units 17 and 117.

  In this case, the payout control unit 17, 117 executes retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, when the payout control unit 17 117 can not receive a response from the P communication control unit 81 and the S communication control unit 82 for one second after the command transmission, the P communication control unit 81 transmits the command to the S communication. Retransmission to the control unit 82 is performed. Furthermore, the delivery control unit 17 and 117 also execute transmission of the communication state request and retry of confirmation of the communication state shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). That is, the payout control units 17 and 117 transmit the operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 and then transmit the communication state request, and the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82. The communication status is confirmed based on the communication status response returned from. Then, if it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, the operation instruction is transmitted again, and then the communication state request is transmitted, and the communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and P units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the need for communication arises, CU Alternatively, data may be transmitted from one of the P units to the other for communication.

  (13) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the operation response including the refusal signal not complying with the request such as addition refusal ON, subtraction refusal ON, clear refusal ON from P to CU is sent back to CU, Is to determine that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of sending back an operation response of rejection ON, the operation response including the number of addition / subtraction balls and game balls not complying with the request from the CU is sent back to the CU. On the side, it is determined whether the returned data (the number of added balls, game balls, etc.) is the one according to the request, and it is determined whether the request is rejected or not. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the power-off at the CU or the communication disconnection between the CU and the P-unit is detected, the bat unit firing is stopped on the P-unit side to put the play stop state Although what was shown, it is not limited to it and you may control to the state which can continue a game, without stopping a batted ball shot in P side. In that case, the cumulative subtraction memory of the number of added subtraction balls and the number of starting openings generated with the continued game from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery and activation of these abnormalities is accumulated on P side Alternatively, the data and the game ball data may be transmitted to the CU at startup to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P-unit determines that the communication is disconnected by the process of FIG. However, the communication disconnection may be determined in the following manner.

  The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. Referring to FIG. 6, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 17 are connected by the signal line as described above, but in addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is A connection detection signal line to be input to the pachinko machine 2 side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are constituted by the same cable, and the disconnection of the cable or the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20 and the card unit 3 When the power is cut off, the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V, so that the connection detector detects it and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable or the detachment of the connectors 330 and 20 and the power supply of the card unit 3 have occurred due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 39, when receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, P is programmed not to reject the correction request by P. However, in P units, despite receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, there may be a case where a serious error in which the game ball etc. can not be corrected has occurred. In consideration of such a severe error condition, the CU side checks the content of the operation response transmitted from P after transmitting the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, and the P side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like is properly corrected, and if it is not corrected, control may be performed to shift to an error state.

  That is, the CU is determined in advance when it is determined that the gaming machine (for example, P units) can not add the game balls or the like even after receiving the communication start request (correction request) including the correction ON of FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to the specified error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, the display unit 312 notifies a severe error, and the hole management computer 1 notifies that a serious error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 issues an error notification. It is possible to do it and urge human resources to respond by personnel.

(17) On the P base side, the number of added balls may be counted as follows.
A counter A and a counter B are provided on the side of P as counters for counting the number of added balls. First, the number of added balls is counted by the counter A. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of added balls is counted by the counter B. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, while maintaining the value of the counter B, the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used to count the number of subtraction balls on the P-unit side. Alternatively, it may be used to count the number of starting opening 1 winnings and the number of starting openings 2 winnings.

  (18) The P unit does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU, but transmits one piece of information after adding and subtracting the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU It is also good. That is, "update information capable of specifying the amount of change" is also configured by such information.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the above command-response method. The P unit may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, instead of transmitting ball-related information at predetermined time intervals, the P-unit may transmit ball-related information to the CU each time a predetermined amount of information is obtained. For example, in the case of an addition ball, it is conceivable to configure to transmit the number of addition balls to the CU each time one or two or more predetermined numbers of addition balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number count, are provided on the P base side. However, instead of these two counters, one addition / subtraction counter may be used which is added by the increase of the game balls (the occurrence of winning or the like) and is decremented by the decrease of the game balls (the bullet release, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from P to CU.

(21) The present embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, the gaming device reestablishes a communication connection with the gaming machine before receiving a response to the command. If it has shifted to the above, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing subtraction of points has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side in the process of reestablishing the communication connection. And the command transmission unit cancels the instruction to subtract the point by the command when it is determined by the arrival determination unit that the command to instruct subtraction of the point has arrived. Command is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the additional point updating means cancels the subtraction instruction of the points by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When a command is received, whether the point has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing subtraction of points or the point is not subtracted due to lack of points, either The point corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the point stored in the point storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, by operation of the return button 322, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting game termination from the management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P may be communicably connected not by wired connection but by wireless.
(24) The payout control unit 17 may not be provided on the pachinko machine 2 by providing the function of the payout control unit 17 on the main control board 16.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control to stop the driving of the bat firing motor 18 when the gaming ball number counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes 0. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the gaming ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can designate and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control unit 17 stops driving the bat firing motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thus, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls specified in advance.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the side of the pachinko machine 2 and various displays are performed by the display 54. However, in the pachinko machine 20 without the presentation unit 50, It may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as card insertion processing ON, addition display ON, computer display ON, clear display ON, etc. is sent to P base 2, in P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and the display is performed only by the display 312 on the CU side.

  (27) In the ball sharing process shown in FIG. 86 to FIG. 88, a stock card is used in which the card B to be discharged for sharing division (sharing balls) to another person is stocked in CU, Instead, the card B for transfer to another person is inserted from the outside of the CU into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, and balls for division transfer (ball sharing) are recorded and ejected in the inserted card B. You may do it. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 95, between the discharging process of its own card which is the first process and the discharging process of the shared card which is the second process, The process of inserting a shared card will be added.

  (28) In the ball sharing process shown in FIG. 87, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game, but instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. You may start playing the game. In that case, the card B for transfer used for sharing balls is taken out from the card stock unit in the CU, is discharged in association with the shared points, and is correlated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card to be returned to may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by the insertion of a bill, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock section at the stage when the number of game balls is generated by the occurrence of winning. In that case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls corresponding to the card is also fluctuated in the same manner. Then, when an operation for sharing balls is performed, the number of gaming balls associated with the card is changed to the number of shared points, the card is ejected as a card for transfer, and removed from the card stock unit again. It is also possible to associate the remainder of the above-mentioned number of game balls minus the share for common points, with the played card.

  (29) In the above embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than standby (see FIG. 40), and transmits a communication disconnection request to disconnect the communication. If it is determined that the connection sequence restarts after the command has been sent, or if it is determined that the SQN being backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P do not match, it is not the connection in FIG. Execute the connection sequence of the hour. However, in addition to or instead of any of them, a signal (eg, recovery data) indicating that disconnection of the communication connection has occurred during playing (when not waiting) from P units along with resumption of the connection sequence Etc.) to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at reconnection in FIG. 39 based on the signal.

  (30) In the process of dividing and transferring game balls (sharing balls) shown in FIG. 86 to FIG. 88, division transfer is performed on the condition that it is determined that the current game ball is more than a predetermined number of game balls to be divided and transferred. (You may be allowed to share balls). In the case of FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, for example, divisional transfer (ball-sharing) is permitted on condition that it is determined that the number of gaming balls at present is 200 or more more than the number of gaming balls to be divided and transferred. Also, in the case of FIG. 88, division transfer (ball sharing) is performed on the condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is 100 or more more than the game balls to be divided and transferred. Allow

  (31) In the process of dividing and transferring the game balls (sharing balls) shown in FIGS. 86 and 88, the number of game balls in the game is card B during the time after the card A is discharged and before the card B is discharged. If the player is not satisfied with the balls to be written and transferred, the point sharing is canceled so that the card B is not discharged.

  (32) In the embodiment described above, the units of the number of game balls and the number of balls are the same. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the units of both may be different. For example, if the number of game balls “1” is converted to the number of balls possessed, it may be set to “10”.

  (33) In FIG. 87, a card (stock card) stocked in the card stock unit is taken out when the return operation at the end of the game is made, and the number of game balls is associated with the stock card to be discharged. Instead, the staff of the game arcade should bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, associate the number of game balls, and eject the card. It is also good.

  (34) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown. However, the type of card is not limited to this, and may be, for example, only one type of visitor card.

  (35) Instead of the RAM clear by manual operation by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 8, a clock function may be provided so that the RAM clear signal is automatically output at the business start time of the game arcade. The game history data is cleared as described above by the RAM clear signal that is automatically output.

  (36) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process of the number of game history balls such as the number of determined symbols 1, 2 and starting openings 1 to 3, large winning openings 1 and 2, winning openings 1 to 4, etc. Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P unit, basically based on the game history data held by the P unit side regardless of the match or mismatch. Control may be performed to update the game history data on the CU side. However, the data on the total number of game balls, the cumulative addition balls, and the cumulative subtraction balls are matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the transition to the test hitting mode is performed by inserting the test card into the CU, but instead or in addition to this, the transition command from the upper server 801 or the game arcade It may be controlled to shift to the trial hitting mode by remote control operation by the store clerk. Such transition to the trial hitting mode by the remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hitting mode by the remote control operation while waiting for a customer (may be a definite change). Then, two types of test modes, a first test mode used as an event outside the business in the game arcade, and a second test mode for confirmation after nail adjustment may be provided as the test mode.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no game balls (or points) in the trial mode, the CU sends a game ball addition command (or a point addition command) to P (or S). Enables addition of game balls (or addition of points) to enable games, but in P units (or S units) without sending a game ball addition command (or hold point addition command) from the CU side The game may be controlled so that the game can be continued even if the game ball (or the number of points held) is lost.

  (38) The C-ID described above is composed of fixed code data that never changes, but instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time It may be an ID code. Then, when a card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the read time, and the player is based on both the read time and the C-ID data. May be configured to be identified. For example, when the CU reads a C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and in the card, the C-ID is encrypted with T using ET (C-ID), and the ET (C-ID) and T And in pairs. CU deciphers its ET (C-ID) with T and extracts a C-ID by DT (ET (C-ID)).

  (39) In the above embodiment, the player is specified based on the C-ID to determine whether the same player is playing a game, but instead or in addition to that To provide biometric information reading means for reading biometric information such as fingerprints and veins of the player on the CU or P, and determine the identity of the player based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means Biometrics authentication may be employed.

  (40) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the data stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored along with the return of the card. However, in response to the return of the card, the current player gaming history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player gaming history data storage unit. You may control as follows. In that case, the stored data of the switched current player gaming history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  (41) In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 8 and the like, the C-ID match determination is performed on the P base side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 is sent to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received it. To determine whether the read C-ID matches the C-ID transmitted from the P-unit. Then, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs do not match, a clear command is transmitted to P base 2. In the P-unit 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is erased.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit with respect to P unit 2 Command information for performing addition update of new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 by taking over the game history data. This command information may be code data such as handover command information or the like, but the backup gaming history data for handover is stored on the CU side, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 Alternatively, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P-unit 2 as handover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in P units is not necessary.

  (42) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. Although what is performed on the side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P base side. That is, the gaming machine may have the following configuration.

It is possible to play a game by means of points, a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and a communication unit for communicating with a game device for adding points using game value owned by a player is provided, and winning is achieved A gaming machine to which points are added according to the occurrence of
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Point storage means for storing points;
Point updating means for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game;
The same as the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storing means when communication is started by being connected to the gaming apparatus Same determination means for determining whether or not a player of
A game machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control means for performing control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus.

  (43) In the embodiment described above, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission and reception. When a different C-ID is transmitted from P to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined as an error, and the CU may be controlled not to update the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls. . When controlled in this manner, C-ID may become temporarily out-of-order data due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In that case, if, for example, the C-ID contained in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that it is an error and transmits it. Addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the motion response. As a result, when a C-ID not corrupted due to noise is transmitted from the P base in transmission and reception of the next command and response, the operation response is obtained even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The game ball count (total game ball count) included in and the total game ball count stored in the CU will be inconsistent, and in the above embodiment, in such a case, the CU stores A command to correct the number of existing game balls is transmitted to the P-unit, and the number of game balls stored in the P-unit is rewritten to the number of stored balls on the CU side. As a result, the number of P game balls is rewritten to the previous number of old game balls updated based on the response immediately before the C-ID goes mad due to noise, and the game with the incorrect number of game balls is incorrect. There are cases where the number of balls can be rewritten.

  Even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side in order to eliminate such inconvenience, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so that it is judged as abnormal only when the C-ID in the response goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods can be considered as a concrete method of realizing this.

  First, as a first method, if the C-ID contained in the first response is inconsistent with the C-ID on the CU side, when sending the next command, the SQN is added to P without modification. Send. Then, in P, as described based on FIG. 55, it is determined that the response has not reached CU, and the transmission data is added to the number of added balls last time, and the number of added added balls etc. Control to transmit to CU as the next response is performed. In the CU, when the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, it is determined that it is appropriate and the number of added balls to which the previous transmission data has been added, etc. Update control of the number of balls is performed based on it. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of game balls. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the CU is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice consecutively. The number of game balls may not be updated based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the response, and thereafter predetermined error processing control may be performed.

  As the second method, during C-ID mismatch, the CU side adds and updates separately, and when the correct C-ID is received, the data separately added and updated is the total number of game balls, etc. Update collectively.

It will be as follows if the structure of the modification demonstrated above is put together.
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points;
Gaming apparatus side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming device side identification information storage means to the gaming machine;
The gaming machine is
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Gaming machine side identification information storage means for storing the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus;
The gaming device is
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
Point updating means for updating points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
Match the identification information sent under the control of the gaming machine side identification information transmission control means with the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means to match or not match Determination means,
The determination result of the matching determination means includes abnormality determining means for performing an abnormality determination when it is determined that the matching has not been made a predetermined number of times consecutively
The point updating means is
When the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means is performed, the update of the points corresponding to the total of the change amount of the points in the gaming machine during the period determined to be inconsistent by the alignment determination means Without doing
When it is determined that the consistency determination means is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means, the consistency determination means determines that there is an inconsistency. The points are updated on the basis of the total amount of change in points of the gaming machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, the game apparatus erroneously determines that the game apparatus is abnormal and the update information is updated even if the identification information that has been temporarily misplaced due to noise or the like is received despite the proper identification information being transmitted. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by not updating the points based on the above.

  (44) In the embodiment described above, the operation history is re-aggregated in the trial mode by the touch operation on the operation button icon such as the re-aggregate button displayed on the display unit 312. Alternatively, or in addition to that, by detecting the opening of the glass door 6, the game history data may be controlled to be re-aggregated again in the trial run mode.

  (45) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine receives a recording medium (card) and has a player-owned value (prepaid balance, the number of balls, or a player-owned value specified by recording information recorded in the recording medium) A gaming machine including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables the use of the number of stored balls for playing a game, and playing game media by firing game media in the gaming area It is a pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with points, and a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and the gaming value owned by the player is A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) including a communication unit that communicates with a gaming apparatus that uses points to add points, and points are added according to the occurrence of a winning.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned value-value prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls specified by the recording information received and recorded on the recording medium (card). Includes a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a game device (card unit 3) that enables the game to be used for playing a game, and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. The game can be started by setting “1”, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, and one game is ended, and the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result. It is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) in which winning can occur.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine can play a game with points, and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using a gaming value owned by a player (S communication control unit 82) and a variable display device capable of changing the display state, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is When one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and when the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result, winning can be generated, and points are added according to the occurrence of winning. It is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S).

  (46) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 144, the number of game balls stored and the number of points held by the CU, and the number and the number of game balls sent from the game machine are The CU determines whether they match or not, and if they do not match, it transmits a command for correction to adjust the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine side or the number of points held on the gaming machine to the number of game balls on the CU side or the number of points held. C-ID match / mismatch may be further added as a judgment criterion of. For example, even if the number of game balls stored and the number of points stored by the CU do not match the number of game balls and the number of points sent from the game machine, that alone does not transmit a correction command, and further from the game machine If the CU determines that the sent C-ID does not match the stored C-ID of the CU, it transmits a correction command. Thus, when an abnormality such as noise or the like that causes C-ID data to go wrong is generated, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and the number of points held on the gaming machine side to a correct value. Can.

  Furthermore, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the gaming machine matches the stored C-ID of the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. Thus, when an abnormality occurs such that the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine and the number of points in the gaming machine go out without the player being replaced, a correction command is transmitted to set the number of gaming balls and the number of gaming points on the gaming machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (47) In the above embodiment, the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit is erased by the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293, and the remaining 9 days Although one minute of memory data is shifted and stored in the memory area of an old day one by one, it is a time zone before the opening of the game arcade as a condition to execute the shift control of such P game history data It may be added. That is, on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the opening of the game arcade, shift control of the P game history data is executed.

  (48) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, but in addition to that, the LSIs 799 and 999 of the gaming machine It may be executed between the payout control units 17 and 117 and the P-unit communication control units 81 and 82 between the control boards 16 and 116.

  (49) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is shown to be input to the CU3. Alternatively or additionally, the clear command may be input to the CU3. By providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch, the above-described processing of clearing the game history data may be performed. The game history data may be cleared by remote control operation. Specifically, when the staff of the game arcade directs the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320 of CU3 to perform a clear operation, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (50) In the above embodiment, a slot machine that does not need to use any physical game media such as medals in a game is described as an example of the slot system of the point system. When such a slot machine is adopted, since the game medium is not required, it is not necessary to provide a transport path for the game medium and a storage unit for the game medium in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be miniaturized or reduced in cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine is adopted in which the points are updated in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or a game ball in a predetermined direction while adopting the point system. It is also conceivable to do.

  For example, the gaming machine is enclosed in a slot machine, and a circulation path is provided for circulating the enclosed gaming medium in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / insertion part which can discharge | release and insert a game medium as needed at the predetermined location of a circulation path.

  When the condition for adding points is established, the slot machine generates a number of game media according to the number of points to be added among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, from the predetermined first place in the circulation path to the second one. While moving to a location, add and update stored points, and send a response command for adding points to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored holding points.

  In addition, when the condition for subtraction of points is established, the slot machine selects the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted among the plurality of game media in the circulation path from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored point is memorized and updated, and a response command for subtracting the point is sent to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored holding points.

  Note that even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first place to the second place as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  In addition, it is possible to see through the game medium moving between the first place and the second place in order to make the player recognize that the points are updated corresponding to the movement of the game medium. It is desirable to provide the see-through portion at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Furthermore, if a plurality of moving paths for moving game media are provided between the first portion and the second portion, the holding path should be updated under the condition of one addition or subtraction condition. A game medium corresponding to the number of point renewals when the number of point renewals is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on the lending instruction is large, when the number of bets is the MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation having a sense of discomfort such that the movement of the game medium continues endlessly even though the update display of the points is ended.

  In addition, if the first portion and the second portion are arranged so as to be in the relationship between the upper portion and the lower portion in the vertical direction, the game medium is naturally moved by its own weight from the first portion to the second portion. It can be dropped and the movement mechanism of the game media can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is made to flow from the first place to the first place in both the addition update and the subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be made to flow from the first portion to the first portion only in one of the point addition update and the point subtraction update. Alternatively, a flow-down path for point addition update and a flow-down path for point subtraction update may be separately provided, and a perspective window for addition update visual check and a perspective window for subtraction update visual check may be respectively provided. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the above-mentioned game medium, since the game medium is spherical, circulation of game medium can be performed more smoothly than when medals are used. In addition, as the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball normally used in a game arcade. In this case, for example, assuming that five pachinko balls correspond to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of holding point = 1), the updating holding score of 5 when the holding points are updated. Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first place and the second place. In addition, pachinko balls that are viewed from the see-through window provided between the first place and the second place are "show balls" exclusively for showing the player that the points are being updated. Will function as

  (51) In the embodiment described above, when the payout control unit 17 detects that the launch ball detection switch 903 is on for the specified time or more (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of supplied game balls It is determined that an error has occurred that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 50), but the shot ball detection switch 903 itself is broken instead of the on state continuing because there are too many game balls. There is also a possibility that the detection signal is continuously output. Therefore, the light emitting and receiving portion of the discharge ball detecting switch 903 of the light emitting and receiving method may be slightly offset aside from the center line through which the balls of the collection ball passage path 901 pass. When configured in this way, light is projected from a position slightly offset aside from the center line of the game ball in which there are too many sealed balls and the beads are connected, and the light is received. A detection signal pulsating from the firing ball detection switch 903 is input to the payout control unit 17 as the game ball is fired and moved downward, and the payout control unit 17, based on the input of the pulsation signal, Control may be performed to determine that an abnormality has occurred in which the number of enclosed balls is too large, not the failure of the launch ball detection switch 903.

  (52) In the embodiment described above, the launch unit 38 uses the motor (launch motor 18) as a drive source, but instead, a solenoid may be used as a drive source. In that case, the plunger position in the non-excitation state of the solenoid is detected by the origin sensor as the origin, and the payout control unit 17 determines various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  In the embodiment described above, as described in FIG. 112, the step of “Wait for 60 seconds abnormally waiting?” Of S101 and the “card being inserted?” Of S102 (or “point = 0?” Of S102A. In step S101, "waiting for a customer for 60 seconds abnormal progress?" Step only, or in step S102 "inserting card?" (Or in step S102A). Only the step of "point = 0?") May be performed.

  (53) In the embodiment described above, loading the pachinko balls by driving the transport motor 40 at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2 by operating the ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay substrate 921; The ball removal of the enclosed ball is performed by driving the 195a, but alternatively or additionally, the infrared ray of the card unit 3 is emitted by operating the remote control possessed by the attendant of the game arcade When the unit 320 receives light, a predetermined command is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 receiving it drives the transport motor 40 at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2. The loading of pachinko balls or the removal of the enclosed ball by driving the ball removal motor 195a may be performed.

  The following will list the effects obtained from combinations of various means and the like included in the present embodiment.

(1-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system includes a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330 and 20).
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
And D. point updating means (disbursement control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the additional point storage means according to the amount of change.
The game machine performs game control based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (when the number of game balls counter reaches 0, the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped),
When the signal for requesting the end of the game (the operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the gaming device determines the points stored in the main point storage means as the points at the end of the game. It includes point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 48).

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device is
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored in the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine;
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payment control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. The information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 7, FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission of the update information. . For this reason, the gaming device can perform the latest point management by updating the points by the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus (the value of the game ball counter of FIG. 7) , Figure 46),
The gaming device is
It includes a determination means (FIG. 7; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(1-5) The instruction information transmitting unit stores, when the determination unit determines that there is a mismatch, the main point storage unit stores the points stored by the additional point storage unit. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for correcting to a point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls to P).
The gaming machine is a point correction means for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information. Correction according to.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 26; once in 200 ms) shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the change amount of the points notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to finely notify the amount of change in points to the gaming device.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining points required to continue the game based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (the payout control means (payout control) Part 17 (FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of the update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored in the gaming apparatus and the actual points (the number of gaming balls stored in the gaming machine) and Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a judgment based on the actual points.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing a game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction (prohibition request present) in FIGS. 50 to 52).
A gaming prohibition means (the payout control unit 17 stops the driving of the striking ball firing motor 18) for making the gaming by the points not be performed when the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the gaming prohibition. 50 to 51 are included.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming apparatus can control the prohibition of the game by the gaming machine.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing the gaming machine to set the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to the initial value (FIG. 48, Operation instruction (with clear request) in FIG. 82),
In the gaming machine, the additional point storage means stores the information based on receipt of information for instructing the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to be an initial value. It includes point initialization means (FIG. 48, FIG. 82 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) which sets the value of the point to the initial value.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to instruct the gaming apparatus side to initialize the points stored in the gaming machine.

(1-10) A connection portion (connector 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize is provided. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using game-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  (1-11) Points that the points stored in the point storage means are determined as points at the end of the game when a signal (operation signal of the return button 322) requesting the end of the game is input A determination unit (main control unit 323; FIG. 48) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-12) When points received by the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, the received points and the point storage means Including determination means (FIG. 7; determination of the number of game balls to determine the consistency) with the stored points;
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means when the determination means determines that the points are inconsistent It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to be transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-14) The gaming apparatus has an information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval (FIG. 26; 200 ms) shorter than a firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) of the gaming ball in the gaming machine. 1) to the gaming machine in sequence.
The point update means sequentially updates the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information received sequentially (main control unit 323, FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the game device has the change in the points on the game machine side reflected finely. Point management becomes possible.

(2-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and playing a game on the gaming machine using a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to be enabled, comprising:
The gaming device is
A recording medium reception unit (card insertion and ejection port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
The player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 41; transmits an operation instruction including the C-ID after the card is inserted) for controlling transmission of the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine CU communication control unit 80, S3 of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Player specific information storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) storing the player specific information transmitted by the control of the player specific information transmission control means )When,
Based on the fact that the player identification information is transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the transmitted player identification information and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) which performs the same determination processing which determines whether the same player is specified with information.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus to the gaming machine In the gaming machine, the player specifying information is stored, and thereafter, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the transmitted player In order to perform the same determination processing to determine whether or not the same player is specified based on the specific information and the player specific information that has already been stored, the sameness between the previous player and the current player Can be determined, and the inconvenience that they are regarded as the same player despite being different players can be prevented.

(2-2) In the gaming system according to the above (2-1), the gaming apparatus records the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium. Media discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging the card shown in FIG. 48);
The game history data totaling means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; tallying game history data for each player specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the player specifying information transmission control means) Including the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 and the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for display,
After the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means, the player history information collecting means reads the player specifying information by the player specifying information reading means and transmits the player specifying information transmission control means Based on the fact that the same judging means judges that they are the same based on what has been made (FIG. 42; on the condition that it is judged as Y in S9), the same judgment It may be configured to include a handover counting means (FIG. 42; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data collected as the game history data of the previous player. If the player who played the game left the seat and returned again to resume the game in order to accumulate and count the game, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat As a result, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data by taking over, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player.

  (2-3) In the gaming system according to (2-2) above, on condition that determination is made not to be the same by the same determination means (FIG. 42; on condition that it is determined as N in S9) A game history data deleting means (FIG. 42; S15) for deleting game history data corresponding to the player specified by the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storing means; May be

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data corresponding to the previous player is erased when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data of the previous player is compared with that of the previous player. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the current player.

(2-4) In the gaming system according to (2-2) or (2-3), the gaming history data totaling means is
In-game data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present player game history data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) storing game history data of the player in the game;
End data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; backup data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) for backing up the game history data of the player who finished the game;
According to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharge means, the end data storage means backs up the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means as the game history data of the player who finished the game ( In FIG. 8 and FIG. 145; receiving the card return notification, the storage data of the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit), and the same determination unit determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means (FIG. 8, FIG. 8) for switching to a state where game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as game history data of a player playing a game by the in-game data storage means 145, FIG. 42; S12) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination unit that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage unit is the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage unit. In order to be switched to the state to be stored as game history data, take over the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means in the subsequent games, add new update history history data, and cumulatively store it. Can.

(2-5) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-4), the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. And
The player identification information reading means reads, as the player identification information, an ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit (FIG. 41; C- of inserted card) The card reader / writer 327 may be configured to read the ID.

  According to such a configuration, the player can play the game since the ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read by the player specification information reading means as the player specification information. When the player specifying information is input, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of accepting the recording medium to the gaming apparatus to play a game, and the player specifying information inputting operation separately from the reception of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(2-6) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-5), the gaming device is
A recording medium ejection unit (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card shown in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) of FIG. 49) for accepting operation for interrupting the game;
Interruption control means (provisional control means) for prohibiting a game by another player until the resumption of the game by the player playing the game before the interruption is accepted when the operation to interrupt the game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means Figure 42; S1, S2, S5),
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information by the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without the operation to interrupt the game being performed. Based on what has been done, the same determination processing is performed (FIG. 42; N → S3 → S8, S9 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat for small use etc., by performing the suspension operation, it is possible to set the interruption state to prohibit the game by the other player until the resumption of the game by the player. . However, since the same determination processing is performed when the player returns after the player leaves the seat without performing such an interruption operation, the identity between the previous player and the current player is determined. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that it can be determined and it is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

  (2-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-6), the gaming machine performs control to transmit the determination result by the same determination means to the gaming apparatus. The determination result transmission control means (FIG. 42; S7, S14) may be configured to be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the identity of the player on the gaming device side.

  (2-8) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (2-2) to (2-4), the handover counting means is a member recording medium issued to a player of the member is the recording medium reception unit. New game history data is accumulated and totaled with respect to game history data corresponding to a player determined to be identical on condition that the game is accepted (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; only in the case of C-ID of member card) It may be configured to be stored in the current player gaming history data and to count the gaming history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit. In order to be aggregated, it is possible to limit the advantage of the transfer accumulation of the game history data to the player of the member, and to promote the player to become a member.

(2-9) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a communication unit (FIG. 6; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables a player to play a game using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
A recording medium reception unit (card insertion and ejection port 309) for receiving a recording medium;
Player specific information reading means (card reader / writer 327 etc.) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 41; transmits an operation instruction including the C-ID after the card is inserted) for controlling transmission of the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine CU communication control unit 80, S3 of FIG.
The player identification information transmission control means performs control to transmit the player identification information to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player (C-ID to P Control sending).

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus to the gaming machine, and further the gaming is performed. Since the player identification information is transmitted to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player, the gaming machine stores the player identification information sent earlier, and then, When the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the same game can be played by the transmitted player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored. It becomes possible to perform the same determination processing to determine whether or not a player is specified, and it is possible to determine the sameness between the previous player and the current player, and the same player is obtained despite being a different player. I consider it a player It is possible to prevent the convenience.

(2-10) In the gaming apparatus of (2-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player identification information reading means reads, as player identification information, an ID for recording medium identification recorded in the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit (FIG. 41; C-ID of inserted card Card reader / writer 327 may be configured to read).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for recording medium identification recorded in the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read as the player identification information, the player inputs the player identification information By performing an operation of accepting a recording medium to a gaming apparatus to play a game, it becomes possible to input player specific information, and the player is forced to perform an input operation of the player specific information separately from the reception of the recording medium. It can be prevented.

(2-11) In the gaming apparatus of the above (2-9) or (2-10), the recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium Media ejection means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card shown in FIG. 48);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) of FIG. 49) for accepting operation for interrupting the game;
Interruption control means (provisional control means) for prohibiting a game by another player until the resumption of the game by the player playing the game before the interruption is accepted when the operation to interrupt the game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means Figure 42; S1, S2, S5),
The player identification information transmission control means is the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejection means without the operation to interrupt the game being performed. Control may be performed to transmit information to the gaming machine (FIG. 42; S3).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat for small use etc., by performing the suspension operation, it is possible to set the interruption state to prohibit the game by the other player until the resumption of the game by the player. . However, since the same determination processing is performed when the player returns after the player leaves the seat without performing such an interruption operation, the identity between the previous player and the current player is determined. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that it can be determined and it is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

(2-12) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (2-9) to (2-11), the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium. A recording medium ejection unit (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card shown in FIG. 48) to eject;
After the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading unit after the recording medium is discharged and the player specifying information transmission control unit performs control to transmit the player specifying information to the game machine, Sameness of receiving from the gaming machine the result of determination of the sameness between the player who played a game before the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharge means and the player who plays a game after the discharge of the recording medium The determination result receiving means (FIG. 42; CU communication control unit 80 for receiving the information transmitted in S15 and S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, in order to receive the determination result by the same determination means from the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the identity of the player on the gaming apparatus side.

  (2-13) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of the above (2-9) to (2-12), the player specifying information reading means is a recording medium for members that is issued to a player of the member is the recording The player identification information may be read on the condition that it is received by the medium reception unit (C-ID is recorded only in the member recording medium).

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information can be read and the same determination process can be performed on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit.

(2-14) A still further aspect of the present invention is a player-owned value value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) specified by the recording information received on the recording medium (card) and recorded on the recording medium. Alternatively, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) is provided with a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with the gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables the number of stored balls to be used for gaming.
A player specifying information storage unit (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present player gaming history data of effect control unit 292 for display) that receives and stores player specifying information (C-ID etc.) specifying a player who plays a game Storage unit),
The same determination means (FIG. 42) performs the same determination process to determine whether the same player is specified by the received player specifying information and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means. S8, S9).

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is stored, and thereafter the same player is specified by the received player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored. Can determine the sameness between the previous player and the current player, and the player is regarded as the same player despite the fact that they are different players. An inconvenience can be prevented.

(2-15) In the gaming machine of the above (2-14), gaming history data tallying means for tallying gaming history data for each player specified by the received player specifying information (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; game history Including the normal mode processing unit of the data management unit 291 and the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for a display
The game history data totaling means is determined to be the same on condition that the same determination means determines that they are the same (FIG. 42; on the condition that it is determined to be Y in S9). It includes a handover counting means (FIG. 42; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to game history data corresponding to the player.

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to game history data corresponding to a player determined to be the same on condition that the previous player and the current player are the same. In order to be counted up, when the player who played a game leaves the seat and comes back again and resumes the game, it is determined to be the same player and takes over the gaming history data before leaving the seat Thus, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data, and to prevent the problem that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player.

(2-16) In the gaming machine of (2-15), the gaming history data totaling means is
In-game data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present player game history data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) storing game history data of the player in the game;
End data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; backup data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) for backing up the game history data of the player who finished the game;
In response to the recording medium being discharged from the gaming apparatus, the end data storage means backs up the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means as the game history data of the player who has ended the game. (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; storage data of the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit upon receipt of a card return notification), and the same determination unit determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means for switching the game history data backed up by the end data storage means to the state stored as the game history data of the player in the game by the in-game data storage means (FIG. 8) , FIG. 145, FIG. 42; S12) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination unit that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage unit is the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage unit. In order to be switched to the state to be stored as game history data, take over the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means in the subsequent games, add new update history history data, and cumulatively store it. Can.

  (2-17) In the gaming machine of the above (2-15) or (2-16), it is stored in the player specifying information storage means on condition that the determination is not made by the same determination means. The game history data deleting means (FIG. 42; S15) for deleting the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the specified player specifying information may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data corresponding to the previous player is erased when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data of the previous player is compared with that of the previous player. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the current player.

  (2-18) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2-14) to (2-17), the same judging means suspends the game and resumes the game by the player who has played the game before the interruption. The same determination processing is performed when the player specifying information is received after the recording medium is discharged without performing the middle step operation for stopping the game by the other player until the game is stopped (FIG. 42 (FIG. 42). N → S3 → S8, S9) may be configured in S1.

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat for small use etc., by performing the suspension operation, it is possible to set the interruption state to prohibit the game by the other player until the resumption of the game by the player. . However, since the same determination processing is performed when the player returns after the player leaves the seat without performing such an interruption operation, the identity between the previous player and the current player is determined. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that it can be determined and it is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

  (2-19) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2-14) to (2-18), a same determination result transmission control means (a control for transmitting a determination result by the same determination means to the gaming device FIG. 42; S7, S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the identity of the player on the gaming device side.

  (2-20) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (2-15) to (2-17), the transfer counting means receives the member recording medium issued to the member player in the gaming apparatus. New game history data is accumulated and aggregated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on condition that the game is performed (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present game only in the case of C-ID of member card) The game history may be stored in the player game history data to count the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit. In order to be aggregated, it is possible to limit the advantage of the transfer accumulation of the game history data to the player of the member, and to promote the player to become a member.

(3-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and playing a game on the gaming machine using a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to be enabled, comprising:
The gaming device is
A recording medium reception unit (card insertion and ejection port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
Player specifying information storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; current player game history data storage unit of the game data storage unit 392) for storing the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means;
It is determined whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means The same determination unit (FIG. 149; S20) for performing processing;
The gaming apparatus transmits, to the gaming machine, command information indicating that the same determination unit determines that the determination is the same (FIG. 147, FIG. 148, FIG. 149; and transmits a command according to S21). ,
The gaming machine performs predetermined processing (FIGS. 147 and 148; processing of returning the gaming history data of the backup data storage unit to the current player gaming history data storage unit) based on the reception of the command information.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is identical to the player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination processing is performed to determine whether or not a player is specified, the sameness between the previous player and the current player can be determined, and the same game can be obtained despite the fact that they are different players. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that you regard as a person.

(3-2) In the gaming system according to the above (3-1), the gaming machine is a game history data totaling unit that totals game history data for each player (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; game history data management unit 291 And the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for the display
The above-mentioned game history data tallying means has a new game history with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on condition that the command information has been received (FIG. 149; determined as Y by S22 in FIG. 149). The present invention may be configured to include a handover aggregation unit (FIG. 149; S12) that executes a process of accumulating and aggregating data as the predetermined process.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data collected as the game history data of the previous player. If the player who played the game left the seat and returned again to resume the game in order to accumulate and count the game, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat As a result, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data by taking over, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player.

(3-3) In the gaming system according to (3-1) or (3-2), the gaming device is
A recording medium ejection unit (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card shown in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
A game history data storage means for storing game history data of a player who has played a game before the storage medium is discharged even after the storage medium is discharged by the storage medium discharge means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; includes the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392;
The game history data of the previous player stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, since the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine, the gaming machine that has received it is Since the gaming history data of the current player can be accumulated and aggregated with respect to the received gaming history data, the player who played the game temporarily leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. It is determined that the player is the same player, taking over the game history data before leaving to enable cumulative aggregation of the game history data, and the game history data before and after leaving despite the same player It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of disconnection.

(3-4) In the gaming system according to (3-2), the gaming apparatus records the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Media discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging the card shown in FIG. 48);
The gaming history data totaling means
In-game data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; present player game history data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) storing game history data of the player in the game;
Completion data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; backup data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) for backing up the game history data of the player who finished the game;
According to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharge means, the end data storage means backs up the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means as the game history data of the player who finished the game ( 147 and 148; receiving the card return notification, shift and store the stored data of the current player gaming history data storage unit in the backup data storage unit), and the same determination unit determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means for switching the game history data backed up by the end data storage means to a state in which the game data storage means stores the game history data of the player in the game (FIG. 147, FIG. 148, FIG. 149; S12) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination unit that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage unit is the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage unit. In order to be switched to the state to be stored as game history data, take over the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means in the subsequent games, add new update history history data, and cumulatively store it. Can.

(3-5) The game device ejects the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium (a card for discharging the card shown in FIG. 48) Reader / writer 327),
In the gaming machine, when the game is resumed after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming apparatus (FIG. 149; a different command is transmitted). Game history data erasing means (FIG. 149; S15) for erasing the game history data of the player who played the game before the ejection of the recording medium under the condition that the determination of N is made in S22). May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, when a different player starts playing a game after the player who played the game leaves the game, the game history data of the away player is erased. The game history data of a new player can be newly added up without taking over the game history data of.

(3-6) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (3-1) to (3-5), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium. And
The player identification information reading means reads, as the player identification information, an ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit (FIG. 41; C- of inserted card) The card reader / writer 327 may be configured to read the ID.

  According to such a configuration, the player can play the game since the ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read by the player specification information reading means as the player specification information. When the player specifying information is input, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of accepting the recording medium to the gaming apparatus to play a game, and the player specifying information inputting operation separately from the reception of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(3-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (3-1) to (3-6), the gaming device is
A recording medium ejection unit (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card shown in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) of FIG. 49) for accepting operation for interrupting the game;
Interruption control means (provisional control means) for prohibiting a game by another player until the resumption of the game by the player playing the game before the interruption is accepted when the operation to interrupt the game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means Figure 42; S1, S2, S5),
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information by the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without the operation to interrupt the game being performed. Based on what has been done, the same determination processing may be performed (FIG. 149; N → S20 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat for small use etc., by performing the suspension operation, it is possible to set the interruption state to prohibit the game by the other player until the resumption of the game by the player. . However, since the same determination processing is performed when the player returns after the player leaves the seat without performing such an interruption operation, the identity between the previous player and the current player is determined. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that it can be determined and it is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

  (3-8) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (3-2) to (3-7), the handover counting means is a member recording medium issued to a player of the member is the recording medium reception unit New game history data is accumulated and aggregated with respect to game history data corresponding to a player determined to be the same on condition that the game is accepted (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; only in the case of C-ID of member card) It may be configured to be stored in the current player gaming history data and to count the gaming history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit. In order to be aggregated, it is possible to limit the advantage of the transfer accumulation of the game history data to the player of the member, and to promote the player to become a member.

(3-9) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a communication unit (FIG. 6; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables a player to play a game using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
A recording medium reception unit (card insertion and ejection port 309) for receiving a recording medium;
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
Player specifying information storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; current player game history data storage unit of the game data storage unit 392) for storing the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means;
The same determination means for performing the same determination process of determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specification information and the player specification information stored in the player specification information storage means (FIG. 149; S20 )When,
Command information transmission control means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148, FIG. 149; S21) for performing control to transmit command information indicating that the same determination has been made by the same determination means to the gaming machine. .

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is identical to the player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination processing is performed to determine whether or not a player is specified, the sameness between the previous player and the current player can be determined, and the same game can be obtained despite the fact that they are different players. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that you regard as a person.

(3-10) In the gaming machine of (3-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player identification information reading means reads, as player identification information, an ID for recording medium identification recorded in the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit (FIG. 41; C-ID of inserted card Card reader / writer 327 may be configured to read).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for recording medium identification recorded in the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read as the player identification information, the player inputs the player identification information By performing an operation of accepting a recording medium to a gaming apparatus to play a game, it becomes possible to input player specific information, and the player is forced to perform an input operation of the player specific information separately from the reception of the recording medium. It can be prevented.

(3-11) In the gaming apparatus of (3-9) or (3-10), recording is performed to eject the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Media ejection means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card shown in FIG. 48);
A game history data storage means for storing game history data of a player who has played a game before the storage medium is discharged even after the storage medium is discharged by the storage medium discharge means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; includes the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392;
The game history data of the previous player stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, since the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine, the gaming machine that has received it is Since the gaming history data of the current player can be accumulated and aggregated with respect to the received gaming history data, the player who played the game temporarily leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. It is determined that the player is the same player, taking over the game history data before leaving to enable cumulative aggregation of the game history data, and the game history data before and after leaving despite the same player It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of disconnection.

(3-12) In the gaming apparatus of (3-9) to (3-11), recording is performed to eject the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium. Media ejection means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card shown in FIG. 48);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) of FIG. 49) for accepting operation for interrupting the game;
When an operation for interrupting the game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, a process of controlling the interruption state for prohibiting the game by another player until the resumption of the game by the player who played the game before the interruption is controlled Interrupt control means (FIG. 149; S1, S2, S5) to be performed,
In the same determination means, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without the operation to interrupt the game being performed. Based on the above, the same determination processing may be performed (FIG. 149; N → S20 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat for small use etc., by performing the suspension operation, it is possible to set the interruption state to prohibit the game by the other player until the resumption of the game by the player. . However, since the same determination processing is performed when the player returns after the player leaves the seat without performing such an interruption operation, the identity between the previous player and the current player is determined. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that it can be determined and it is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

  (3-13) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of the above (3-9) to (3-12), the player specifying information reading means is a recording medium for members that has been issued to a player of the member as the recording medium. The player identification information may be read (C-ID is recorded only on the member recording medium) on condition that the medium reception unit receives the information.

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information can be read and the same determination process can be performed on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit.

(4-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and determines the player-owned value (prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium. A communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a game apparatus (card unit 3) to be made usable for gaming is provided, and a game is played by firing game media in the game area It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S),
Game history data totaling means for totaling game history data for each player (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; present mode player game history data storage unit of normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 and effect control unit 292 for display) When,
Game history data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; current player gaming history data storage unit and backup data storage unit of the game data storage unit 392) for storing the game history data aggregated by the game history data aggregation unit Including
The game history data totaling means receives the command information (the same command) indicating that the player is the same player from the gaming machine (FIG. 149; Y is determined in S22), the game It includes handover totaling means (FIG. 149; S12) which accumulates and totals new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data collected as the game history data of the previous player. If the player who played the game left the seat and returned again to resume the game in order to accumulate and count the game, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat As a result, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data by taking over, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player.

  (4-2) In the gaming machine of (4-1), when the game is resumed after the recording medium is discharged, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming apparatus (FIG. 149; difference) A game history data eraser (FIG. 149; erases the game history data of the player who was playing the game before discharging the recording medium, on the condition that the command is transmitted and the determination of N is made in S22). It may be configured to include S15).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, since the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine, the gaming machine that has received it is Since the gaming history data of the current player can be accumulated and aggregated with respect to the received gaming history data, the player who played the game temporarily leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. It is determined that the player is the same player, taking over the game history data before leaving to enable cumulative aggregation of the game history data, and the game history data before and after leaving despite the same player It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of disconnection.

(4-3) In the gaming machine of the above (4-1) or (4-2), the gaming history data totaling means is
In-game data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; present player game history data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) storing game history data of the player in the game;
Completion data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; backup data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) for backing up the game history data of the player who finished the game;
In response to the recording medium being discharged from the gaming apparatus, the end data storage means backs up the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means as the game history data of the player who has ended the game. (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; storage data of the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit by reception of the card return notification), and the command information is received from the gaming device Data storage switching means for switching to a state where game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as game history data of a player playing a game by the in-game data storage means (FIG. 147, FIG. 148, Fig. 149; S12) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage unit is used as the game history data of the player playing the game by the in-game data storage unit. In order to be switched to the storage state, it is possible to take over the gaming history data stored in the in-game data storage means in the subsequent games and add, update and accumulate new gaming history data thereto.

  (4-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (4-1) to (4-3), the transfer counting means receives the member recording medium issued to the member player in the gaming apparatus. New game history data is accumulated and aggregated with respect to the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means on the condition that the game history data is stored (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; Only in the case of the ID, it may be configured to be stored in the current player game history data to count the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium reception unit. In order to be aggregated, it is possible to limit the advantage of the transfer accumulation of the game history data to the player of the member, and to promote the player to become a member.

(5-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine capable of playing a game of points is provided, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value owned by a player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising
The gaming machine is
Gaming machine side communication means (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with the game apparatus;
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter, addition number) for specifying the amount of change (the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls) of points according to the use for games and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction counter),
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter, point counter) for storing points
Secondary point updating means (dispensing control unit 17, dispensing control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the auxiliary point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for controlling transmission of update information capable of specifying the amount of change and points stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus , Send an operation response including the number of game balls),
A player identification information storage unit (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present game of display effect control unit 292 for storing player identification information (C-ID etc.) capable of identifying a player who is playing a game with the gaming machine Player game history data storage unit),
The player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 29, control for transmitting the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming device at the start of communication with the gaming device) 39, 67-84; send recovery response including C-ID);
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (a RAM for storing "the number of game balls", a RAM for storing "the number of points"),
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
Point updating means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
A player identification information reading unit (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading the player identification information;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started by being connected to the gaming machine To determine whether or not the same player is identified (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, 83; C-ID included in recovery response and A main control unit 323) that determines the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
When it is determined by the same determination means that they are the same, point storage control is performed to store the point sent by the control of the information transmission control means as the point at the current point in the main point storage means Storage control means (steps shown by broken lines in FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80 and 83).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming apparatus and the player read by the player specifying information reading means Whether or not the same player is specified is determined by the specific information, and when it is determined that they are the same, the main point storage means as the current point is the points stored on the gaming machine side The player identification information is read by the player identification information reading means so that the same player as the player before the start of communication is established after the game device is connected to the game machine to store the If it is determined to be the same by the same determination means, the points held by the player who played the game at the stage before the start of communication are stored in the main point storage means of the gaming machine after the start of communication, Players are not disadvantaged It is possible to continue with the game.

  (5-2) In the gaming system according to the above (5-1), the storage control means communicates by a predetermined time (20 minutes) after the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted. May be configured to perform the above-mentioned point storage control under the condition that the above is started (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have elapsed even if the C-ID is determined to be the same) .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus has been discontinued, the transmitted points are stored in the main point storage means as points at the present time Since no point storage control is performed, it is possible to prevent a waste of performing point storage control even when, for example, a time which has far exceeded a replacement operation time for replacing a new gaming device.

(5-3) In the gaming system according to the above (5-1) or (5-2), the information transmission control means may include the update information and the points stored in the additional point storage means. Perform control to periodically (Fig. 26; every 200 ms) to send to the gaming device,
The gaming device is
Determination means for determining the consistency between the periodically transmitted points and the points stored in the main point storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 144; determination of coincidence between the number of game balls and the number of points) When,
The gaming machine is configured to correct correction points for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means to the points stored in the main point storage means when it is determined that the determination means is inconsistent. Send (to send correction instruction command),
The gaming machine is a point correction means (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) which corrects the points stored in the auxiliary point storage means based on the correction information transmitted. The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the holding points corrected according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(5-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game of points and where points are added according to the occurrence of a prize. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) including a CU communication control unit 80) and adding points by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) owned by a player,
A point storage means for storing points (a RAM for storing "the number of game balls", a RAM for storing "the number of points"),
A player identification information reading means (card reader / writer 327 etc.) for reading player identification information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit has update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, and updating on the game machine side according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize Receiving the point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine (FIG. 46; receiving an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of gaming balls);
Further, the gaming device may
Point updating means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started by being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. 70-72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, FIG. 83; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card Main control section 323) which determines the identity with
Storage control means for performing point storage control that causes the point storage means to store the point received by the communication unit as a point at the current point when it is determined by the same determination means that they are the same 70 to FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, and FIG.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming apparatus is identical to the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means. It is determined whether or not the player is specified, and when it is determined that they are the same, in order to store the points stored in the gaming machine side as the current points in the main point storage means, For example, when a game device breaks down and the broken game device is replaced with a new game device and connected to a gaming machine to start communication, the same player who was playing a game at the time of breakdown When the player is made to read the player specifying information by the player specifying information reading means to continue the game, the same judging means is judged to be the same, and the game is performed at the stage before replacing with the new game device. The game played The lifting points are being taken over stored in serving a master point storage means a new gaming device that has been replaced, it is possible the player to continue the game without detriment.

  (5-5) In the gaming apparatus according to (5-4), the storage control means communicates by a predetermined time (20 minutes) after the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus is discontinued. May be configured to perform the above-mentioned point storage control on the condition that the start is started (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have elapsed even if the C-ID is determined to be the same) .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus has been discontinued, the transmitted points are stored in the main point storage means as points at the present time Since no point storage control is performed, it is possible to prevent a waste of performing point storage control even when, for example, a time which has far exceeded a replacement operation time for replacing a new gaming device.

(5-6) In the gaming apparatus of the above (5-5), the points being updated on the gaming machine side according to the use for a game and the occurrence of a prize are periodically made from the gaming machine (FIG. 26; Determination means for determining the consistency between the received points and the points stored in the point storage means when received every 200 ms) (FIG. 7, FIG. 144; the number of game balls and the number of points) To match the
A control for transmitting correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means is transmitted to the gaming machine when it is determined by the determination means to be inconsistent. The apparatus may be configured to include correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(6-1) The present invention is provided with a communication unit that communicates with a gaming apparatus that can play a game with points and adds points by using a game-owned value owned by a player, in response to the occurrence of a prize. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which points are added,
Specifying means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of prizes;
Point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Point updating means (dispensing control unit 17, 117) for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of added balls) for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the change amount and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus Send an operation response including the number of balls subtracted and the number of balls played)
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present player gaming history data storage portion of effect control portion 292 for display device) for storing player identification information for identifying a player who plays a game;
Communication with the gaming device is started as information for determining the identity between a player who plays a game after connection of the gaming machine and the gaming device and a player who has played a game before the connection. Player specific information transmission control means (FIG. 29, FIG. 39, FIG. 67) for performing control to transmit the player specific information stored in the player specific information storage means from the communication unit to the ~ FIG. 84; sending a recovery response containing a C-ID).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player playing the game after connecting the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus plays the game before the connection. The player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage unit is transmitted from the communication unit to the game apparatus as information for determining the identity with the player who played It is possible to determine the identity between the player and the player who is playing a game before the connection, and to prevent the inconvenience that the player is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

(6-2) In the gaming machine according to (6-1), the information transmission control unit transmits the update information and the points stored in the point storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus Control to transmit periodically (Fig. 26; every 200 ms),
When the communication unit determines that there is a mismatch as a result of the determination of the consistency between the result of updating the points based on the update information by the gaming device and the points stored in the point storage means Receive the correction information transmitted from the gaming device (reception of a correction instruction command),
It further comprises holding point correction means (the payout control unit 117 corrects the number of holding points according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the points stored in the holding point storage means based on the received correction information. It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(7-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 and slot machine 2S) in which a game can be played with points and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and game value owned by a player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter, addition number) for specifying the amount of change (the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls) of points according to the use for games and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction counter),
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter, point counter) for storing points
Secondary point updating means (dispensing control unit 17, dispensing control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the auxiliary point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for controlling transmission of update information capable of specifying the amount of change and points stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus , Send an operation response including the number of game balls),
A player specifying information storage unit (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; present game of the effect control unit 292 for a display unit) storing player specifying information (C-ID etc.) capable of specifying a player who is playing a game with the gaming machine Player game history data storage unit),
The player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 29, control for transmitting the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming device at the start of communication with the gaming device) 39, 67-84; send recovery response including C-ID);
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (a RAM for storing "the number of game balls", a RAM for storing "the number of points"),
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
Point updating means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer 327 etc.) for reading player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started by being connected to the gaming machine To determine whether or not the same player is identified (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, 83; C-ID included in recovery response and A main control unit 323) that determines the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
An external output control means (FIG. 70-FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 75, FIG. 75, FIG. 75, and FIG. 75) performs control to externally output holding points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, and the steps shown by broken lines in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming apparatus is identical to the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means. It is determined whether the player is specified or not, and when it is determined that they are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, ie, the points stored on the gaming machine side are externally output Therefore, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the points stored and stored by the player by storing and storing the points externally output in the management device or the like.

  (7-2) In the gaming system according to the above (7-1), the external output control means transmits by the control of the player specifying information transmission control means when it is determined by the same determination means that they are not the same. 70-72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, and FIG. 83, the C-ID is also transmitted together. May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information of the player is compared with the player identification information stored and held by storing and holding the player identification information output externally as well. It becomes possible to determine the player's identity and to make up for the loss after confirming the player's identity.

(7-3) In the gaming system according to the above (7-1) or (7-2), the information transmission control means may include the update information and the points stored in the additional point storage means. Perform control to periodically (Fig. 26; every 200 ms) to send to the gaming device,
The gaming device is
Determination means for determining the consistency between the periodically transmitted points and the points stored in the main point storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 144; determination of coincidence between the number of game balls and the number of points) When,
The gaming machine is configured to correct correction points for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means to the points stored in the main point storage means when it is determined that the determination means is inconsistent. Send (to send correction instruction command),
The gaming machine is a point correction means (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) which corrects the points stored in the auxiliary point storage means based on the correction information transmitted. The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the holding points corrected according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(7-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game of points and where points are added according to the occurrence of a prize. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) including a CU communication control unit 80) and adding points by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) owned by a player,
A point storage means for storing points (a RAM for storing "the number of game balls", a RAM for storing "the number of points"),
A player identification information reading means (card reader / writer 327 etc.) for reading player identification information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit has update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, and updating on the game machine side according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize Receiving the point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine (FIG. 46; receiving an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of gaming balls);
Further, the gaming device may
Point updating means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started by being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. 70-72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, FIG. 83; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card Main control section 323) which determines the identity with
Point-to-point external output means (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80) externally outputting the points received by the communication unit when it is determined that the points are the same by the same determination means. , Steps shown by broken lines in FIG. 83).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming apparatus is identical to the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means. It is determined whether the player is specified or not, and when it is determined that they are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, ie, the points stored on the gaming machine side are externally output Therefore, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the points stored and stored by the player by storing and storing the points externally output in the management device or the like.

  (7-5) In the gaming machine according to (7-4), the player identification information received by the communication unit when the point external output unit is determined not to be the same by the same determination unit. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, 83, and the C-ID is also transmitted at the same time. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, the player identification information of the player is compared with the player identification information stored and held by storing and holding the player identification information output externally as well. It becomes possible to determine the player's identity and to make up for the loss after confirming the player's identity.

(7-6) In the gaming apparatus of the above (7-4) or (7-5), the points which are updated on the gaming machine side according to the use for the game and the occurrence of the prize are compared to the gaming machine Determination means for determining the consistency between the received point and the point stored in the point storage means when received periodically (FIG. 26; every 200 ms) (FIG. 7, FIG. 144; Determine the match between the number of game balls and the points earned),
A control for transmitting correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means is transmitted to the gaming machine when it is determined by the determination means to be inconsistent. The apparatus may be configured to include correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(8-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), A gaming system comprising: a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables a gaming machine to play a game by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player;
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of a game on the game machine (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present P game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for display unit or this S unit game History data storage unit),
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Gaming history data erasing means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means;
Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; game history data transmitting clear notification) for controlling transmission of a clear command to the gaming apparatus when the game history data deleting means deletes the game history data Management unit 291),
The gaming device is
Gaming apparatus side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on the game history data;
And a clear processing unit (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) that performs a clear processing of the history display according to the clear command transmitted by the control of the clear command transmission control unit.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the gaming history data is erased on the gaming machine side, the clear command is transmitted to the gaming apparatus, and the gaming apparatus side clears the history display according to the clear command. In order to be performed, it is possible to prevent a defect in history display on the gaming machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

(8-2) In the gaming system according to (8-1), the gaming history data storage unit is:
Today's history data storage unit (today's storage area of storage areas for 10 days) storing today's game history data;
Including a past history data storage unit (a storage area other than today among the storage areas for 10 days) storing game history data of the previous day,
The game history data erasing means shifts and stores the storage data of today's data storage unit into the past history data storage unit and erases the storage data of today's history data storage unit (1 of the 10 days storage area) The present storage area data may be erased by erasing data of the oldest storage area and shifting data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit storing the game history data before the previous day At the same time, since the stored data of today's history data storage unit is erased, today's gaming history data can be stored and held as past gaming history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past gaming history data is stored. It will also be possible to use it effectively.

(8-3) In the gaming system of (8-1) or (8-2), the gaming data transmission control performs control of transmitting gaming data generated during a game to the gaming device Means (game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data),
The game history data update storage means (the present P base game of the data storage unit 392) updates and stores the game history data based on the game data transmitted by the control of the game data transmission control means. Including a history data storage unit and a game history data storage unit)
The gaming device-side gaming history data display means displays gaming history data based on the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data update storage means (the present P base gaming history data storage section or the present S base game The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data is updated and stored on the gaming apparatus side based on the gaming data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the gaming history data stored therein is stored. Since the gaming history data is displayed by the gaming device-side gaming history data display means, the gaming history data displayed on the gaming device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(8-4) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the player is owned A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables gaming with the gaming machine using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored),
A gaming apparatus-side gaming history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on gaming history data generated by execution of a game on the gaming machine.
The communication unit receives the clear command when at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming machine is erased (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; clear transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 291) Receive notifications),
The gaming apparatus further includes clear processing means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) that performs a clear process of the history display in accordance with a clear command received by the communication unit.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the gaming history data is erased on the gaming machine side, the clear command is transmitted to the gaming apparatus, and the gaming apparatus side clears the history display according to the clear command. In order to be performed, it is possible to prevent a defect in history display on the gaming machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

(8-5) In the gaming apparatus of (8-4), the communication unit receives gaming data generated during the game of the gaming machine (a gaming data transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 291) To receive),
The gaming machine is a game history data update storage unit which updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit (the present P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 or the S Further comprising a base game history data storage unit),
The gaming device-side gaming history data display means displays gaming history data based on the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data update storage means (the present P base gaming history data storage section or the present S base game The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data is updated and stored on the gaming apparatus side based on the gaming data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the gaming history data stored therein is stored. Since the gaming history data is displayed by the gaming device-side gaming history data display means, the gaming history data displayed on the gaming device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) The present invention is provided with a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a game apparatus that enables a player-owned value to be used for a game, and a game area A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by firing game media on the
Game history data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; present P game history data storage unit of effect control unit 292 for display device) storing game history data generated by execution of a game in the game machine;
Game history data display means (display 54) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Gaming history data erasing means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means;
When gaming history data is erased by the gaming history data erasing means, control is performed to send a clear command to the gaming device to clear the history display executed on the gaming device based on the gaming history data. Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; gaming history data management unit 291 for transmitting a clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the gaming history data is erased on the gaming machine side, the clear command is transmitted to the gaming apparatus, and the gaming apparatus side clears the history display according to the clear command. In order to be performed, it is possible to prevent a defect in history display on the gaming machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

(9-2) In the gaming machine of (9-1), the gaming history data storage unit is
Today's history data storage unit (today's storage area of storage areas for 10 days) storing today's game history data;
Including a past history data storage unit (a storage area other than today among the storage areas for 10 days) storing game history data of the previous day,
The game history data erasing means shifts and stores the storage data of today's data storage unit into the past history data storage unit and erases the storage data of today's history data storage unit (1 of the 10 days storage area) Today's storage area data is erased by erasing data of the oldest storage area and shifting data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit storing the game history data before the previous day At the same time, since the stored data of today's history data storage unit is erased, today's gaming history data can be stored and held as past gaming history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past gaming history data is stored. It will also be possible to use it effectively.

  (9-3) In the gaming machine of (9-1) or (9-2), game data transmission control means (sending game data) for controlling transmission of game data generated during the game to the gaming device The game history data management unit 291) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update and store the game history data on the gaming apparatus side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the game displayed on the gaming apparatus The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising: a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables a gaming machine to play a game by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player;
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of a game on the game machine (FIG. 147, FIG. 148; present P game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for display unit or this S unit game History data storage unit),
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
The gaming device is
Gaming apparatus side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on the game history data;
When the information (clear command) to delete at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means is received, the history display clear process is performed (the data storage unit 391 Information (clear command) for deleting at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means together with the game history data stored in the base game history data storage unit) And a clear processing unit (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 391) for performing control to transmit to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, according to the information to the effect that at least a part of the game history data is erased, the game device clears the history display and the game history data stored in the game history data storage means The game machine side is controlled to transmit information to the effect that at least a part of the game is erased, so that at least a part of the game history data can be erased on the game machine side as well. It is possible to prevent the wrinkles of the history display.

  (10-2) In the gaming system according to the above (10-1), the gaming device is operated to play information indicating that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased. 6 and FIG. 143; an external communication unit 324 received from the hall management computer 1 may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the management device simultaneously distributes the information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the game arcade. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of deleting at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means.

(10-3) In the gaming system according to (10-1) or (10-2), the gaming machine erases at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means. The game history data storage means includes history data deletion means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291), and the game history data storage means includes:
Today's history data storage unit (today's storage area of storage areas for 10 days) storing today's game history data;
Including a past history data storage unit (a storage area other than today among the storage areas for 10 days) storing game history data of the previous day,
The game history data erasing means shifts and stores the storage data of today's data storage unit into the past history data storage unit and erases the storage data of today's history data storage unit (1 of the 10 days storage area) The present storage area data may be erased by erasing data of the oldest storage area and shifting data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit storing the game history data before the previous day At the same time, since the stored data of today's history data storage unit is erased, today's gaming history data can be stored and held as past gaming history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past gaming history data is stored. It will also be possible to use it effectively.

(10-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (10-1) to (10-3), the gaming machine performs control to transmit gaming data generated during the game to the gaming device Includes data transmission control means (game history data management unit 291 for sending game data),
The game history data update storage means (the present P base game of the data storage unit 392) updates and stores the game history data based on the game data transmitted by the control of the game data transmission control means. Including a history data storage unit and a game history data storage unit)
The gaming device-side gaming history data display means displays gaming history data based on the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data update storage means (the present P base gaming history data storage section or the present S base game The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data is updated and stored on the gaming apparatus side based on the gaming data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the gaming history data stored therein is stored. Since the gaming history data is displayed by the gaming device-side gaming history data display means, the gaming history data displayed on the gaming device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-5) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the player is owned A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables gaming with the gaming machine using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored),
A gaming apparatus-side gaming history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on gaming history data generated by execution of a game on the gaming machine.
When the information to delete at least a part of the game history data stored in the gaming machine is received, the history display is cleared and the game history stored in the game history data storage means A clear processing unit (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) for controlling transmission of information to the gaming machine to delete at least a part of the data is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, when information to the effect that at least a part of the game history data is to be deleted is received on the gaming machine side, the process of clearing the history display is performed and stored in the game history data storage means Since information to the effect that at least a part of the existing game history data is to be deleted is transmitted to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a defect in history display on the gaming machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

  (10-6) In the gaming apparatus of the above (10-5), a management apparatus in which information to the effect that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased is installed in the game arcade , And the external communication unit 324 received from the hall management computer 1).

  According to such a configuration, the management device simultaneously distributes the information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means to the plurality of gaming machines installed in the game arcade. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of deleting at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means.

(10-7) In the gaming apparatus of (10-5) or (10-6), the communication unit receives gaming data generated during the game of the gaming machine (sent from the gaming history data management unit 291) Receive received game data),
The gaming machine is a game history data update storage unit which updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit (the present P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 or the S Further comprising a base game history data storage unit),
The gaming device-side gaming history data display means displays gaming history data based on the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data update storage means (the present P base gaming history data storage section or the present S base game The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data is updated and stored on the gaming apparatus side based on the gaming data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the gaming history data stored therein is stored. Since the gaming history data is displayed by the gaming device-side gaming history data display means, the gaming history data displayed on the gaming device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(11-1) The present invention relates to gaming machines installed in a game arcade (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) And
Includes a first control unit (main control unit 323 or main control board 16, 116) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control unit 17, 117) communicably connected to each other,
The first control means includes first identification information (SID of the main control unit or SID of the main control board) for identifying the first control means, and the second control means which is an authentication partner. The second identification information (SID of CU communication control unit or SID of payout control unit) for identification is stored (FIG. 9; EEPROM 808),
The second control means stores the second identification information and the first identification information (FIG. 9; ROM 809, EEPROM 813).
Performing an authentication process in which the first control means and the second control means mutually authenticate (the authentication sequence of FIGS. 33 and 34);
The authentication process is
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 34) is generated using the second identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit stored in ROM 809 in FIG. 9) stored in the second control means. Transmitted to the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), the second control information stored in the first control means (CU communication control stored in the EEPROM 808) 34 generates a response code (response code A in FIG. 34) from the received challenge code and sends the response code to the second control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2), In the second control means, the response received using the stored second identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809) The first challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of code and (in CU communication control unit 80 determines the appropriateness of the response code received with the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated using the first identification information stored in the first control means (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 in FIG. 9) and transmitted to the second control means (The challenge code in FIG. 33), the second control means receives the first identification information stored therein (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 9), A response code (response code in FIG. 33) is generated from the challenge code and sent back to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores the first one. Second challenge / response authentication processing that determines the propriety of the received response code using identification information (in the main control unit 323, the received response The appropriateness of over de including by determining) and using the SID of the main control unit.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. And challenge code and response code transmitted and received between the two control means are leaked because authentication of the challenge response method is performed in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one of the control means. Even in this case, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means caused by leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

  (11-2) In the gaming machine of the above (11-1), the gaming machine may be configured as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a gaming medium is played in the gaming area by firing game media.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine where the game is performed by firing game media in the gaming area, the first control means and the second control means store identification information of a pair used for mutual authentication. Sends a challenge code from one control means to the other control means, generates a response code from the received challenge code using the identification information stored in the other control means, and sends it back to the one control means Because authentication of the challenge response method is performed, it is difficult to identify the stored identification information even if the challenge code or response code transmitted and received between both control means is leaked, It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the wrongdoing of the control means caused by the leakage of the identification information.

  (11-3) In the gaming machine of (11-1) above, the gaming machine is provided with a variable display device whose display state can be changed, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game. And the game result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, and one game is ended, and when the displayed result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result, a game can be made to be winning. (Slot machine 2S) may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the variable display device capable of changing the display state is provided, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. In the gaming machine where winning can be generated when one game is ended and the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result, the first control means and the second control means Stores the identification information of the pair used for mutual authentication, and the challenge code transmitted from the one control means to the other control means and received using the identification information stored in the other control means The challenge response type authentication is performed by generating a response code from one of them and sending it back to one of the control means. Even responsible sales person or response code is leaked, it is difficult to identify the identification information stored, can be prevented as much as possible fraud to the control unit due to leakage of the identification information.

(11-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (11-1) to (11-3), the first control means and the second control means are a pair used for mutual authentication. Storing authentication information (EEPROMs 808 and 813 store an authentication key comprising a common key);
The authentication process further includes
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit stores the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808) The encrypted random number B generated by using the random number B is generated and transmitted to the CU communication control unit as the device authentication request 2 together with the MAC), the second control means uses the authentication information for the result data Operation processing to check the consistency with the result data (the CU communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number B of the plaintext combining the received random number B) ,
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit stores the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813) To generate an encrypted random number A by encrypting the random number A and transmit it to the main control unit as the device authentication response 1 together with the MAC), the first control means uses the authentication information for the result data And the second authentication process (the main communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number A of the plaintext composited with the received random number A) and performs the arithmetic processing to check the consistency with the result data May be configured to include

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair authentication information used for the mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Security can be improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits and receives data as a result of execution of arithmetic processing using stored authentication information, even if the result data to be transmitted and received leaks, authentication information from it Is difficult to identify, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible tampering with the control means caused by information leakage.

  (11-5) In the gaming machine according to (11-4), the first control means and the second control means are appropriate as a result of the first authentication process and the second authentication process. After obtaining the authentication to the effect, encrypted communication may be performed using the authentication information (processing of communicating using the session key in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain authentication as a result of the first authentication process and the second authentication process using authentication information stored in each other, and to confirm that both authentication information are correct. After that, in order to perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information, it becomes possible to perform proper cryptographic communication with the correct authentication information.

(12-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), and a recording medium A game that enables a player to play a game using the valuable value (prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls held) of the player's possession specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A gaming system including a game device (card unit 3),
The gaming device is
Test mode detection means (card reader / writer 327 for detecting an inserted test card) for detecting transition to a test mode for confirming the operation of the gaming machine;
Test mode notification means (a game history data management unit 391 for transmitting a trial hitting mode notification) for notifying the gaming machine that the test mode detection means has detected transition to the test mode;
The gaming machine is
Normal game data update means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; effect control unit for a display) for updating the game history data generated by the player playing a game during the normal game not notified by the test mode notification means Including 292 P game history data storage units and S game history data storage units),
The gaming machine does not update the game history data by the normal game data update means based on the notification by the test mode notification means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; By the operation, the game history data is stored in the trial game history data storage unit instead of being stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the normal game data for updating the game history data generated by the player playing a game during the normal game which has not been notified by the test mode notification means for checking the operation of the gaming machine. Since the updating means is provided in the gaming machine, it is possible to count the game history data in the normal gaming in the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the gaming history data is not updated by the normal gaming data update unit based on the notification by the test mode notification unit, the game history data in the test mode is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. It becomes possible to count only the game history data in the normal game.

(12-2) In the gaming system according to (12-1), the gaming machine performs transmission of test mode data transmission control means for controlling transmission of gaming history data in the test mode to the gaming device. (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data in the trial mode);
The gaming device displays the gaming history data in the test mode transmitted by the control of the data transmission control means in the test mode (totaled by the function of the test mode processing unit of the gaming history data management unit 391 The game history data in the trial run mode may be displayed on the display 312).

  According to such a configuration, in order for the gaming history data in the test mode to be displayed by the gaming device, performing various adjustment operations while looking at the gaming history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device Work efficiency is improved.

  (12-3) In the gaming system according to (12-1) or (12-2), the gaming machine is game history data generated by a player playing a game during the normal game In addition to the above, the test mode in-progress data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; test game history data storage unit of effect control unit for display unit 292) for storing gaming history data in the test mode may be included. .

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes test mode data storage means for storing game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game is played It becomes possible to store game history data in the test mode separately from history data.

  (12-4) In the gaming system according to (12-3), in the test mode, the data storage means performs a predetermined operation (the icon of the recount button displayed on the display 312) in the test mode. Based on the touch operation being performed, the stored game history data is once cleared and then the storing of the game history data in the test mode is newly resumed (based on the reception of the recount notification) The processing unit may be configured to clear the storage of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data stored in the test mode data storage means is temporarily cleared after the gaming history data stored in the test mode is temporarily cleared based on the fact that the predetermined operation is performed in the test mode. In order to resume data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on game history data in the test mode, game history data in the test mode is newly totaled again to count the operation data after the adjustment, etc. As described above, it is possible to restart the aggregation of the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (12-5) In the gaming system according to (12-3) or (12-4), the gaming machine displays the gaming history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means in the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means during test mode for performing control to perform (testing mode processing unit for performing control to cause the display 54, 510 to display the game history data in the trial hitting mode).

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed in the gaming machine, various adjustment operations can be performed by viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed in the gaming machine. It becomes.

(12-6) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (12-1) to (12-5), the gaming machine can play a game by using points, and renews the points along with the game Includes point update means (game ball counter, point counter),
The point updating means updates the points so that the points do not fall below a predetermined value during the test mode (addition of game balls (or points based on reception of game ball addition command (or holding point addition command) , And may be configured to perform

  According to such a configuration, since the points do not fall below the predetermined value in the test mode, it is possible to continue counting of the game history in the test mode regardless of the points.

(12-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (12-1) to (12-6), the gaming machine can play a game by using points,
The game device instructs the gaming machine to set the holding point to a value exceeding the predetermined value when the holding point reaches a predetermined value in the test mode (a game ball addition instruction or a point addition instruction) May be configured to include a ball updating command transmission control unit (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; a trial hitting mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391) that performs control of transmitting (a).

  According to such a configuration, in the test mode, a command for setting the score to a value exceeding the predetermined value is transmitted to the gaming machine when the score reaches the predetermined value in the test mode. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus having a function of outputting a command for tallying game history data even after the points become a predetermined value.

(13-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and determines the player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a game apparatus (card unit 3) to be used for gaming. ,
Normal game data update means (FIG. 8) for updating the game history data generated by the player playing a game during the normal game in which the notification of the test mode for checking the operation of the gaming machine has not been received from the gaming device. Including the P game history data storage unit of the presentation effect control unit 292;
Based on the notification of the test mode being received from the gaming apparatus, the normal game history data updating means does not update the gaming history data (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; The game history data is stored in the trial game history data storage unit instead of being stored in the P unit game history data storage unit or the S unit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the normal game data update means for updating the game history data generated by the player playing a game during the normal game without receiving the notification of the test mode for checking the operation of the gaming machine Is provided, it is possible to count game history data in the normal game in the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the gaming history data is not updated by the normal gaming data update means based on the fact that the gaming machine has received the notification of the test mode, the normal gaming mode is distinguished from the gaming history data in the test mode. It becomes possible to count only game history data in the inside.

  (13-2) In the gaming machine according to the above (13-1), a test mode data transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145) for performing control of transmitting gaming history data in the test mode to the gaming device. The game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data in the trial run mode may be included.

  According to such a configuration, in order for the gaming history data in the test mode to be displayed by the gaming device, performing various adjustment operations while looking at the gaming history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device Work efficiency is improved.

  (13-3) In the gaming machine according to (13-1) or (13-2), the test mode may be separate from the game history data generated by the player playing a game during the normal game. A test mode in-progress data storage unit (FIG. 8, FIG. 145; a test game history data storage unit of the effect control unit for display unit 292) may be configured to store therein the game history data.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes test mode data storage means for storing game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game is played It becomes possible to store game history data in the test mode separately from history data.

  (13-4) In the gaming machine according to (13-3), in the test mode, the data storage unit performs a predetermined operation (touch of an icon of a recount button displayed on the display 312) in the test mode. Based on the fact that the game history data has been stored is temporarily cleared on the basis of the fact that the operation has been carried out, storage of the game history data in the test mode is newly resumed (based on the reception of the recount notification) The unit may be configured to clear the storage of the trial game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming history data stored in the test mode data storage means is temporarily cleared after the gaming history data stored in the test mode is temporarily cleared based on the fact that the predetermined operation is performed in the test mode. In order to resume data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on game history data in the test mode, game history data in the test mode is newly totaled again to count the operation data after the adjustment, etc. As described above, it is possible to restart the aggregation of the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (13-5) In the gaming machine of the above (13-4), in the test mode, the gaming machine performs control to display gaming history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means in the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means (a trial hitting mode processing unit that performs control to display the game history data in the trial hitting mode on the display 54, 510).

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed in the gaming machine, various adjustment operations can be performed by viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed in the gaming machine. It becomes.

(13-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (13-1) to (13-5), point updating means (game ball counter, holding points for updating points used in the game along with the game) Including a point counter),
The point updating means updates the points so that the points do not fall below a predetermined value during the test mode (addition of game balls (or points based on reception of game ball addition command (or holding point addition command) , And may be configured to perform

  According to such a configuration, since the points do not fall below the predetermined value in the test mode, it is possible to continue counting of the game history in the test mode regardless of the points.

  (13-7) In the gaming machine of (13-6), the point updating means sets a predetermined value for the gaming machine when the point becomes a predetermined value in the test mode. Based on the fact that a command (a game ball addition command or a game score addition command) for making the value to exceed the value is received from the gaming device, the points are updated so that the score does not fall below a predetermined value The game ball may be added (or added) according to the reception of the holding point addition command).

  According to such a configuration, it is based on having received from the gaming apparatus a command to make the gaming machine a value exceeding the predetermined value when the memory becomes a predetermined value in the test mode. A game having a function of outputting a command for tallying game history data even after the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode, in order to update the score so that the score does not fall below the predetermined value. An apparatus can be provided.

(14-1) The present invention is an enclosed type gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) for playing a game using gaming media (pachinko balls) enclosed in the inside,
A circulation path (out ball flow down path 702, collection ball passing path 901, ball collection path 189) for collecting game media used in the game and circulating it to a position usable for the game again,
A transport mechanism (transport section 45) for transporting the gaming medium in the circulation path to a position where it can be used for gaming;
A removal mechanism (ball removing unit 39) for removing the game media in the circulation path from the inside based on the operation detection for removing the game media;
A preparation completion detection means (ball raising switch (above) is detected to detect that the gaming medium supplied from the outside into the circulation path is transported by the transport mechanism and ready for gaming using the gaming medium. ) 41a, S36),
When the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the detection state, control to operate the extraction mechanism is performed, while the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the non-detection state. Control means for performing control to operate the transport mechanism until the ready state is detected by the ready state detection means (descent ball transfer process in FIG. 109 and dimmed process in FIG. 110). And B.).

  According to such a configuration, at the stage where the enclosed type game machine is installed in the game arcade, the preparation completion detection means does not detect the preparation completion detection state because the game medium is not supplied in the circulation path. In such a case, when the operation for supplying game media from the outside into the circulation path and removing the game medium is detected at such time, the preparation completion state is set by the preparation completion detection means. The transport mechanism is operated to transport the game medium by the transport mechanism until it is detected, while when the preparation completion detection means is already in the detection state, the extraction mechanism is operated by operation detection for extracting the game medium. Media can be removed. That is, the extraction operation of the game medium and the preparation operation at the time of installation of the enclosed type game machine can be performed by the same operation, the operation by the game arcade clerk is simplified, and the work efficiency is improved.

  (14-2) In the enclosed game machine of (14-1), the control means causes the preparation completion detection means to operate even when a predetermined time has elapsed since the transport mechanism (the transport unit 45) is operated. When it is not detected that the preparation is completed, control is performed to stop the operation of the transport mechanism (S32 to S40).

  According to such a configuration, the conveyance mechanism continues to operate in the case of an abnormal state in which the preparation completion detection unit does not detect that the preparation completion state has been reached even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the conveyance mechanism operated. It is possible to prevent such inconvenience.

(14-3) In the enclosed game machine according to the above (14-1) or (14-2), the prescribed number of the circulation paths (out ball flow down path 702, collected ball passing path 901, ball collected path 189) Number detection means (fired ball detection switch 903) for detecting game media collected in the circulation path after being used in a game, provided in a retention path portion in which gaming media enclosed above are placed in a retention state;
The apparatus further comprises excess determination means (S103) for determining the excess state of the enclosed game medium when the number detection means continuously detects the game medium for a predetermined time or more and is in the continuous detection state.

  According to such a configuration, when the number detection means continuously detects the game medium continuously for a prescribed time or more, it can be determined that the enclosed game medium is in the excess state, and the enclosed game medium is in excess. It is possible to determine an abnormality that becomes a state.

(14-4) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of the above (14-1) to (14-3), a firing means for firing a game medium in a position usable for playing and using it for playing Launcher 38),
It has a number-of-fired-number counting means (ball-raising switch (upper) 41a, payout control unit 17) for counting the number of gaming media fired by the launching means;
The game medium moves from the detection position of the preparation completion detection means (ball raising switch (upper) 41a, S36) to a position usable for gaming every time it is fired by the launching means (launching unit 38) (FIG. 2) ),
The shot number counting means counts the shot number based on the detection output of the preparation completion detecting means (FIG. 106; when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off, the number of shot balls discharged by the dispensing unit 17 +1).

  According to such a configuration, the detection output of the preparation completion detection means is also used to count the number of game media ejected by the ejection means, and the reduction in the number of parts by dual use of the function of the preparation completion means is achieved. be able to.

(15-1) The present invention is an enclosed type game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (pachinko ball) enclosed inside on condition that a recording medium (card) is received. (Pachinko machine 2)
A firing operation unit (ball hitting operation handle 25) for performing an operation of firing game media to the game area (game area 27);
A drive source (a launch motor 18) for driving a launch member (a striking hammer 920) for launching a game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit;
Origin detection means (fired motor origin sensor 37) for detecting the origin position of the drive operation of the drive source;
And error determination means (S71, S72) for determining an error based on the detection of the change in the detection state by the origin detection means when the recording medium is not received.

  According to such a configuration, the origin position detection unit detects the origin position of the drive source for driving the launch member for launching the game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit, and the recording medium is received. When it is not detected, it is determined that an error is detected based on detection of a change in the detection state by the origin detection means, so the drive source for driving the firing member operates despite the fact that the recording medium is not received It is possible to deal with it sometimes.

(15-2) In the enclosed type gaming machine of the above (15-1), a circulation path (out ball outflow path 702) for collecting the game medium used for the game and circulating it again to a position usable for the game. , Collection ball passing route 901, and ball collection route 189),
The game machine further comprises: number detection means (fired ball detection switch 903) used to count the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used for gaming;
The error determination means may determine an error (S102, S103) when detection by the number detection means is performed even when the recording medium is not received.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an error determination such that the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used for playing a game is detected when the recording medium is not received, It is possible to cope with such abnormalities.

(15-3) The enclosed type game machine according to the above (15-1) or (15-2), further including a communication unit (P communication control unit 81) for communicating with a game apparatus for receiving the recording medium,
The error determination means determines whether or not the recording medium is received based on a signal from the gaming apparatus received by the communication unit (FIG. 41; a command including an operation instruction of card holding ON) (Determined based on reception).

  According to such a configuration, it can be determined whether or not the recording medium is received based on the fact that the communication unit has received a signal from the gaming apparatus that receives the recording medium.

(15-4) Another aspect of the present invention is that it is possible to play a game using a game medium (pachinko ball) enclosed inside, provided that there is a valuable value (the number of game balls) It is an enclosed type game machine (pachinko machine 2),
A firing operation unit (ball hitting operation handle 25) for performing an operation of firing game media to the game area (game area 27);
A drive source (a launch motor 18) for driving a launch member (a striking hammer 920) for launching a game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit;
Origin detection means (fired motor origin sensor 37) for detecting the origin position of the drive operation of the drive source;
And error determination means (S71A, S72) for determining an error based on the detection of the change in the detection state by the origin detection means when there is no valuable value.

  According to such a configuration, when the origin detection unit detects the origin position of the drive source that drives the launch member for launching the game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit and there is no valuable value Since it is determined as an error based on the detection of the change in the detection state by the origin detection means, it is possible to cope with an abnormality that the drive source for driving the firing member operates despite the fact that there is no valuable value. It becomes.

(15-5) In the enclosed game machine of the above (15-4), a circulation path (out ball outflow path 702) for collecting the game medium used for the game and circulating it again to a position usable for the game. , Collection ball passing route 901, and ball collection route 189),
The game machine further comprises: number detection means (fired ball detection switch 903) used to count the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used for gaming;
The error judging means is also characterized in that an error is judged (S102A, S103) even when the detection is performed by the number detecting means when there is no valuable value.

  According to such a configuration, when there is no valuable value, detection is performed by the number detection means used to count the number of gaming media collected in the circulation path after being used for gaming. Sometimes errors can be determined, and such abnormal conditions can be dealt with.

(15-6) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of the above (15-1) to (15-5), a position where the game medium enclosed in the inside is collected after being used for playing a game and can be used for playing again A circulation mechanism (conveying unit 45) for circulating up to
And a circulation stopping unit (S93, S106) for stopping the circulation mechanism when the error judging unit judges that an error occurs.

  According to such a configuration, since the circulation mechanism is stopped when the error determination means determines that there is an error, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of circulating the game medium enclosed therein even when an error occurs. Can.

(15-7) In the enclosed game machine of any of the above (15-1) to (15-6), the valuable value is subtracted according to the use of the game medium for the game and according to the occurrence of the prize. Valuable value updating means (disbursement control unit 17, FIG. 46) to be added;
And updating stop means (S94, S107) for stopping the updating function of the valuable value updating means when the error determining means determines that an error has occurred.

  According to such a configuration, since the update function of the valuable value update unit is stopped when the error determination unit determines that the error is detected, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the update of the holding point is performed despite the error state. can do.

  (15-8) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of the above (15-1) to (15-7), the error judging means has a predetermined maximum allowable time interval at which the detection state by the origin detecting means is switched. When it is longer than the time or shorter than the predetermined maximum allowable time, it is characterized in that it is determined as an error (S76 to S83).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine an abnormality that the driving speed of the drive source driving the launch member for firing the game medium is too slow or too fast.

  (15-9) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of the above (15-1) to (15-8), the error determination unit is operated even when the origin detection unit elapses while the drive source is driven. Even when the detection signal is not output, the error determination is performed (S76, S76, S81, S82, S90).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an error determination when the drive source is not driven despite the fact that the drive source driving the launch member for firing the game medium is being driven. .

(16-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game,
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
When an operation to shift to the non-operation mode is performed when the player is in the operation mode in which the player can play a game, the data of the game state associated with the game control by the game control means in the operation mode is Game state storage means for saving (FIG. 131; variables related to the payout rate such as probability function, fluctuation time shortening function, etc. are temporarily saved in the save area),
When the operation to release the non-operation mode is performed, the game state is returned to the operation mode in the operation mode based on the data of the game state stored in the game state storage unit, and the game control by the game control unit Game state recovery means (FIG. 132; a variable relating to the payout rate such as the fluctuation time shortening function which has been temporarily evacuated to the evacuation area is recovered).

  According to such a configuration, when transitioning from the operation mode to the non-operation mode, data of the gaming state accompanying the game control by the game control means in the operation mode is stored in the gaming machine, and the operation to cancel the non-operation mode is When returning from the non-operation mode to the operation mode, the game control can be resumed by returning to the game state in the operation mode based on the stored data of the gaming state when performed. It becomes possible to prevent an increase in the burden of communication processing due to the transmission of game state data from another device.

(16-2) In the gaming machine according to the above (16-1), a display unit (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying predetermined information;
Display control means (display control board 53, effect control board 90; FIG. 8 and FIG. 145, a trial mode processing unit and the like) displaying on the display unit the game history of the game during which the game was played in the non-operation mode "Display at the time of trial hitting mode" and further,
The display control means clears the display of the game history on the display unit when the instruction to cancel the non-operation mode is received (FIG. 132; game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of big hits, the number of symbol turns) To clear).

  According to such a configuration, while it is possible to display the game history of the game in which the game was played in the non-operation mode by the display unit provided in the gaming machine, a command to cancel the non-operation mode is received. Since the display of the game history on the display unit is cleared when the game is performed, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history in the operation mode continues to be displayed despite the cancellation of the non-operation mode.

(16-3) In the gaming machine according to the above (16-1) or (16-2), a gaming area (playing area 27) in which gaming media are emitted;
Non-operating mode releasing means (FIG. 132; game; releasing the non-operating mode) on condition that the presence or absence of the winning of the launched gaming medium is determined when the operation of releasing the non-operating mode is performed When the operation is completed, the card unit is notified of completion of preparation of mode switching in an "operation response".

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the non-operation mode is canceled even though the presence or absence of the winning of the launched game medium is not determined.

(16-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (16-1) to (16-3), a variable display device (variable display device) whose display state can be changed;
When the display result of the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display mode, a specific gaming state control means (main control board 16 for controlling a big hit, control winning to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player) is generated. Main control board 116),
When a command to shift to the non-operation mode is received during variable display of the variable display device or in the middle of the specific gaming state, the variable display device is not variably displayed and a normal game is not in the specific gaming state Non-operation mode transition control means for performing control to shift to the non-operation mode after entering the state (FIG. 131; after confirming that the symbol is not changing and not big hit, the operation control mode of the main control board is switched Sending a preparation completion).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being shifted to the non-operation mode despite the variable display of the variable display device or in the middle of the specific gaming state.

(17-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and playing a game on the gaming machine using a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to be enabled, comprising:
The gaming device is
Player specific information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specific information (C-ID etc.) for specifying a player who plays a game;
The player specifying information transmission control means (FIG. 39; transmits an operation instruction including the C-ID after the card is inserted) for performing control to transmit the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means to the gaming machine CU communication control unit 80, S3 in FIG.
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing control to display the player's personal game history according to an instruction of the communication means;
The communication means receives the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means, and transmits the received player identification information to the display control means (FIG. 133; card insertion request) (Card ID)),
The display control means
The player identification information storage means (the present player gaming history data storage unit in FIGS. 8, 145 and 147, and the effect control board for a display in FIG. 133) for storing the transmitted player identification information Save "),
Based on the fact that the player identification information is transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the transmitted player identification information and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means The information processing apparatus is characterized by including identical determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) for performing an identical determination process of determining whether the same player is specified by the information.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus to the gaming machine , Storing the player specifying information on the gaming machine side, and then, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the transmitted game In order to perform the same determination processing to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored, the same as the previous player and the current player It is possible to determine the gender, and to prevent the inconvenience that the player is regarded as the same player despite being different players. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of collecting the game history data as data of a player different from the player who is actually playing a game.

(17-2) In the gaming system according to (17-1), the gaming device is
A recording medium reception unit (card insertion and ejection port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Recording medium ejection means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card shown in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to the return operation of the recording medium;
The display control means is a game history data totaling means (FIG. 8, FIG. 145, FIG. 147; game history data management unit 291 for totaling game history data for each player specified by the transmitted player specifying information. Normal mode processing unit, including the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for display,
After the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means, the player history information collecting means reads the player specifying information by the player specifying information reading means and transmits the player specifying information transmission control means Based on the fact that the same judging means judges that they are the same based on what has been made (FIG. 42; on the condition that it is judged as Y in S9), the same is judged to be the same A takeover means for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player (S12 in FIG. 42, [at the time of card ID match by the effect control board for a display in FIG. Is added to the personal game history data),
The player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means on the condition that the determination is not made the same by the same determination means (FIG. 42; on the condition that it is determined N in S9) Game history data deleting means for deleting game history data corresponding to the player specified by the information (S15 in FIG. 42, clears the personal game history data when the card ID does not match with the effect control board for a display in FIG. 133) And including.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data collected as the game history data of the previous player. If the player who played the game left the seat and returned again to resume the game in order to accumulate and count the game, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat As a result, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data by taking over, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. In addition, since the game history data corresponding to the previous player is erased when the previous player and the current player are not identical, the game history data of the current player is compared with the previous player's game history data. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data.

  (17-3) In the gaming system according to (17-1) or (17-2), the communication unit stores the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control unit. (“Card ID acquisition and storage” by the payout control unit in FIG. 133), and the personal game history of the player is stored separately from the display control means in association with the player identification information (by the payout control unit in FIG. [At the time of card ID match] The future game result is characterized by being summed with the personal game history data).

  According to such a configuration, since the communication means stores the personal game history of the player separately from the display control means in association with the player identification information, the player identification is also performed on the communication means side. The personal game history associated with the information can be used effectively.

(17-4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (17-1) to (17-3), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium. ) And
The player specifying information reading means reads, as the player specifying information, an ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received in a recording medium receiving unit for receiving the recording medium (FIG. 41; inserted) The card reader / writer 327 reads the C-ID of the card).

  According to such a configuration, the player can play the game since the ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read by the player specification information reading means as the player specification information. When the player specifying information is input, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of accepting the recording medium to the gaming apparatus to play a game, and the player specifying information inputting operation separately from the reception of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(17-5) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or the like) received by a recording medium (card) and specified by recording information recorded in the recording medium A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables the use of the stored balls) to play games 2S),
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
Display control means (display control circuit 53, effect control board 90) for performing control to display the player's personal game history in accordance with an instruction from the communication means;
The communication means transmits to the display control means (FIG. 133; card insertion request (card ID)) the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game transmitted from the gaming apparatus.
The display control means
The player identification information storage means (the present player gaming history data storage unit in FIGS. 8, 145 and 147 for receiving and storing the transmitted player identification information “card according to the effect control board for display device in FIG. 133 ID acquisition and storage "),
Based on the fact that the player identification information has been transmitted, the same player is identified by the transmitted player identification information and the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means. And the same determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) for performing the same determination process to determine whether or not to

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player who plays the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus to the gaming machine , Storing the player specifying information on the gaming machine side, and then, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the transmitted game In order to perform the same determination processing to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information and the player specifying information already stored, the same as the previous player and the current player It is possible to determine the gender, and to prevent the inconvenience that the player is regarded as the same player despite being different players.

  Moreover, since the player specifying information storage means for storing the player specifying information and the same determining means for performing the same determining process are provided in the display control means of the gaming machine, the communication means has the same determining processing function. What is not necessary is that the communication means common to the gaming machine having the display control means and the gaming machine not having the display control means can be used, and the small variety mass production of the communication means becomes possible.

(17-6) In the gaming machine of the above (17-5), the display control means is a game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player specified by the transmitted player specifying information Fig. 8, Fig. 145, Fig. 147; including the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 and the current player game history data storage unit of the effect control unit 292 for a display
The game history data totaling means is a player who has been determined to be the same on the condition that the same determination means determines that they are the same (FIG. 42; it is determined that S9 is Y in S9) The takeover count means (S12 in FIG. 42, [at the card ID match by the indicator control control board in FIG. Including personal gaming history data).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player is compared with the game history data collected as the game history data of the previous player. If the player who played the game left the seat and returned again to resume the game in order to accumulate and count the game, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat As a result, it is possible to cumulatively count the game history data by taking over, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player.

  (17-7) In the gaming machine of the above (17-5) or (17-6), the communication means stores the transmitted player specifying information (“card ID acquisition by payout control unit in FIG. 133 · Save "), storing the player's personal game history separately from the display control means in association with the player specific information ([when the card ID matches by the payout control unit of FIG. 133] future game results, Combined with personal game history data).

  According to such a configuration, since the communication means stores the personal game history of the player separately from the display control means in association with the player identification information, the player identification is also performed on the communication means side. The personal game history associated with the information can be used effectively.

  (17-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (17-5) to (17-7), the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded in the recording medium. It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the player can play the game since the ID for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit is read by the player specification information reading means as the player specification information. When the player specifying information is input, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of accepting the recording medium to the gaming apparatus to play a game, and the player specifying information inputting operation separately from the reception of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(18-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine are communicably connected (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium and playing a game on the gaming machine using a player-owned value (prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card) A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to be enabled, comprising:
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
And display control means (display control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with an instruction from the communication means.
The gaming device transmits the update value information specifying the update value of the valuable value and the update factor information indicating the update factor of the valuable value to the communication means (the number of requested addition balls and the number of requested subtraction balls in FIG. 121). And send CU state),
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the transmitted update value information ("update the number of game balls to 175" in FIG. 43, "update the number of game balls to 125" in FIG. 44), Of the updated game value and the transmitted update factor information (the game ball total number information of FIG. 125 and the CU of FIG. 126). Send status and),
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines only prepaid lending and replay lending in FIG. 134, both The screen display of FIG. 137 is performed in a distinguishable manner).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in a mode in which the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the factor causing the update, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented.

  (18-2) In the gaming system of (18-1) above, the display control means executes effect display in which the value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (see FIG. In the screen display of 137, the display is performed in which the balls are gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(18-3) In the gaming system according to the above (18-1) or (18-2), the gaming machine is capable of playing a game with points, and points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (see FIG. 46; addition of 3 balls is added to the number of game balls 1010),
The valuable value is the points (the number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether the use is due to the use of the balance as the gaming value owned by the player or the use of the earned value acquired by the player as a gaming value owned by the player (FIG. 126; It is characterized in that it includes a Bit 8 prepaid lending display and a Bit 9 replay lending display included in the CU state.

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the use of the balance or the use of the earned value acquired by the game is the update factor based on the update factor information.

(18-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or the like) received by a recording medium (card) and specified by recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a game apparatus that enables the use of the number of stored balls) for gaming ,
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
And display control means (display control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with an instruction from the communication means.
The communication means updates the valuable value on the basis of the updated value information specifying the updated value of the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device (“updating the number of gaming balls to 175 in FIG. 43, "Update the number of game balls to 125", "Update the number of game balls to 700" in FIG. 45), Update factor for the display control means, and factor for updating the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device Update factor information indicating the game number (the game ball total number information of FIG. 125 and the CU state of FIG. 126 are transmitted),
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines only prepaid lending and replay lending in FIG. 134, both The screen display of FIG. 137 is performed in a distinguishable manner).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in a mode in which the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the factor causing the update, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented.

  (18-5) In the gaming machine of the above (18-4), the display control means executes effect display in which the value is gradually updated in a mode according to the transmitted update factor information (FIG. 137). In the screen display of, the display is performed in which the balls are gradually updated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(18-6) In the gaming machine of the above (18-4) or (18-5), the gaming machine can play a game with points, and the points are added according to the occurrence of winnings (FIG. 46) ; 3 additional balls are added to the number of game balls 1010),
The said valuable value is the said point,
The update factor information is information indicating whether the use is due to the use of the balance as the gaming value owned by the player or the use of the earned value acquired by the player as a gaming value owned by the player (FIG. 126; It is characterized in that it includes a Bit 8 prepaid lending display and a Bit 9 replay lending display included in the CU state.

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the use of the balance or the use of the earned value acquired by the game is the update factor based on the update factor information.

(19-1) In the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium and enabling a game in the gaming machine using a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls held) specified by the recording information recorded in the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3), wherein
The gaming machine is
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
And display control means (display control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with an instruction from the communication means.
While the communication means receives information on the gaming state from the game control means and transmits the received information to the display control means (the gaming machine information received from the main control platform in FIG. 125 (B) and FIG. 126) Is transmitted to the effect control substrate 53 for a display), information on the valuable value owned by the player is received from the game apparatus, and transmitted to the display control means (the game ball obtained number information and back in FIG. 125 (B) It is characterized in that the ball addition information and the game ball firing number information).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine is provided with display control means for performing display control in accordance with an instruction of the communication means for communicating with the gaming apparatus, and information on the gaming state from the gaming control means for controlling the progression of the game The communication means receives the information and transmits the information to the display control means, while the communication means displays itself in order for the communication means to receive information on the valuable value owned by the player from the gaming device and transmit it to the display control means. The burden of display control processing of the communication means can be reduced compared to performing control.

(19-2) In the gaming system according to the above (19-1), the gaming machine can play a game with points (consumes the number of game balls and can play a game),
The communication means updates the points according to the game use of the points (FIG. 46; the number of subtraction balls used in the game = 13 is subtracted from the number of game balls = 1010), and from the game control means The points are updated based on the information on the winning and the information on the updating of the points from the gaming device (FIG. 46; the number of added balls = 3 corresponding to the winnings is added to the number of game balls = 1010; The number of gaming balls is added based on the number of requested addition balls = 125 in FIGS. 43 and 44, and the number of gaming balls is subtracted based on the number of required subtraction balls = 300 in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the load of the display control process of the communication control means, the communication means is based on the information on the winning from the game control means and the information on the update of the points from the gaming device. In order to update the points, it is possible to perform updating control of the points without difficulty.

(19-3) In the gaming system of the above (19-1) or (19-2), the gaming device stores and manages a valuable value (FIG. 7, FIG. 144; CU side is gaming) Remember and manage the number of balls),
The communication means transmits to the game apparatus the information on the gaming state received from the game control means (the ball related information received from the main control board of FIG. 123 is transmitted to the card unit).

  According to such a configuration, after alleviating the burden of the display control process of the communication control means, the communication control means can reasonably perform the process of transmitting the information on the valuable value received from the game control means to the gaming device. It becomes possible.

(19-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (19-1) to (19-3), the gaming device stores and manages points as gaming values owned by the player (see FIG. 7, Figure 144; CU side stores and manages the number of game balls),
The communication means transmits, to the gaming apparatus, update information of points based on information on winning from the game control means (the number information of game balls acquired as the number of prize balls received from the main control board of FIG. 123) To the card unit),
The gaming device updates the points based on the transmitted point update information (FIG. 46; number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 13 game balls based on operation response = 1010 + 3-) 13) updating to 1000).

  According to such a configuration, the load of the display control process of the communication control means is reduced, and then the communication control means performs the update information of the points based on the information on the winning from the game control means for the gaming machine It is possible to reasonably perform the process of transmitting to, and the gaming device can update the points based on the transmitted point update information.

(19-5) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or the like) received by a recording medium (card) and specified by recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a game apparatus that enables the use of the number of stored balls) for gaming ,
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
Communication means (payout control units 17 and 117) for communicating with the gaming device;
And display control means (display control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with an instruction from the communication means.
While the communication means receives information on the gaming state from the game control means and transmits the received information to the display control means (the gaming machine information received from the main control platform in FIG. 125 (B) and FIG. 126) Is transmitted to the effect control substrate 53 for a display), information on the valuable value owned by the player is received from the game apparatus, and transmitted to the display control means (the game ball obtained number information and back in FIG. 125 (B) It is characterized in that the ball addition information and the game ball firing number information).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine is provided with display control means for performing display control in accordance with an instruction of the communication means for communicating with the gaming apparatus, and information on the gaming state from the gaming control means for controlling the progression of the game The communication means receives the information and transmits the information to the display control means, while the communication means displays itself in order for the communication means to receive information on the valuable value owned by the player from the gaming device and transmit it to the display control means. The burden of display control processing of the communication means can be reduced compared to performing control.

(19-6) In the gaming machine according to the above (19-5), the gaming machine can play a game with points (consumes the number of game balls and can play a game),
The communication means updates the points according to the game use of the points (FIG. 46; the number of subtraction balls used in the game = 13 is subtracted from the number of game balls = 1010), and from the game control means The points are updated based on the information on the winning and the information on the updating of the points from the gaming device (FIG. 46; the number of added balls = 3 corresponding to the winnings is added to the number of game balls = 1010; The number of gaming balls is added based on the number of requested addition balls = 125 in FIGS. 43 and 44, and the number of gaming balls is subtracted based on the number of required subtraction balls = 300 in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the load of the display control process of the communication control means, the communication means is based on the information on the winning from the game control means and the information on the update of the points from the gaming device. In order to update the points, it is possible to perform updating control of the points without difficulty.

  (19-7) In the gaming machine of the above (19-5) or (19-6), the communication means stores and manages information of the gaming state received from the gaming control means as a valuable value (FIG. 7, FIG. 144: CU side stores and manages the number of gaming balls) sends to the gaming device (sends ball-related information received from the main control board of FIG. 123 to the card unit) I assume.

  According to such a configuration, after alleviating the burden of the display control process of the communication control means, the communication control means can reasonably perform the process of transmitting the information on the valuable value received from the game control means to the gaming device. It becomes possible.

  (19-8) In the gaming machine according to the above (19-5) to (19-7), the communication means has player-owned update information of points based on information on winning from the game control means. It is characterized by transmitting to the game device which stores and manages points as a game value (sending to a card unit the number information of game ball earned as the number of balls received from the main control board of FIG. 123). Do.

  According to such a configuration, the load of the display control process of the communication control means is reduced, and then the communication control means performs the update information of the points based on the information on the winning from the game control means for the gaming machine It is possible to reasonably perform the process of transmitting to, and the gaming device can update the points based on the transmitted point update information.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 4 wooden frame, 5 front frame, 6 glass door, 10 glass door open solenoid, 11 front frame open solenoid, 12 glass door closed detector, 13 front frame closed detector, 16, 116 main control board, 17, 117 payout control unit, 18 ball striking motor, 20 connection unit, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / ejection slot, 312 indicator, 319 replay button, 321 lending button, 322 return button , 323 control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 game machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connection unit, 701 out ball detection switch, 33 fail ball detection switch, 50 effect unit, 54 indicator.

Claims (1)

An enclosed type gaming machine for enclosing a gaming medium inside and performing a game using the enclosed gaming medium,
A circulation path for collecting game media used for playing and circulating it to a position usable for playing again;
A transport mechanism for transporting game media in the circulation path to a position usable for gaming;
A removal mechanism that performs an operation of removing game media in the circulation path from inside based on operation detection for removing game media;
A preparation completion detection means for detecting that gaming media supplied from outside to the circulation path are transported by the transport mechanism and are ready for gaming using the gaming media;
When the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the detection state, control to operate the extraction mechanism is performed, while the operation detection is performed when the preparation completion detection means is in the non-detection state. And control means for controlling the operation of the transport mechanism until the ready detection means detects that the ready state has been reached.
An enclosed type game machine, comprising mode switching means capable of switching between a business mode for the player to play a game and a non-business mode for checking the operation.